Escolar Documentos
Profissional Documentos
Cultura Documentos
Online Manual
Read Me First
Useful Functions Available on the Machine
Overview of the Machine
Printing
Copying
Scanning
Faxing
Troubleshooting
English
Contents
Read Me First. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
How to Use the Online Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Trademarks and Licenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Search Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Notes on Operation Explanations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Useful Functions Available on the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Connect Wirelessly with Ease in "Access Point Mode". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Print Photos Easily Using My Image Garden. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Download a Variety of Content Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Print Items with Easy-PhotoPrint+ (Web Application). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Connection Methods Available on the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Connection without Using a Wireless Router (Windows XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Checking the Ink Status with the LCD on the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Making Copies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Setting Items for Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Scanning from a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Scanning with IJ Scan Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Scanning with Application Software that You are Using (ScanGear). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.). 576
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Adjusting Histogram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Adjusting Tone Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Setting Threshold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Faxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Preparing for Faxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
Connecting the Telephone Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Setting the Telephone Line Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
Setting the Receive Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Setting the Sender Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Setup when Opening the Address Book for the First Time (Windows XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
How to Open the Setting Screen of the Fax Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
Problems with Network Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
Cannot Detect a Machine on a Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
The E-mail Client You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Client. .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
13
Cannot Perform Sequential Broadcasting by Redialing, or Cannot Dial by Entering the Numbers 871
Errors Often Occur When You Send a Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
1003. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
1200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
1203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928
1250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
1401. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
1403. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931
1485. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
1682. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
1684. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934
1686. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
1688. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
168A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
1702. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938
1703. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
1704. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
1705. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
1712. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
1713. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943
1714. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
1715. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
1871. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
1890. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
2110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
2120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
2700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
2802. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
2803. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954
2900. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
2901. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
4100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
4103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
5011. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961
5012. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962
5040. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
5100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
5200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
5400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
5B02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
5B03. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
5B04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
5B05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
5B12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
5B13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
5B14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
5B15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974
6000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
6500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
6800. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977
6801. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978
6900. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
6901. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980
6902. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
6910. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982
6911. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
6930. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984
6931. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
6932. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986
6933. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
6936. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
6937. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
6938. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990
6939. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
693A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
6940. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
6941. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
6942. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
6943. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
6944. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
6945. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
6946. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999
9500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
B201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
B202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
B203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
B204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
Read Me First
Notes on Online Manual Usage
How to Print
How to Print
Use the print function of your Web browser to print this guide.
To set to print background colors and images, follow the steps below.
Note
• In Windows 8, print in the desktop version.
• In Internet Explorer 8
• In Mozilla Firefox
• In Google Chrome
18
How to Use the Online Manual
Caution
Instructions that, if ignored, could result in personal injury or material damage caused by incorrect
operation of the equipment. These must be observed for safe operation.
Important
Instructions including important information. To avoid damage and injury or improper use of the
product, be sure to read these indications.
Note
Instructions including notes for operation and additional explanations.
Basic
Note
• Icons may vary depending on your product.
19
Trademarks and Licenses
• Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
• Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other
countries.
• Windows Vista is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other
countries.
• Internet Explorer is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or
other countries.
• Mac, Mac OS, AirPort, Safari, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
• IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under
license.
• Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome, Android, Google Play and Picasa are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Google Inc.
• Adobe, Photoshop, Photoshop Elements, Lightroom, Adobe RGB and Adobe RGB (1998) are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other
countries.
• Photo Rag is a trademark of Hahnemühle FineArt GmbH.
• Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. and licensed to Canon Inc.
Note
• The formal name of Windows Vista is Microsoft Windows Vista operating system.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of Apple Computer, Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Apache License
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
20
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by
Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting
the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled
by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means
(i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by
contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii)
beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this
License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to
software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source
form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to
other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under
the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example
is provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or
derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other
modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License,
Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name)
to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any
modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to
Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity
authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted"
means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its
representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code
control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for
the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is
conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a
Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution
has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor
hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform,
sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby
grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as
stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and
otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by
such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of
21
their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent
litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the
Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent
infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate
as of the date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in
any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the
following conditions:
1. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
2. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files;
and
3. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright,
patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those
notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
4. If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that
You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such
NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at
least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative
Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or,
within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices
normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not
modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You
distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such
additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or
different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications,
or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of
the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally
submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of
this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein
shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with
Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service
marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in
describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides
the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without
limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the
appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your
exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence),
contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent
acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct,
indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this
License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of
22
goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages
or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof,
You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other
liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations,
You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other
Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any
liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any
such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
23
Enter keywords in the search window and click (Search).
Search Tips
You can search for target pages by entering keywords in the search window.
Note
• The displayed screen may vary.
• When searching from this page or the "Home" page without entering your product's model name or your
application's name, all products supported by this guide will be considered for the search.
If you want to narrow down the search results, add your product's model name or your application's
name to the keywords.
Enter your product's model name and a keyword for the function you want to learn about
• Troubleshooting Errors
24
Note
• The displayed screen varies depending on your product.
Enter your application's name and a keyword for the function you want to learn about
Example: When you want to learn how to print collages with My Image Garden
Enter "My Image Garden collage" in the search window and perform a search
Example: When you want to browse the page referred to by the following sentence on a scanning
procedure page
Refer to "Color Settings Tab" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.
Enter "(your product's model name) scan Color Settings Tab" in the search window and perform a
search
25
Notes on Operation Explanations
In this guide, most of the operations are described based on the windows displayed when Windows 8.1
operating system (called Windows 8.1 below) or Windows 8 operating system (called Windows 8 below) is
used.
26
Useful Functions Available on the Machine
Connect Wirelessly with Ease in "Access Point Mode"
Print Photos Easily Using My Image Garden
Download a Variety of Content Materials
Print Items with Easy-PhotoPrint+ (Web Application)
Connection Methods Available on the Machine
Using PIXMA Cloud Link
Printing with Google Cloud Print
Printing from AirPrint Compliant Device
Checking Printer Information
Online Storage Integration Function
Print Easily from a Smartphone or Tablet with PIXMA Printing Solutions
Printing with Windows RT
Easy Scanning with Auto Scan
Scanning Items Larger than the Platen (Image Stitch)
Scanning Multiple Items at One Time
27
Connect Wirelessly with Ease in "Access Point Mode"
The machine supports "access point mode" in which you can connect to the machine wirelessly from a
computer or smartphone even in an environment without a wireless LAN router.
Switch to "access point mode" with simple steps to enjoy scanning and printing wirelessly.
When you use the machine with the access point mode, be sure to specify the access point name of the
machine and the security setting in advance.
28
Print Photos Easily Using My Image Garden
<Calendar View>
<People View>
If there is an item you like, you can easily print it in just two steps.
1. In Image Display of Quick Menu, select the item you want to print.
2. Print the item with My Image Garden.
29
Place Photos Automatically
Delightful items are created easily as the selected photos are placed automatically according to the
theme.
30
Download a Variety of Content Materials
CREATIVE PARK
A "printing materials site" where you can download all the printing materials for free.
Various types of content such as seasonal cards and paper crafts that can be made by assembling paper
parts are provided.
It is easily accessible from Quick Menu.
Note
• The designs of PREMIUM Contents provided in this page are subject to change without prior notice.
31
Print Items with Easy-PhotoPrint+ (Web Application)
You can easily create and print personalized items such as calendars and collages, anytime and anywhere,
by simply accessing Easy-PhotoPrint+ on the web from a computer or tablet.
By using Easy-PhotoPrint+, you can create items in the latest environment without going through the trouble
of installation.
Moreover, you can use various photos for your item through integration with social networks such as
Facebook, or with online storage, web albums, etc.
32
Connection Methods Available on the Machine
The following connection methods are available on the machine.
Wireless Connection
USB Connection
Wireless Connection
There are two methods for connecting the printer to your device (such as a smartphone). One method is
to connect using a wireless router, and the other method is to connect without using a wireless router.
The two connection methods cannot be used at the same time.
If you have a wireless router, it is recommended that you use the method described in Connection Using a
Wireless Router.
When connecting another device while a device is already connected to the printer, connect it using the
same connection method as the connected device.
If you connect using a different connection method, the connection to the device in use will be disabled.
33
Connection without Using a Wireless Router
• Connect the printer and a device without using a wireless router. Connect a device and the printer
directly using the printer's access point mode function.
• When establishing a connection in access point mode, Internet connection may become unavailable.
In that case, web services for the printer cannot be used.
• If you connect a device connected to the Internet via a wireless router to the printer that is in access
point mode, the connection between the device and wireless router will be disabled. In that case, the
connection of the device may switch to a mobile data connection automatically depending on your
device. Transmission fees for connecting to the Internet using a mobile data connection apply.
• In access point mode, you can connect up to five devices at the same time. If you try to connect a
sixth device while five devices are already connected, an error will appear.
If an error appears, disconnect a device that does not use the printer, then configure settings again.
• Network settings such as the SSID and security protocol can be changed on the printer.
USB Connection
Connect the printer and a computer with a USB cable. Prepare a USB cable.
Restrictions
34
Connection without Using a Wireless Router (Windows XP)
Restrictions
2. Use the or button (B) to select Device settings, then press the OK button.
35
6. Select SSID, then press the OK button.
7. Check SSID information in the printer screen, then press the Back button (C).
You will use the SSID information in the subsequent steps.
9. Check the Password (network key), then press the Back button.
You will use the Password (network key) in the subsequent steps.
11. Right-click the Wireless Network Connection icon in the notification area of the taskbar on
the computer, then select View Available Wireless Networks.
36
12. Select the network name (SSID) you want to use, then click Connect.
14. When connection is complete, click Back until the screen below appears.
Proceed with the setup.
37
Restrictions
When connecting another device while a device (such as a smartphone) is already connected to the printer,
connect it using the same connection method as the connected device.
If you connect using a different connection method, the connection to the device in use will be disabled.
Connection Using a Wired Network cannot be performed on printers that do not support a wired connection.
• When connecting a device and the printer in access point mode, Internet connection may become
unavailable. In that case, web services for the printer cannot be used.
38
• In access point mode, you can connect up to five devices at the same time. If you try to connect a
sixth device while five devices are already connected, an error will appear.
If an error appears, disconnect a device that does not use the printer, then configure settings again.
• Devices connected to the printer in access point mode cannot communicate with each other.
• Firmware updates for the printer are not available while using the access point mode.
• When a device has been connected to the printer without using a wireless router and you want to set
it up again using the same connection method, disconnect it first. Disable the connection between the
device and printer in the Wi-Fi setting screen.
39
Notice for Web Service Printing
◦ Your account information will be used in personal identification process of the selected service.
◦ Canon will not provide your account information to any third party without your consent, except for
sending to the service provider or providing based on laws and regulations.
◦ After the conclusion of non-disclosure agreement, Canon may deposit your account information to
the contractor to achieve the purpose of use.
◦ Canon endeavors to secure the safety of your account information.
◦ It is at your option to enter and send your account information. However, the service that requires
to enter your account information is not available unless you enter and send it.
◦ Your account information does not remain in Canon Inc. server. At the latest, it will be deleted
when you have disconnected your printer from LAN.
◦ For details, contact a Canon-authorized sales representative in the country or region you live in.
40
Copyrights and Rights of Publicity
When printing from the photo sharing site:
• Observe the conditions of use of the photo sharing site when you use photos on the site.
• It is unlawful to reproduce or edit the copyrighted work of another person without permission from the
copyright holder, except for personal use, use within the home, or other use within the limited scope
as defined by the copyright. Additionally, reproducing or editing photographs of people may infringe
on Rights of Publicity.
1. The copyright of each material (photos, illustrations, logos, or documents: hereinafter referred to as
"the materials") provided on the web template printing service belongs to their respective owners.
Issues pertaining to Rights of Publicity may arise regarding the use of any of people or characters
displayed on the web template printing service.
Except as otherwise permitted (please see "2" below), copying, modifying or distributing all or a
portion of any of the materials contained on the web template printing service without prior consent of
the respective rights (Rights of Publicity and Copyright) holder is strictly prohibited.
2. All of the materials provided on the web template printing service can be freely used for personal and
non-commercial purposes.
41
Using PIXMA Cloud Link
By using PIXMA Cloud Link, you can connect your printer to a cloud service, such as CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY, Evernote, or Twitter, and use the following functions without using a computer:
In addition, you can use various functions by adding and registering apps that are linked with various cloud
services.
Important
• In certain countries, PIXMA Cloud Link may not be available or the available apps may be different.
• Some apps require that you have an account before you use those apps. For such apps, please set up
an account beforehand.
• To find out which models support PIXMA Cloud Link check the Canon homepage.
• The screen display may change without prior notice.
42
Using PIXMA Cloud Link from Your Smartphone, Tablet, or
Computer
Before Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center
Preparations Before Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center
Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center
Adding a Printer
Adding a PIXMA Cloud Link User
Troubleshooting Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center
43
Before Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center
Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center is a service that links with the cloud function of the printer and allows you
to perform operations such as registering and managing apps from your smartphone or tablet device, and
checking the print status, print error, and ink status of the printer. You can also print app photos and
documents from your smartphone or tablet.
• Precautions
If you plan to use the web service to print documents, be sure to check these precautions beforehand.
• Printer specification
Check that Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center supports the printer.
• Network environment
Important
• The user will bear the cost of Internet access.
• Operating requirements
For computers, smartphones, and tablet devices, see "Requirements for Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing
Center operation".
Important
• This service may not be available in certain countries or regions. Also even if the service is available,
there are apps that cannot be used in certain regions.
44
Requirements for Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center operation
Computer
CPU x86 or x64 1.6 GHz or higher
RAM 2 GB or higher
OS Browser
Internet Explorer 8*
Windows XP SP3 or later Mozilla Firefox
Google Chrome
Internet Explorer 10
Windows 8 Mozilla Firefox
Google Chrome
Internet Explorer 11
Windows 8.1 Mozilla Firefox
Google Chrome
* When you use Internet Explorer 8, the web pages may not display correctly. Canon recommends that
you upgrade to Internet Explorer 9 or later, or use another browser.
Smartphone or tablet
OS Browser Resolution
Important
• On the browser you are using, enable JavaScript and cookies.
• If you use the zoom function or change the font size on your browser, the web pages may not display
correctly.
• If you use the translation function of Google Chrome, the web pages may not display correctly.
• If you use a proxy server outside of your country, the service may not be able to determine the correct
region.
• In an in-house network environment, the 5222 port must be released. For confirmation instructions,
contact the network administrator.
45
Preparations Before Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center
To use the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center, you need to follow the steps described below and register
the user information.
1. On the printer operation panel, select the Setup button, and then select Web
service setup -> Connection setup -> IJCloudPrintingCtr -> Register w/ service
4. Follow the instructions displayed in the window, and print the URL of the authentication
site and the Printer registration ID
Set A4 size or Letter size or Legal size plain paper and select OK.
The authentication URL and Printer registration ID are printed.
Note
• You will use this printed page in the next step.
46
Important
• The operation to complete the registration should be done within 60 minutes.
Access the URL on the printed page, and then enter the e-mail address and
other necessary information
Important
• Do not use the Back button of the web browser while an operation is processing. The screen may not
transition properly.
1. Use the web browser on your PC, smartphone, tablet, or other devices to access the
authentication URL
2. When the printer registration screen is displayed, select Create new account
47
3. Enter the E-mail address and Printer registration ID of the printer's owner, and then
select OK
The registration page URL is sent to the e-mail address entered.
Important
• There are character restrictions for the e-mail address, as shown below.
48
receiving e-mails from "noreply@mail.cs.c-ij.com".
There will be no error display even if you could not receive the e-mail because of the spam filter
setting or if you entered an incorrect e-mail address.
Access the URL in the e-mail, register the information, and complete the
user registration
1. When an e-mail with the subject "Information on Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center" is
sent to the e-mail address that you entered, select the URL
2. In the License agreement and Privacy statement windows of Canon Inkjet Cloud
Printing Center, read the statements, and select Agree if you agree
49
3. In the user information entry screen, enter your Password, and select Next
Enter your password for logging in to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.
Important
• There are character restrictions for the Password, as shown below.
• The password must be between 8 and 32 characters long, using single-byte alphanumeric
characters and symbols (!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~). (Alphabets are case-sensitive)
50
Important
• The User Name entry field has the following character restrictions:
• The user name must be between 1 and 20 characters long, using single-byte alphanumeric
characters and symbols (!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~). (Alphabets are case-sensitive)
51
Enter the code for authenticating the user.
Important
• You can register to this service without setting a Security code. However, from the viewpoint of
security, we recommend that you set a Security code.
• The Security code entry field has the following character restrictions:
• Up to 8 single-byte numbers
Enter the registered e-mail address and password, and log in to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.
52
Printing Your Printer registration ID
To add a printer by using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center, you will need a Printer registration ID.
From the operation panel of this printer, print the URL of the authentication site and your Printer
registration ID. The procedure is as follows:
Important
• To use this function, you must connect this printer to the Internet.
2. On the printer operation panel, select the Setup button, and then select Web
service setup -> Connection setup -> IJCloudPrintingCtr -> Register w/ service
5. Follow the instructions displayed in the window, and print the URL of the authentication site
and your Printer registration ID
When you set A4 size or Letter size or Legal size plain paper and select OK, the authentication site URL
and your Printer registration ID are printed.
Important
• The operation to complete the registration should be done within 60 minutes.
53
Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center window
This section describes the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center screens that are displayed on your
smartphone, tablet device, or computer.
Important
• You have 5 tries to enter your password. If you fail, you will not be able to log in for about the next
hour.
• You remain logged in for an hour after the last access.
Language
Select the language you will be using.
E-mail address
Enter the e-mail address that you entered in the user registration.
Important
• The e-mail address is case-sensitive. Make sure the case is correct.
Password
Enter the password that you entered in the user registration.
54
Create new account
A new registration will be added to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.
For a new registration, you need the Printer registration ID.
System requirements
This displays the system requirements for the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.
Important
• With this service, the functions available to Standard user of the printer are different from those
available to the printer Administrator.
Standard user can only use the functions marked by an asterisk (*).
You can use areas shown below to start*, add, and manage apps.
If you are using a smartphone or a tablet, you can also print photos and documents.
55
(4) Display area
(5) Menu area
When you select , the Mng. printer screen or the Manage users screen appears.
For general users, only the Select printer screen appears.
From the Mng. printer screen, you can check* or update* printer information registered to the Canon
Inkjet Cloud Printing Center, copy apps, change printer names, delete printers, and add printers.
From the Select printer screen, you can check* or update* printer information registered to the Canon
Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.
56
• Display update date/time of the printer information*
This displays the date and time the printer information was last updated.
refreshes the information.
Set the Destination printer and the Source printer. Then select OK.
Important
• The printer name entry has the following character limitation:
When you select , the printer is deleted from the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.
When transferring the ownership of the printer, select Clear the information saved on the printer.
Select this to add printers to be used in the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.
You need a Printer registration ID to add a printer.
57
Note
• Although the number of printers that can be registered for one e-mail address is not limited,
only up to 16 printers are guaranteed to operate.
From the Manage users screen, you can check user information registered to the Canon Inkjet Cloud
Printing Center, delete users, add users, and change the Administrator and Standard user settings.
Select the check box of the user to be deleted, and select Delete.
However, you cannot delete yourself. To delete yourself, cancel your membership from the user
information screen.
You can change the privileges of the Administrator and Standard users.
The Administrator can change the printer name from the Mng. printer screen of the left context menu.
58
• Sort (Administrator only)
• Latest notices*
This displays the latest notices. The symbol indicates that there is a new unread notice.
59
• User information*
• Help/legal notices*
The description of the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center screen and various reminders are
displayed.
• Log out*
This opens the Log out screen of the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.
• Apps*
60
On the Search apps screen, the apps that you can register by using the Canon Inkjet Cloud
Printing Center are displayed by category.
Note
• Description of displayed icons
: Cannot be used because it is not yet released, not available in your region, or does
not support your model.
: Can be used with genuine Canon ink.
61
• Properties*
This screen displays the status of the printer that is currently selected.
You can check how much ink is remaining or details about an error that occurred. You can also
access the ink purchasing site and the Online Manual.
Important
• The Properties displayed may differ from the actual status at the display time, depending on
the printer status.
• Manage jobs*
62
(8) Display area
From the Mng. printer screen, you can check* or update* printer information registered to the Canon
Inkjet Cloud Printing Center, copy apps, change printer names, delete printers, and add printers.
From the Select printer screen, you can check* or update* printer information registered to the Canon
Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.
63
• Display update date/time of the printer information*
This displays the date and time the printer information was last updated.
refreshes the information.
Set the Destination printer and the Source printer. Then select OK.
Important
• The printer name entry has the following character limitation:
When you select , the printer is deleted from the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.
When transferring the ownership of the printer, select Clear the information saved on the printer.
64
• Add printers (Administrator only)
Select this to add printers to be used in the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.
You need a Printer registration ID to add a printer.
Note
• Although the number of printers that can be registered for one e-mail address is not limited,
only up to 16 printers are guaranteed to operate.
From the Manage users screen, you can check user information registered to the Canon Inkjet Cloud
Printing Center, delete users, add users, and change the Administrator and Standard user settings.
Select the check box of the user to be deleted, and select Delete.
However, you cannot delete yourself. To delete yourself, cancel your membership from the user
information screen.
You can change the privileges of the Administrator and Standard users.
65
The Administrator can change the printer name from the Mng. printer screen of the Mng. printer
button.
When you finish sorting, press the Set sort order button and confirm the order.
On the Search apps screen, the apps that you can register by using the Canon Inkjet Cloud
Printing Center are displayed by category.
66
◦ When you select , the details of the app are displayed.
When you select / , you can choose to register or unregister the app.
Note
• Description of displayed icons
: Cannot be used because it is not yet released, not available in your region, or does
not support your model.
: Can be used with genuine Canon ink.
• Properties*
This screen displays the status of the printer that is currently selected.
You can check how much ink is remaining or details about an error that occurred. You can also
access the ink purchasing site and the Online Manual.
Important
• The Properties displayed may differ from the actual status at the display time, depending on
the printer status.
• Manage jobs*
67
(5) Notices area
This displays the latest notice. Nothing is displayed in this area if there is no notice.
When you select Notice list, you can display up to 40 items.
68
69
Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center
When the user registration is completed, you can log in to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center and use
the service.
1. From your PC, smartphone, or tablet, access the service login URL (http://cs.c-ij.com/)
2. On the Login screen, enter the E-mail address and Password, and then select Log in
Important
• The e-mail address and password are case-sensitive. Make sure the case is correct.
E-mail address
Enter the e-mail address that you entered in the user registration.
Password
Enter the password that you entered in the user registration.
Important
• If you fail to log in five straight times, you will not be able to login again for an hour.
• You remain logged in for an hour after the last access.
• The service may not function properly if you log in from multiple devices at the same time.
After logging in, you can use useful services such as adding/managing apps that work in conjunction with
this product's cloud functionality and checking the ink status.
For screen descriptions and operation instructions, see "Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center window".
Printing procedure
This section introduces the photo printing procedure by using CANON iMAGE GATEWAY as an example.
70
Important
• The available functions differ depending on the app.
• The printing procedure differs depending on the app.
• You need to get the account and register photo and other data beforehand.
• The following file formats can be printed: jpg, jpeg, pdf, docx, doc, xlsx, xls, pptx, ppt, and rtf.
The file formats that can be printed differ depending on the app.
• Before you print, check that printer is on and is connected to the network. Then start.
• This is available if you are using a smartphone or tablet.
Note
• You can use CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to print jpg and jpeg file formats.
2. Enter the information according to the instructions on the authentication screen, and then
select Log in
71
4. In the displayed image list, select the image that you want to print, and then select Next
72
6. A print job completion message appears, and printing starts
To continue printing, select Continue, and perform the operation from Step 3.
To end the printing, select Apps. The screen returns to the apps list screen.
Important
• If a print job is not printed within 24 hours after the print job is issued, the print job will expire and
cannot be printed.
• With premium apps that limit the number of print jobs, print jobs that expire and cannot be printed are
also included in the print count.
Adding a Printer
73
Adding a Printer
With one account, you can use the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center services on multiple printers.
2. From the browser on your smartphone, tablet, or computer, access the authentication site
URL
4. Enter the information according to the instructions on the authentication screen, and then
select Log in
74
Note
• When you access the service from Remote UI, the Printer registration ID is entered
automatically.
75
Adding a PIXMA Cloud Link User
Several people can use one printer.
This section describes the user addition procedure and the user privileges.
Adding a user
Note
• When you select Add user, the service first checks whether the maximum number of users has
been reached. If new users can be added, the user registration screen appears.
• The maximum number of users that can be added for 1 printer is 20.
76
3. Enter the e-mail address of the user to be added, and then select OK
The URL for completing the registration is then sent to the entered e-mail address.
5. Read the terms displayed in the License agreement and Privacy statement screens. If
you agree to the terms, select Agree.
6. In the user information entry screen, enter your Password, and select Next
77
Enter your password for logging in to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.
Important
• There are character restrictions for the Password, as shown below.
• The password must be between 8 and 32 characters long, using single-byte alphanumeric
characters and symbols (!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~). (Alphabets are case-sensitive)
Important
• The User Name entry field has the following character restrictions:
• The user name must be between 1 and 20 characters long, using single-byte alphanumeric
characters and symbols (!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~). (Alphabets are case-sensitive)
78
8. Specify the Time zone setting, and select Next
Select your region on the list. If you cannot find your region on the list, select the one closest to your
region.
Important
• You can register to this service without setting a Security code. However, from the viewpoint of
security, we recommend that you set a Security code.
• The Security code entry field has the following character restrictions:
79
• Up to 8 single-byte numbers
Note
• A cookie for the selected user is added to the printer, and the login status of each user is recovered.
Cookies for up to 8 users can be registered to 1 printer.
Note
• The user who is registered first becomes the Administrator. The administrator can change the
privileges of users from the Manage users screen.
An Administrator can change printer information, add and delete apps, manage users, and perform
various other operations.
A Standard user can check printer information and start apps.
For information about the functions that each user can use, refer to the "Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing
Center window".
80
Troubleshooting Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center
If an app cannot be installed
If the registered app is not in the Apps list
If the information is not updated when you press the Update button
If you do not receive the registration e-mail
If you cannot print
Printing starts on its own even if you do not do anything
If you are unable to log in correctly even after entering the correct password in iOS or Mac
If the information is not updated when you press the Update button
Because the Properties screen requires network connection with this product, the information may not be
reflected immediately. Please wait awhile, and then try updating the information again.
If the information is still not updated, then check that the product is connected to the Internet.
On the printer operation panel, select the Setup button, and then select Web service setup ->
Connection setup -> IJCloudPrintingCtr -> Delete from service to delete the service registration.
After resetting the printer, repeat the user registration of Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center from the
beginning.
• If printing does not start even after you wait awhile, go to the printer operation panel, select
Setup, and run Web service inquiry. If printing does not start, run the inquiry several times.
81
If the problem is not resolved, use the printer driver from your computer to perform the print job and check
whether the data can be printed normally on the printer.
If you still cannot print, see the troubleshooting page for your model on the Home of the Online Manual.
Note
• With a wireless LAN connection, after the printer is turned on, it may take several minutes before
communication is possible. Check that your printer is connected to the wireless network, and wait a
while before you start printing.
• If the printer is not turned on or is not connected to the Internet, and consequently a print job is not
processed within 24 hours after it was submitted, the print job is automatically canceled. If this
happens, check the printer power and the Internet connection, and then re-submit the print job.
On the printer operation panel, select the Setup button, and then select Web service setup ->
Connection setup -> IJCloudPrintingCtr -> Delete from service to delete the service registration.
After resetting the printer, repeat the user registration of Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center from the
beginning.
If you are unable to log in correctly even after entering the correct
password in iOS or Mac
If you are using iOS or Mac and the password contains the ¥ or ₩ symbol, enter a backslash instead. For
instructions on entering a backslash, see the OS help.
82
Printing with Google Cloud Print
The printer is compatible with Google Cloud Print™ (Google Cloud Print is a service provided by Google
Inc.).
By using Google Cloud Print, you can print from anywhere with applications or services supporting Google
Cloud Print.
Important
• LAN connection with the printer and Internet connection are required to register the printer and to print
with Google Cloud Print. Internet connection fees apply.
• This function may not be available depending on the country or region you live in.
83
Preparations for Printing with Google Cloud Print
To print with Google Cloud Print, you need to get Google account and register the printer with Google Cloud
Print in advance.
Access to Google Cloud Print with the web browser on the computer or the mobile device, then register
the required information.
Important
• When you register a printer, the printer must be connected to the LAN and the LAN environment
must be connected to the Internet. Note that the customer is responsible for all Internet connection
fees.
• When the printer owner changes, delete the printer registration from Google Cloud Print.
84
Registration Using Google Chrome
1. Start the Google Chrome browser on your computer, smartphone, or tablet device.
Then from (Chrome menu), select Sign in to Chrome..., and log in to your Google
account
3. Click Show advanced settings... to display the information. Then for Google Cloud
Print, select Manage
5. When the confirmation message for registering the printer appears, select OK
Printer registration is complete.
3. Select Web service setup -> Connection setup -> GoogleCloudPrint -> Register w/
service
Note
• If you have already registered the printer with Google Cloud Print, the confirmation message
to re-register the printer is displayed.
4. When the confirmation screen to register the printer is displayed, select Yes
5. Select a display language on the print setting screen of Google Cloud Print
The confirmation message to print the authentication URL is displayed.
6. Set A4 size or Letter size or Legal size plain paper and select OK
The authentication URL is printed.
85
8. Perform the authentication process using the web browser on the computer or the
mobile device
Access to the URL using the web browser on the computer or the mobile device and perform the
authentication process following the on-screen instructions.
Note
• Perform the authentication process with your Google account which you have gotten in
advance.
9. When the message that the registration is complete is displayed on the LCD of the
printer, select OK
When authentication process is complete properly, the registration items are displayed. When
authentication process is complete, you can print the data with Google Cloud Print.
When authentication process is not complete properly and the error message is displayed, select
OK. When the confirmation message to print the authentication URL is displayed, print the
authentication URL, then perform the authentication process on the computer again.
1. Start the Google Chrome browser on your computer, smartphone, or tablet device.
Then from (Chrome menu), select Sign in to Chrome..., and log in to your Google
account
3. Click Show advanced settings... to display the information. Then for Google Cloud
Print, select Manage
5. When the confirmation message for deleting the printer appears, select OK
86
3. Select Web service setup -> Connection setup -> GoogleCloudPrint -> Delete from
service
4. When the confirmation screen to delete the printer is displayed, select Yes
87
Printing from Computer or Smartphone with Google Cloud Print
When you send print data with Google Cloud Print, the printer receives the print data and prints it
automatically if the printer is turned on.
When printing from a smartphone, tablet, computer, or other external device by using Google Cloud Print,
load paper into the printer in advance.
Note
• If you want to send the print data from an outside location, turn on the printer in advance.
When the preparation for printing with Google Cloud Print is complete and when the printer is turned
on, the printer receives the print data and prints it automatically.
Note
• Depending on the communication status, it may take a while to print the print data or the printer may
not receive the print data.
• While printing with Google Cloud Print, the printing may be canceled depending on the printer's
status, such as when the printer is being operated or an error has occurred. To resume printing,
check the printer's status, then print with Google Cloud Print again.
• For print settings:
• If you select the media type other than plain paper or if you select the paper size other than A4/
Letter/B5/A5-size, the print data is printed in single-sided even when you select the duplex print
setting. (* The paper size differs depending on the model of your printer. For information about
88
the supported paper sizes, go to the Online Manual home page, and refer to the "Cannot Print
Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing" for your model.)
• If you select plain paper as media type or if you select B5/A5/Legal-size as paper size, the print
data is printed with border even when you select the borderless print setting.
• The print results may differ from the print image depending on the print data.
• Depending on the device sending the print data, you may not select the print settings when
sending the print data with Google Cloud Print.
Note
• If you have not registered the printer with Google Cloud Print, Web service inquiry is not
displayed.
Register the printer with Google Cloud Print.
4. Select GoogleCloudPrint
89
Printing from AirPrint Compliant Device
This document explains how to use AirPrint to print wirelessly from your iPad, iPhone and iPod touch to a
Canon printer.
AirPrint enables you to print photos, email, Web pages and documents from your Apple device directly to
your printer without installing a driver.
To use AirPrint, you will need one of the following Apple devices running the latest version of iOS:
• Network Environment
The Apple device (iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch) and this printer must be connected to the same Wi-Fi
network or connected in AP mode.
1. Check that this printer is turned on and the Apple device and this printer is connected to
the LAN or connected in AP mode.
2. From the app of your Apple device, tap the operation icon to display the menu options.
90
3. From the menu options, tap Print.
4. From Printer Options, select the model that you are using.
Important
• Because some app does not support AirPrint, Printer Options may not be displayed. If an app
does not let you use printer options, you cannot print from that app.
Note
• The Printer Options differ depending on the app and model you are using.
91
5. When printing a file type that has multiple pages, such as a PDF file, click Range and
then click All Pages or select the range of pages to be printed.
7. For Duplex Printing, click On to enable duplex printing or click Off to disable the
function.
Paper Size
With AirPrint, the paper size is selected automatically according to the app being used on the Apple
device and the region in which AirPrint is used.
When Apple's photo app is used, the default paper size is L size in Japan, and 4"x6" or KG in other
countries and regions.
When documents are printed from Apple's Safari app, the default paper size is letter size in the U.S.
region, and A4 in Japan and Europe.
Important
• Your app may support different paper sizes.
Press the Home button on the Apple device twice to set the Multitasking mode. Then swipe to the right
to display the Print Center icon and a Print Summary.
92
Deleting a Print Job
To delete a print job with AirPrint, use one of the following two methods:
• From the printer: Use the operation panel to cancel the print job.
• From an Apple device: Press the Home button on the Apple device twice to set the Multitasking
mode, and then swipe to the right. Tap the Print Center icon to display a Print Summary. Tap the
print job to be canceled, and then tap Cancel Printing.
AirPrint Troubleshooting
If the document does not print, check the following:
1. Check that the printer power is on. If the printer power is on, turn it off and then back on
again, and check whether the issue is resolved.
2. Check that the printer is connected by LAN to the same network subnet as the device on
which iOS is installed.
If the document cannot be printed, refer to the Online Manual for your model.
93
Note
• After you turn on the printer, it may take few minutes before the printer can communicate through a
wireless LAN connection. Confirm that the printer is connected to the wireless LAN, and then try
printing.
• If Bonjour on the printer is disabled, AirPrint cannot be used. Check the LAN settings on the printer,
and enable Bonjour.
Note
• The windows used in the explanations may differ from those displayed by your Apple device or app.
94
Checking Printer Information
You can use your smartphone, tablet, or computer to check the Printer status and execute utility functions
from apps such as Canon Inkjet Print Utility and PIXMA Printing Solutions.
You can also use the convenient web services presented by Canon.
Note
• You can also enter IPv4 address directly in the web browser to display printer information.
1. Load one sheet of A4 size or Letter size or Legal size plain paper
2. On the printer operation panel, select the Setup button, and then select Device
settings -> LAN settings -> Print LAN details
IPv4 address printing starts.
Check the IPv4 address that was printed.
3. Check that the printer is connected to the same Wi-Fi network. Then from your smartphone,
tablet device, or computer, open the Web browser, and enter the following URL:
For <Printer IPv4 address>, enter the IPv4 address that you checked in the previous
procedure. Entries enclosed in brackets are not required.
Username: ADMIN
Password: See "About the Administrator Password."
Note
• The Username display may differ depending on your browser.
95
Printer status
This function displays printer information such as the remaining ink amount, the status, and detailed
error information.
You can also connect to the ink purchase site or support page, and use Web Services.
Utilities
This function allows you to set and execute the printer utility functions such as cleaning.
AirPrint settings
This function allows you to specify the Apple AirPrint settings, such as position information.
Security
Allows you to set the Administrator's password and Operation restrictions for the machine.
Important
• For the initial Password, see "About the Administrator Password."
For Security reasons, we recommend that you change the Password to an individual
password.
• There are character restrictions for the password, as shown below.
Firmware update
This function allows you to update the firmware and check version information.
Manual (Online)
This function displays the Online Manual.
96
Online Storage Integration Function
The printer can integrate with online storage services such as Evernote.
The uploaded images can be browsed from other computers, smartphones, etc.
To use Evernote, you need to create an account. See the "CREATE ACCOUNT" page of Evernote for
account creation.
• Settings
In the Settings Dialog Box of IJ Scan Utility, select the item you want to set, then select Evernote for
Send to an application in Application Settings.
Refer to "Settings Dialog Box" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.
Important
• The Evernote service features are subject to change or termination without prior notice.
97
Print Easily from a Smartphone or Tablet with PIXMA Printing
Solutions
Use PIXMA Printing Solutions to easily print photos saved on a smartphone or tablet wirelessly.
You can also receive scanned data (PDF or JPEG) directly on a smartphone or tablet without using a
computer.
PIXMA Printing Solutions can be downloaded from App Store and Google Play.
98
Printing with Windows RT
When you use Windows RT 8.1 or a later version, printing is easy because you simply connect this printer to
the network.
For information about connecting to the network, see the setup URL (http://www.canon.com/ijsetup) for
using this product from your computer, smartphone, or tablet device.
When the connection is complete, the Canon Inkjet Print Utility software, which allows you to specify
detailed print settings, is downloaded automatically.
By using Canon Inkjet Print Utility, you can check the Printer status and specify detailed print settings. (The
available functions will differ depending on your usage environment and connection method.)
99
Overview of the Machine
Safety Guide
Safety Precautions
Regulatory and Safety Information
Maintenance
When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect
Performing Maintenance from a Computer
Cleaning the Machine
100
Safety Guide
Safety Precautions
Regulatory and Safety Information
101
Safety Precautions
Choosing a location
• Do not install the machine in a location that is unstable or subject to excessive vibration.
• Do not install the machine in locations that are very humid or dusty, in direct sunlight, outdoors, or
close to a heating source.
To avoid the risk of fire or electric shocks, use the machine under the operating environment specified
in the On-screen Manual.
• Do not place the machine on a thick rug or carpet.
• Do not place the machine with its back attached to the wall.
Power supply
• Ensure that the area around the power outlet is kept clear at all times so you can easily unplug the
power cord if necessary.
• Never remove the plug by pulling on the cord.
Pulling the cord may damage the power cord, leading to possible fire or electrical shock.
• Do not use an extension lead/cord.
102
Regulatory and Safety Information
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the
risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
1. Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry
tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
2. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
3. Do not use this product to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
"CAUTION - To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord."
Certaines mesures de sécurité doivent être prises pendant l'utilisation de matérial téléphonique afin de
réduire les risques d'incendie, de choc électrique et de blessures.
En voice quelquesunes :
1. Ne pas utiliser l'appareil près de l'eau, p.ex., près d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un évier de cuisine,
d'un bac à laver, dans un sous-sol humide ou près d'une piscine.
2. Éviter d'utiliser l'appareil pendant un orage électrique. Ceci peut présenter un risque de choc
électrique causé par la foudre.
3. Ne pas utiliser l'appareil pour signaler une fuite de gaz s'il est situé près de la fuite.
"ATTENTION - Pour réduire les risques d'incendie, utiliser uniquement des conducteurs de
télécommunications 26 AWG au de section supérleure."
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment
does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
103
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
Use of a shielded cable is required to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If
such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
FCC ID:AZDK30357
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
The equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits for at uncontrolled equipment. This
equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance at least 20cm between the radiator
and persons body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles) and must not be colocated or
operated with any other antenna or transmitter.
Pre-Installation Requirements
Order Information
When ordering service from the telephone company for this equipment, the following may be required.
A label on this equipment contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format
US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call.
In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of
devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone
company. The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format
US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a
REN of 0.3).
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must
comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant
104
telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a
compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details.
Connection to party lines is subjected to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public
service commission or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation
of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable
alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Information regarding Authorized Service Facility locations can be obtained by calling the Canon
Customer Center.
Warning
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or
other electronic device to send any message via a telephone FAX machine unless such message clearly
contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the
transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other
individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business,
other entity, or individual.
In order to program this information into your FAX machine, you should complete the procedure to register
your name, unit's telephone number, time, and date. Refer to the Online Manual.
Users in Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and
meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should be installed and
operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's body (excluding extremities:
hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
105
Pre-Installation Requirements
Notice
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be
connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.
(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un
environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d'exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF)
CNR-102 de l'IC. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus
entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l'exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
Conditions de pré-installation
Avis
Le présent matériel est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d'Industrie Canada.
L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent
être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une
combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme d'indices d'équivalence de la
sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n'excède pas 5.
Users in Jordan
This printer contains WLAN Module approved by TRC/LPD/2013/130
106
Name of WLAN Module : K30357
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)
This symbol indicates that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to
the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU) and national legislation. This product should be handed over to a
designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product
or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE). Improper
handling of this type of waste could have a possible negative impact on the environment and human
health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE. At the same time,
your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural
resources. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please
contact your local city office, waste authority, approved WEEE scheme or your household waste disposal
service. For more information regarding return and recycling of WEEE products, please visit www.canon-
europe.com/weee.
Korisnici u Srbiji
Ovaj simbol označava da ovaj proizvod ne sme da se odlaže sa ostalim kućnim otpadom, u skladu sa
WEEE Direktivom (2012/19/EU) i nacionalnim zakonima. Ovaj proizvod treba predati određenom centru
za prikupljanje, npr. na osnovi "jedan-za-jedan" kada kupujete sličan novi proizvod, ili ovlašćenom centru
za prikupljanje za reciklažu istrošene električne i elektronske opreme (EEE). Nepravilno rukovanje ovom
vrstom otpada može da ima moguće negativne posledice po životnu sredinu i ljudsko zdravlje usled
potencijalno opasnih materijala koji se uglavnom vezuju za EEE. U isto vreme, vaša saradnja na
ispravnom odlaganju ovog proizvoda će doprineti efikasnom korišćenju prirodnih resursa. Za više
informacija o tome gde možete da predate vašu staru opremu radi recikliranje, vas molimo, da
kontaktirate lokalne gradske vlasti, komunalne službe, odobreni plan reciklaže ili Gradsku čistoću. Za više
informacija o vraćanju i recikliranju WEEE proizvoda, posetite stranicu www.canon-europe.com/weee.
Environmental Information
Reducing your environmental impact while saving money
107
Energy Star®
The Energy Star® programme is a voluntary scheme to promote the development and purchase of
energy efficient models, which help to minimise environmental impact.
Products which meet the stringent requirements of the Energy Star® programme for both environmental
benefits and the amount of energy consumption will carry the Energy Star® logo accordingly.
Paper types
This product can be used to print on both recycled and virgin paper (certified to an environmental
stewardship scheme), which complies with EN12281 or a similar quality standard. In addition it can
support printing on media down to a weight of 64g/m2, lighter paper means less resources used and a
lower environmental footprint for your printing needs.
RMC
Regulatory Model Code (RMC) is for identification and proof that the product complies with the
regulations. Please note that RMC is different from the marketing model number of the product.
108
Main Components and Basic Operations
Main Components
About the Power Supply of the Machine
LCD and Operation Panel
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols
109
Main Components
Front View
Rear View
Inside View
Operation Panel
110
Front View
Operation Panel
(9) cassette
Load paper here. Two or more sheets of the same size and type of paper can be loaded at the same
time, and fed automatically one sheet at a time.
111
(11) paper output tray
Printed paper is ejected.
(18) ON button
Turns the power on or off. Before turning on the power, make sure that the document cover is closed.
112
Rear View
Important
• Do not touch the metal casing.
• Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable while the machine is printing or scanning originals with the
computer.
113
Inside View
The color FINE cartridge should be installed into the left slot and the black FINE cartridge should be
installed into the right slot.
Note
• For details on replacing a FINE cartridge, see Replacing a FINE Cartridge.
Important
• The area around the parts (A) may be splattered with ink. This does not affect the performance of the
machine.
• Do not touch the parts (A). The machine may not print properly if you touch them.
114
Operation Panel
(10) OK button
Finalizes the selection of a menu or setting item. This button is also used to resolve an error or ejects
documents in the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
115
(12) Numeric buttons
Used to enter numerical values such as the number of copies, as well as fax/telephone numbers and
characters.
Note
• The machine makes the beep sound when pressing keypad buttons on the operation panel. The
keypad sound can be enabled or disabled in Sound control of Dev. user settings.
116
About the Power Supply of the Machine
Confirming that the Power Is On
Turning the Machine On and Off
Notice for the Power Plug/Power Cord
Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord
117
Confirming that the Power Is On
The POWER lamp is lit when the machine is turned on.
Even if the LCD is off, if the POWER lamp is lit, the machine is on.
Note
• It may take a while for the machine to start printing immediately after you turn on the machine.
• The LCD will turn off if the machine is not operated for about 5 minutes. To restore the display, press
any button except the ON button or perform the print operation. The display will be also restored when
receiving faxes. You cannot change the wait time before the LCD turns off.
118
Turning the Machine On and Off
Note
• It may take a while for the machine to start printing immediately after you turn on the machine.
• If the Alarm lamp lights up or flashes and an error message is displayed on the LCD, see A
Message Is Displayed.
Important
• When you unplug the power cord after turning off the machine, be sure to confirm that the
POWER lamp is off.
Note
• The machine cannot send or receive faxes when the power is turned off.
• The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when unsent
faxes are stored in the machine's memory.
• You can set the machine to automatically turn off when no operations are performed for a
certain interval. This feature is set to on by default. However, the machine does not turn off
automatically when the machine is connected via a wireless LAN or to a telephone line.
119
Notice for the Power Plug/Power Cord
Check the power plug/power cord once a month to confirm that it does not have anything unusual described
below.
Caution
• If you find anything unusual with the power plug/power cord described above, unplug the power cord
and call for service. Using the machine with one of the unusual conditions above may cause a fire or an
electric shock.
120
Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord
To unplug the power cord, follow the procedure below.
Important
• When you unplug the power cord, press the ON button, then confirm that the POWER lamp is off.
Unplugging the power cord while the POWER lamp is lit or flashing may cause drying or clogging of the
print head and print quality may be reduced.
• If the power cord is unplugged, the date/time settings will be reset and all documents stored in the
machine's memory will be lost. Send or print a necessary document before unplugging the power cord.
The specification of the power cord differs depending on the country or region of use.
121
LCD and Operation Panel
The mode button (A) on the operation panel allows you to switch between the copy mode, scan mode, fax
mode, and setup menu screen.
Pressing the Menu button (B) in the respective modes shows the menu screen to select various functions or
settings.
122
Select Scan contrast, press the OK button (D).
Use the or button (C) to change the contrast, then press the OK button (D).
123
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols
Use the Numeric buttons to enter or edit such information as unit name, a recipient's name for the directory,
etc.
The current input mode appears at the upper right corner of the LCD.
• To insert a space
Press the or button to move the cursor under the position you want to edit.
• To insert a space
• To insert a character
Move the cursor under the character to the right of the insertion position, then enter the character. The
character on the cursor will move to the right and the new character will be inserted.
• To delete a character
Move the cursor under the character, then press the Back button.
1 1
abcåäáàãâæç ABCÅÄÁÀÃÂÆÇ 2 2
124
defëéèê DEFËÉÈÊ 3 3
gh i ï í ì î GH I Ï Í Ì Î 4 4
jkl JKL 5 5
mnoñøöóòõô MNOÑØÖÓÒÕÔ 6 6
pqrsþ PQRSÞ 7 7
tuvüúùû TUVÜÚÙÛ 8 8
wxyzý WXYZÝ 9 9
0 0
125
Loading Paper / Originals
Loading Paper
Loading Originals
126
Loading Paper
Loading Plain Paper / Photo Paper
Loading Envelopes
Media Types You Can Use
Media Types You Cannot Use
Printing Area
127
Loading Plain Paper / Photo Paper
You can load plain paper or photo paper.
Important
• If you cut plain paper into small size such as 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm) or 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm) to perform trial
print, it can cause paper jams.
Note
• We recommend Canon genuine photo paper for printing photos.
For details on the Canon genuine paper, see Media Types You Can Use.
1. Prepare paper.
Align the edges of paper. If paper is curled, flatten it.
Note
• Align the edges of paper neatly before loading. Loading paper without aligning the edges may
cause paper jams.
• If paper is curled, hold the curled corners and gently bend them in the opposite direction until the
paper becomes completely flat.
For details on how to flatten curled paper, see "Load the paper after correcting its curl." in Paper Is
Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched.
• When using Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss SG-201, even if the sheet is curled, load one sheet at a
time as it is. If you roll up this paper to flatten, this may cause cracks on the surface of the paper
and reduce the print quality.
128
3. Grab the right and left sides of the front cover and pull out the cassette until it stops.
4. Use the right paper guide (C) to slide both paper guides all the way out.
5. Load the paper in the center of the cassette WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING DOWN.
Push the paper stack all the way to the back of the cassette.
* The above figure shows the machine with the paper output tray raised.
Important
• Always load paper in the portrait orientation (D). Loading paper in the landscape orientation (E)
can cause paper jams.
129
6. Slide the right paper guide (C) to align the paper guides with both sides of the paper stack.
Do not slide the paper guides too hard against the paper. The paper may not be fed properly.
* The above figure shows the machine with the paper output tray raised.
Note
• Do not load sheets of paper higher than the load limit mark (F).
• Keep the paper stack height below the tabs (G) of the paper guides.
* The above figure shows the machine with the paper output tray raised.
• Load small size paper, such as 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm), by pushing it in all the way to the back of the
cassette.
130
* The above figure shows the machine with the paper output tray raised.
7. Grab the right and left sides of the front cover and push the cassette back until the arrow
( ) on the front cover is aligned with the edge of the machine.
After pushing the cassette back properly, the machine makes an electronic sound and the paper
information registration screen is displayed on the LCD.
Note
• When you set the alarm to be silent in Sound control of Dev. user settings, the alarm will not
beep even if the cassette is pushed back.
131
9. Use the or button to select the size of the loaded paper in the cassette, then press the
OK button.
Note
• The asterisk " " will appear with the current page size and media type settings.
Paper setting for Printing
10. Use the or button to select the type of the loaded paper in the cassette, then press the
OK button.
11. Pull the paper output support (H) out from the paper output tray.
Note
• When printing, select the size and type of the loaded paper on the print settings screen of the operation
panel or printer driver.
132
Loading Envelopes
You can load Envelope DL and Envelope Com 10.
The address is automatically rotated and printed according to the envelope's direction by specifying with the
printer driver properly.
Important
• Printing of envelopes from the operation panel is not supported.
• Do not use the following envelopes. They could jam in the machine or cause the machine to
malfunction.
1. Prepare envelopes.
• Press down on all four corners and edges of the envelopes to flatten them.
• If the envelopes are curled, hold the opposite corners and gently twist them in the opposite
direction.
The figures above show a side view of the leading edge of the envelope.
Important
• The envelopes may jam in the machine if they are not flat or the edges are not aligned. Make sure
that no curl or puff exceeds 0.1 inch (3 mm).
133
3. Grab the right and left sides of the front cover and pull out the cassette until it stops.
4. Use the right paper guide (C) to slide both paper guides all the way out.
5. Load the envelopes in the center of the cassette WITH THE ADDRESS SIDE FACING
DOWN.
The folded flap of the envelope will be faced up on the left side.
D: Rear side
E: Address side
Push the envelopes all the way to the back of the cassette.
134
* The above figure shows the machine with the paper output tray raised.
6. Slide the right paper guide (C) to align the paper guides with both sides of the envelopes.
Do not slide the paper guides too hard against the envelopes. The envelopes may not be fed properly.
* The above figure shows the machine with the paper output tray raised.
Note
• Do not load envelopes higher than the load limit mark (F).
• Keep the envelope stack height below the tabs (G) of the paper guides.
* The above figure shows the machine with the paper output tray raised.
7. Grab the right and left sides of the front cover and push the cassette back until the arrow
( ) on the front cover is aligned with the edge of the machine.
135
After pushing the cassette back properly, the machine makes an electronic sound and the paper
information registration screen is displayed on the LCD.
Note
• When you set the alarm to be silent in Sound control of Dev. user settings, the alarm will not
beep even if the cassette is pushed back.
9. Use the or button to select the size of the loaded envelopes in the cassette, then
press the OK button.
Note
• The asterisk " " will appear with the current page size and media type settings.
136
10. Use the or button to select the type of the loaded envelopes in the cassette, then
press the OK button.
11. Pull the paper output support (H) out from the paper output tray.
Note
• When printing, select the size and type of the loaded envelopes on the print settings screen of the
printer driver.
137
Media Types You Can Use
To get the best printing result, choose paper suitable for printing. Canon provides various types of paper
suitable for documents as well as paper suitable for photos or illustrations. We recommend the use of
Canon genuine paper for printing your important photos.
Media Types
Note
• You may not be able to purchase some Canon genuine papers depending on the country or region
of purchase. Paper is not sold in the US by Model Number. Purchase paper by name.
Page Sizes
You can use the following page sizes.
Note
• Printing of envelopes from the operation panel is not supported.
Standard sizes:
• Letter
• Legal
• A5
• A4
138
• B5
• 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm)
• 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm)
• 8" x 10" (20 x 25 cm)
• Envelope DL
• Envelope Com 10
Non-standard sizes:
You can print on non-standard size paper within the following ranges.
Paper Weight
You can use paper in the following weight range.
• 17 to 28 lb (64 to 105 g /m2) (plain paper except for Canon genuine paper)
Do not use heavier or lighter paper (except for Canon genuine paper), as it could jam in the machine.
139
Paper Load Limit
Plain Paper (including recycled paper)*1 Approx. 100 sheets Approx. 50 sheets
Envelopes 5 envelopes *2
Photo Paper Pro Platinum <PT-101>*3 10 sheets: A4, Letter, and 8" x 10" (20 x 25 cm)
Photo Paper Plus Glossy II <PP-201>*3 10 sheets: A4, Letter, 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm), and 8" x 10"
(20 x 25 cm)
Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss <SG-201>*3 10 sheets: A4, Letter, 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm), and 8" x 10"
(20 x 25 cm)
*1 Proper feeding of paper may not be possible at the maximum capacity depending on the type of paper
or environmental conditions (either very high or low temperature or humidity). In such cases, reduce the
number of paper you load at a time to less than half.
*2 We recommend that you remove the previously printed envelope from the paper output tray before
continuously printing to avoid blurs and discoloration.
140
*3 When loading paper in stacks, the print side may become marked as it is fed or paper may not feed
properly. In this case, load one sheet at a time.
141
Media Types You Cannot Use
Do not use the following types of paper. Using such paper will cause not only unsatisfactory results, but also
the machine to jam or malfunction.
142
Printing Area
Printing Area
Other Sizes than Letter, Legal, Envelopes
Letter, Legal
Envelopes
143
Printing Area
To ensure the best print quality, the machine allows a margin along each edge of media. The actual
printable area will be the area inside these margins.
Recommended printing area : Canon recommends that you print within this area.
Printable area : The area where it is possible to print. However, printing in this area can affect the print
quality or the paper feed precision.
Note
• When performing borderless copying, you can specify the amount of images that extends off the paper
by Extended copy amt. in Output settings.
Output settings
• By selecting Borderless Printing option, you can make prints with no margins.
• When performing Borderless Printing, slight cropping may occur at the edges since the printed image is
enlarged to fill the whole page.
• For Borderless Printing, use the following paper:
Performing Borderless Printing on any other type of paper may substantially reduce printing quality
and/or result in printouts with altered color hues.
Borderless Printing on plain paper may result in printouts with reduced quality. Use them only for test
printing. Borderless Printing onto plain paper from the operation panel is not supported.
• Borderless Printing is not available for legal, A5, or B5 sized paper, or envelopes.
• Depending on the type of paper, Borderless Printing may reduce the print quality at the top and bottom
edges of the paper or cause these parts to become smudged.
144
Other Sizes than Letter, Legal, Envelopes
Size Printable Area (width x height)
4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm) 3.73 x 5.69 inches (94.8 x 144.4 mm)
5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm) 4.73 x 6.69 inches (120.2 x 169.8 mm)
8" x 10" (20 x 25 cm) 7.73 x 9.69 inches (196.4 x 246.0 mm)
Printable area
145
Letter, Legal
Size Printable Area (width x height)
Printable area
146
Envelopes
Size Recommended Printing Area (width x height)
147
Loading Originals
Position to Load Originals
Loading Originals on the Platen Glass
Loading Documents in the ADF (Auto Document Feeder)
How to Load Originals for Each Function
Originals You Can Load
148
Position to Load Originals
The machine has two positions to load originals: platen glass and ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
Select the position to load the original according to the size, type, or usage.
Loading Two or More Sheets of Document of the Same Size and Thickness
in the ADF
You can also load a sheet of document in the ADF.
Note
• To scan the original at optimum quality, load it on the platen glass.
149
Loading Originals on the Platen Glass
2. Load the original WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN on the platen glass.
Originals You Can Load
How to Load Originals for Each Function
Important
• Be sure to observe the following when loading the original on the platen glass.
• Do not place any objects weighing 4.4 lb (2.0 kg) or more on the platen glass.
• Do not put any pressure of 4.4 lb (2.0 kg) or more on the platen glass, such as pressing down
the original.
Failure to observe the above may cause the scanner to malfunction or the platen glass to break.
Important
• After loading the original on the platen glass, be sure to close the document cover before starting to
copy, fax, or scan.
150
Loading Documents in the ADF (Auto Document Feeder)
Note
• To scan a document at optimum quality, load it on the platen glass.
1. Make sure that any original has been removed from the platen glass.
3. Insert the document in the document tray until you hear a beep sound.
Load the document WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING UP in the document tray.
Originals You Can Load
Note
• When you set the alarm to be silent in Sound control of Dev. user settings, the alarm will not
beep even if the document is inserted in the document tray.
4. Adjust the document guide (A) at the front of the machine to match the width of the
document.
Do not slide the document guide too hard against the document. The document may not be fed properly.
151
How to Load Originals for Each Function
Load the original in the correct position according to the function to use. If you do not load the original
correctly, it may not be scanned properly.
◦ select Auto scan for Document type to scan text documents, magazines, or newspapers
◦ select Document or Photo for Document type and specify a standard size (A4, Letter, etc.) for
Scan size to scan originals
Place the original WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN on the platen glass and align it with the
alignment mark . Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.
Important
• The machine cannot scan the striped area (A) (0.04 inch (1 mm) from the edges of the platen glass).
◦ select Auto scan for Document type to scan one printed photo, postcard, business card, or disc
152
◦ select Photo for Document type and specify Auto scan(A) -Singl for Scan size to scan one
original
• Scan one printed photo, postcard, business card, or disc with a software application on a computer
Place the original WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN, with 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more space
between the edges (diagonally striped area) of the platen glass. Portions placed on the diagonally striped
area cannot be scanned.
◦ select Auto scan for Document type to scan two or more printed photos, postcards, or business
cards
◦ select Photo for Document type and specify Auto scan(A) -Multi for Scan size to scan two or
more originals
• Scan two or more printed photos, postcards, or business cards with a software application on a
computer
Place the originals WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN. Allow 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more space
between the edges (diagonally striped area) of the platen glass and the originals, and between the
originals. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.
Note
• The Skew Correction function automatically compensates for the originals placed at an angle of up to
approximately 10 degrees. Slanted photos with a long edge of 7.1 inches (180 mm) or more cannot
be corrected.
• Non-rectangular or irregular shaped photos (such as cut out photos) may not be scanned properly.
153
Originals You Can Load
platen glass
Item Details
Size (width x height) Max. 8.5 x 11.7 inches (216 x 297 mm)
* Two or more originals can be loaded on the platen glass depending on the selected function.
Types of originals Multipage plain-paper documents of the same size, thickness, and weight
Size A4/Letter/Legal
Quantity - A4 or Letter size: Max. 20 sheets (20 lb (75 g /m2) paper), up to 0.08
inch (2 mm) in height
- Legal size: Max. 5 sheets (20 lb (75 g /m2) paper), up to 0.02 inch (0.5
mm) in height
Note
• Make sure any glue, ink, correction fluid, or the like on the document is completely dry before loading
it on the platen glass or in the ADF.
However, do not load glued documents in the ADF even if the glue is dry, as this may cause paper
jams.
• Remove all staples, paper clips, and the like before feeding the document.
• Load Legal-sized documents in the ADF.
• Do not load the following types of documents in the ADF. They will jam.
154
• Photo or thick paper
155
Replacing a FINE Cartridge
Replacing a FINE Cartridge
Checking the Ink Status
156
Replacing a FINE Cartridge
When remaining ink cautions or errors occur, the message will appear on the LCD to inform you of the error.
Take appropriate action according to the message.
A Message Is Displayed
Note
• For precautionary notes on handling FINE cartridges, see Notes on FINE cartridges.
Replacing Procedure
When you need to replace a FINE cartridge, follow the procedure below.
Note
• Remove any paper in the cassette.
157
Caution
• Do not hold the FINE cartridge holder to stop or move it forcibly. Do not touch the FINE
cartridge holder until it stops completely.
Important
• The inside of the machine may be stained with ink. Be careful not to stain your hands or
clothing when replacing the FINE cartridge. You can easily wipe off the ink from the inside of
the machine with tissue paper or the like.
• Do not touch the metallic parts or other parts inside the machine.
• If the paper output cover is left open for more than 10 minutes, the FINE cartridge holder may
move and the Alarm lamp light. In this case, close the paper output cover, then open it again.
Note
• When you set the alarm to be silent in Sound control of Dev. user settings, the alarm will not
beep even if the FINE cartridge is detached.
Important
• Handle the FINE cartridge carefully to avoid staining of clothing or the surrounding area.
158
• Discard the empty FINE cartridge according to the local laws and regulations regarding disposal
of consumables.
6. Take a new FINE cartridge out of its package and remove the protective tape (D) gently.
Important
• If you shake a FINE cartridge, ink may spill out and stain your hands and the surrounding area.
Handle a FINE cartridge carefully.
• Be careful not to stain your hands and the surrounding area with ink on the removed protective
tape.
• Do not reattach the protective tape once you have removed it. Discard it according to the local
laws and regulations regarding disposal of consumables.
• Do not touch the electrical contacts or print head nozzle on a FINE cartridge. The machine may
not print properly if you touch them.
7. Insert the new FINE cartridge at a slant into the FINE cartridge holder.
The color FINE cartridge should be installed into the left slot and the black FINE cartridge should be
installed into the right slot.
159
Important
• Insert the FINE cartridge gently so that it does not hit the electrical contacts on the FINE
cartridge holder.
8. Push the FINE cartridge in and up firmly until it snaps into place.
You hear an electronic sound once.
160
Important
• Check if the FINE cartridge is installed correctly.
• The machine cannot print unless both the color FINE cartridge and black FINE cartridge are
installed. Be sure to install both cartridges.
Note
• When you set the alarm to be silent in Sound control of Dev. user settings, the alarm will not
beep even if the FINE cartridge is attached.
Note
• If the error message appears after the paper output cover is closed, take appropriate action.
A Message Is Displayed
161
• When you start printing after replacing the FINE cartridge, the machine starts cleaning the print
head automatically. Do not perform any other operations until the machine completes the
cleaning of the print head.
• If the print head is out of alignment, as indicated by misaligned printed ruled lines or similar
symptoms, align the print head.
• The machine may make noise during operation.
• If you remove a FINE cartridge, replace it immediately. Do not leave the machine with the FINE
cartridge removed.
• Use a new FINE cartridge for replacement. Installing a used FINE cartridge may cause the nozzles to
clog.
Furthermore, with such a FINE cartridge, the machine will not be able to inform you when to replace
the FINE cartridge properly.
• Once a FINE cartridge has been installed, do not remove it from the machine and leave it out in the
open. This will cause the FINE cartridge to dry out, and the machine may not operate properly when it
is reinstalled. To maintain optimal printing quality, use a FINE cartridge within six months of first use.
Note
• If a FINE cartridge runs out of ink, you can print with either color or black FINE cartridge, in whichever
ink remains, only for a while. However the print quality may be reduced compared to when printing
with both cartridges. We recommend to use a new FINE cartridge in order to obtain optimum
qualities.
Even when printing with one ink only, print with leaving the empty FINE cartridge installed. If either of
the color FINE cartridge or black FINE cartridge is not installed, an error occurs and the machine
cannot print.
For information on how to configure this setting, see Setting the Ink Cartridge to be Used.
• Color ink may be consumed even when printing a black-and-white document or when black-and-
white printing is specified.
Both color ink and black ink are also consumed in the standard cleaning and deep cleaning of the
print head, which may be necessary to maintain the performance of the machine. When ink runs out,
replace the FINE cartridge immediately with a new one.
162
Checking the Ink Status
Checking the Ink Status with the LCD on the Machine
You can also check the ink status on the computer screen.
163
Checking the Ink Status with the LCD on the Machine
Note
• The ink level detector is mounted on the machine to detect the remaining ink level. The machine
considers as ink is full when a new FINE cartridge is installed, and then starts to detect a remaining ink
level. If you install a used FINE cartridge, the indicated ink level of it may not be correct. In such case,
refer to the ink level information only as a guide.
• When remaining ink cautions or errors occur, the message will appear on the LCD to inform you of the
error. Take appropriate action according to the message.
A Message Is Displayed
1. Make sure that the power is turned on, then press the Setup button.
The Setup menu screen will appear.
2. Use the or button to select Ink information, then press the OK button.
LCD and Operation Panel
3. Use the or button to select Remaining ink, then press the OK button.
Remaining ink is shown in the area (A).
Example:
Note
• To print the model number of the FINE cartridge, select Ink information from Setup menu, then
select Print ink number.
• You can also check the ink status on the LCD when you press the COPY or FAX button. The
current remaining ink level will be displayed on the LCD for a few seconds.
• You can also check the ink status on the computer screen.
164
Maintenance
When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect
Performing Maintenance from a Computer
Cleaning the Machine
165
When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect
Maintenance Procedure
Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern
Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern
Cleaning the Print Head
Cleaning the Print Head Deeply
Aligning the Print Head
166
Maintenance Procedure
If print results are blurred, colors are not printed correctly, or print results are unsatisfactory (e.g. misaligned
printed ruled lines), perform the maintenance procedure below.
Important
• Do not rinse or wipe the FINE cartridge. This can cause trouble with the FINE cartridge.
Note
• Check if ink remains in the FINE cartridge.
Checking the Ink Status with the LCD on the Machine
Replacing Procedure
Also check if the protective tape on the bottom of the FINE cartridge is removed.
• Increasing the print quality in the printer driver settings may improve the print result.
167
Cleaning the Print Heads from Your Computer
After cleaning the print head, print and examine the nozzle check pattern: Step1
If the problem is not resolved after performing from step 1 to step 3 twice:
If the problem is not resolved, turn off the power and clean the print head deeply again after 24 hours. Do not
unplug the power cord when turning off the power.
Note
• If the problem is still not resolved after replacing the FINE cartridge, contact the service center.
When the Print Results Are Not Even such as the Ruled Lines Are
Misaligned:
168
Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern
Print the nozzle check pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzle.
Note
• If the remaining ink level is low, the nozzle check pattern will not be printed correctly. Replace the FINE
cartridge whose ink is low.
3. Pull the paper output support out from the paper output tray, then open the output tray
extension.
4. Press the Setup button, use the or button to select Maintenance, then press the OK
button.
LCD and Operation Panel
5. Use the or button to select Nozzle check, then press the OK button.
169
Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern
Examine the nozzle check pattern, and clean the print head if necessary.
1. Check if there are missing lines in the pattern A or horizontal white streaks in the pattern B.
D: Good
F: Good
Note
• The total number of sheets printed so far is shown in increments of 50 sheets on the printout of the
nozzle check pattern.
170
Cleaning the Print Head
Clean the print head if lines are missing or if horizontal white streaks are present in the printed nozzle check
pattern. Cleaning unclogs the nozzles and restores the print head condition. Cleaning the print head
consumes ink, so clean the print head only when necessary.
2. Press the Setup button, use the or button to select Maintenance, then press the OK
button.
LCD and Operation Panel
Do not perform any other operations until the machine completes the cleaning of the print head. This
takes about 30 seconds.
Note
• If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the print head twice, clean the print head deeply.
171
Cleaning the Print Head Deeply
If print quality does not improve by the standard cleaning of the print head, clean the print head deeply.
Cleaning the print head deeply consumes more ink than the standard cleaning of the print head, so clean
the print head deeply only when necessary.
2. Press the Setup button, use the or button to select Maintenance, then press the OK
button.
LCD and Operation Panel
3. Use the or button to select Deep cleaning, then press the OK button.
Do not perform any other operations until the machine completes the deep cleaning of the print head.
This takes about 1 minute.
If the problem is not resolved, turn off the power and clean the print head deeply again after 24 hours. Do
not unplug the power cord when turning off the power.
If the problem is still not resolved, replace the FINE cartridge with a new one. If the problem is still not
resolved after replacing the FINE cartridge, contact the service center.
172
Aligning the Print Head
If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory, adjust the print head
position.
Note
• If the remaining ink level is low, the print head alignment sheet will not be printed correctly.
You need to prepare: a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper (including recycled paper)*
3. Pull the paper output support out from the paper output tray, then open the output tray
extension.
4. Press the Setup button, use the or button to select Maintenance, then press the OK
button.
LCD and Operation Panel
5. Use the or button to select Head alignment, then press the OK button.
173
Important
• Do not touch any printed part on the print head alignment sheet. If the sheet is stained or wrinkled,
it may not be scanned properly.
• If the print head alignment sheet was not printed correctly, press the Stop button, then redo this
procedure from the beginning.
6. Confirm the message, then load the print head alignment sheet on the platen glass.
Load the print head alignment sheet WITH THE PRINTED SIDE FACING DOWN and align the mark
on the bottom right corner of the sheet with the alignment mark .
Note
• The print head alignment sheet cannot be scanned if it is loaded in the ADF (Auto Document
Feeder).
174
7. Close the document cover gently, then press the Black or Color button.
The machine starts scanning the print head alignment sheet, and the print head position will be adjusted
automatically.
When adjusting the print head position is complete, remove the print head alignment sheet on the platen
glass.
Important
• Do not open the document cover or move the print head alignment sheet on the platen glass until
adjusting the print head position is complete.
• If the error message appears on the LCD, press the OK button to release the error, then take
appropriate action.
A Message Is Displayed
Note
• If the print results are still not satisfactory after adjusting the print head position as described above,
adjust the print head position manually from the computer.
Aligning the Print Head Position from Your Computer
• To print and check the current head position adjustment values, select Print align value from the
Maintenance menu.
175
Performing Maintenance from a Computer
Cleaning the Print Heads from Your Computer
Aligning the Print Head
Aligning the Print Head Position Automatically from Your Computer
Aligning the Print Head Position from Your Computer
Use Your Computer to Print a Nozzle Check Pattern
176
Cleaning the Print Heads from Your Computer
The print head cleaning function allows you to clear up clogged print head nozzle. Perform print head
cleaning if printing is faint or a specific color fails to print, even though there is enough ink.
Cleaning
3. Execute cleaning
Make sure that the printer is on and then click Execute.
4. Complete cleaning
The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message.
If cleaning the head once does not resolve the print head problem, clean it once more.
Important
• Cleaning consumes a small amount of ink.
Cleaning the print head frequently will rapidly deplete your printer's ink supply. Consequently, perform
cleaning only when necessary.
Deep Cleaning
Deep Cleaning is more thorough than cleaning. Perform deep cleaning when two Cleaning attempts do
not resolve the print head problem.
177
When the Deep Cleaning dialog box opens, select the ink group for which deep cleaning is to be
performed.
Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing deep cleaning.
Important
• Deep Cleaning consumes a larger amount of ink than Cleaning.
Cleaning the print head frequently will rapidly deplete your printer's ink supply. Consequently, perform
cleaning only when necessary.
Note
• If there is no sign of improvement after Deep Cleaning, turn off the printer, wait 24 hours, and then
perform Deep Cleaning again. If there is still no sign of improvement, see "Ink Is Not Ejected."
Related Topic
Use Your Computer to Print a Nozzle Check Pattern
178
Aligning the Print Head
When you perform head position adjustment, errors in the print head adjustment position are corrected and
conditions such as color and line streaking are improved.
If the print results appear uneven because of line shifts or other conditions, adjust the position of the print
head.
On this printer, you can adjust the print head either automatically or manually.
179
Aligning the Print Head Position from Your Computer
Print head alignment corrects the installation positions of the print head and improves deviated colors and
lines.
This printer supports two head alignment methods: automatic head alignment and manual head alignment.
Note
• If the cassette paper information registered on the printer is not set to A4 size and plain paper,
an error may occur. For instructions on what to do if an error occurs, see "Paper setting for
Printing."
For details about the cassette paper information to be registered on the printer, see the
following:
• Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
• Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
Important
• Do not open the paper output cover while printing is in progress.
180
Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least noticeable streaks in the associated boxes.
Even if the patterns with the least noticeable streaks are clicked in the preview window, their numbers
are automatically entered in the associated boxes.
When you have entered all the necessary values, click OK.
Note
• If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical
streaks.
Important
• Do not open the paper output cover while printing is in progress.
181
When you have entered all the necessary values, click OK.
Note
• If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical
streaks.
Important
• Do not open the paper output cover while printing is in progress.
182
When you have entered all the necessary values, click OK.
Note
• If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable
horizontal stripes.
Note
• To print and check the current setting, open the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box, and click
Print Alignment Value.
183
Aligning the Print Head Position Automatically from Your
Computer
Print head alignment corrects the installation positions of the print head and improves deviated colors and
lines.
This printer supports two head alignment methods: automatic head alignment and manual head alignment.
Normally, the printer is set for automatic head alignment. If the printing results of automatic print head
alignment are not satisfactory, perform manual head alignment.
Note
• The number of sheets to be used differs when you select the manual head alignment.
• If the cassette paper information registered on the printer is not set to A4 size and plain paper,
an error may occur. For instructions on what to do if an error occurs, see "Paper setting for
Printing."
For details about the cassette paper information to be registered on the printer, see the
following:
• Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
• Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
Important
• Do not open the paper output cover while printing is in progress.
184
Note
• To print and check the current setting, open the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box, and click
Print Alignment Value.
185
Use Your Computer to Print a Nozzle Check Pattern
The nozzle check function allows you to check whether the print head is working properly by printing a
nozzle check pattern. Print the pattern if printing becomes faint, or if a specific color fails to print.
Nozzle Check
Note
• If the cassette paper information registered on the printer is not set to A4 size and plain paper,
an error may occur. For instructions on what to do if an error occurs, see "Paper setting for
Printing."
For details about the cassette paper information to be registered on the printer, see the
following:
• Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
• Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
If the print result is smudged or if there are any unprinted sections, click Cleaning to clean the print
head.
Related Topic
Cleaning the Print Heads from Your Computer
186
Cleaning the Machine
Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover
Cleaning the ADF (Auto Document Feeder)
Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller
Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning)
187
Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine
Be sure to use a soft and dry cloth such as eyeglasses cleaning cloth and wipe off dirt on the surface gently.
Smooth out wrinkles on the cloth if necessary before cleaning.
Important
• Be sure to turn off the power and unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.
• The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when unsent
faxes are stored in the machine's memory. Make sure if the machine completed sending or
receiving all the faxes before unplugging the power cord.
• The machine cannot send or receive faxes when the power is turned off.
• If the power cord is unplugged, the date/time settings will be reset and all documents stored in the
machine's memory will be lost. Send or print a necessary document before unplugging the power
cord.
• Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, rough-textured cloth, or similar materials for cleaning so as not
to scratch the surface. Paper tissue powder or fine threads may remain inside the machine and cause
problems such as print head blockage and poor printing results.
• Never use volatile liquids such as thinners, benzene, acetone, or any other chemical cleaner to clean
the machine, as this may cause a malfunction or damage the surface of the machine.
188
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover
Important
• Be sure to turn off the power and unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.
• The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when unsent
faxes are stored in the machine's memory. Make sure if the machine completed sending or
receiving all the faxes before unplugging the power cord.
• The machine cannot send or receive faxes when the power is turned off.
• If the power cord is unplugged, the date/time settings will be reset and all documents stored in the
machine's memory will be lost. Send or print a necessary document before unplugging the power
cord.
• Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, rough-textured cloth, or similar materials for cleaning so as not
to scratch the surface. Paper tissue powder or fine threads may remain inside the machine and cause
problems such as print head blockage and poor printing results.
• Never use volatile liquids such as thinners, benzene, acetone, or any other chemical cleaner to clean
the machine, as this may cause a malfunction or damage the surface of the machine.
Use a soft, clean, lint-free and dry cloth. Wipe the platen glass (A) and the inner side of the document cover
(white sheet) (B) gently. Make sure not to leave any residue, especially on the glass surface.
Important
• The inner side of the document cover (white sheet) (B) is easily damaged, so wipe it gently.
189
Cleaning the ADF (Auto Document Feeder)
Be sure to use a soft, clean, lint-free and dry cloth to clean the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
Important
• Be sure to turn off the power and unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.
• The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when unsent
faxes are stored in the machine's memory. Make sure if the machine completed sending or
receiving all the faxes before unplugging the power cord.
• The machine cannot send or receive faxes when the power is turned off.
• If the power cord is unplugged, the date/time settings will be reset and all documents stored in the
machine's memory will be lost. Send or print a necessary document before unplugging the power
cord.
• Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, rough-textured cloth, or similar materials for cleaning so as not
to scratch the surface. Paper tissue powder or fine threads may remain inside the machine and cause
problems such as print head blockage and poor printing results.
• Never use volatile liquids such as thinners, benzene, acetone, or any other chemical cleaner to clean
the machine, as this may cause a malfunction or damage the surface of the machine.
190
3. With the clean cloth, wipe off any paper dust from the inside of the document feeder cover
(A).
4. Wipe the glass of the ADF (B) and the inner side of the document feeder cover (white area)
(C) gently.
Make sure not to leave any residue, especially on the glass surface.
Important
• If any foreign substances such as glue, ink or correction fluid are adhered to the glass of the ADF
(B) as shown in the figure above, some black streaks will appear on the scanned image. In this
case, wipe the dirt off gently.
5. After wiping, close the document feeder cover by pushing it until it clicks into place.
191
Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller
If the paper feed roller is dirty or paper powder is attached to it, paper may not be fed properly.
In this case, clean the paper feed roller. Cleaning will wear out the paper feed roller, so perform this only
when necessary.
You need to prepare: a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper or cleaning sheet available on the
market
Note
• If a message is displayed on the screen after pushing the cassette back, press the OK button.
3. Press the Setup button, use the or button to select Maintenance, then press the OK
button.
LCD and Operation Panel
4. Use the or button to select Roller cleaning, then press the OK button.
5. Make sure that the paper feed roller has stopped rotating, then load a sheet of A4 or Letter-
sized plain paper or cleaning sheet available on the market in the cassette.
After pushing the cassette back, the paper information registration screen is displayed on the LCD.
Select A4 or Letter for Size: and Plain paper for Type:, then press the OK button.
6. Pull the paper output support out from the paper output tray, then open the output tray
extension.
7. Make sure that Roller cleaning is selected, then press the OK button.
The machine starts cleaning. The cleaning will be complete when the paper is ejected.
If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the paper feed roller, contact the service center.
192
Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning)
Remove stains from the inside of the machine. If the inside of the machine becomes dirty, printed paper may
get dirty, so we recommend performing cleaning regularly.
1. Make sure that the power is turned on, then remove any paper from the cassette.
2. Fold a single sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in half widthwise, then unfold the
paper.
3. Fold one side of the opened paper in another half, aligning the edge with the center crease,
then unfold the paper.
4. Load only this sheet of paper in the cassette with the ridges of the creases facing up and
the edge of the half with no crease facing to the far side.
After pushing the cassette back, the paper information registration screen is displayed on the LCD.
Select A4 or Letter for Size: and Plain paper for Type:, then press the OK button.
5. Pull the paper output support out from the paper output tray, then open the output tray
extension.
193
6. Press the Setup button, use the or button to select Maintenance, then press the OK
button.
LCD and Operation Panel
7. Use the or button to select Bottom cleaning, then press the OK button.
The paper cleans the inside of the machine as it feeds through the machine.
Check the folded parts of the ejected paper. If they are smudged with ink, perform Bottom Plate Cleaning
again.
Note
• When performing Bottom Plate Cleaning again, be sure to use a new piece of paper.
If the problem is not resolved after performing cleaning again, the protrusions inside the machine may be
stained. Wipe off any ink from the protrusions using a cotton swab or the like.
Important
• Be sure to turn off the power and unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.
• The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when unsent
faxes are stored in the machine's memory. Make sure if the machine completed sending or
receiving all the faxes before unplugging the power cord.
• The machine cannot send or receive faxes when the power is turned off.
• If the power cord is unplugged, the date/time settings will be reset and all documents stored in the
machine's memory will be lost. Send or print a necessary document before unplugging the power
cord.
194
Changing the Machine Settings
Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
195
Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer
Changing the Print Options
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile
Setting the Ink Cartridge to be Used
Managing the Printer Power
Reducing the Printer Noise
Changing the Printer Operation Mode
196
Changing the Print Options
You can change the detailed printer driver settings for print data that is sent from an application software.
Specify this option if you encounter print failures such as part of an image data being cut off.
Note
• When you use the XPS printer driver, the functions available to you are different.
197
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile
You can register the frequently used printing profile to Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab.
Unnecessary printing profiles can be deleted at any time.
3. Click Save...
198
Important
• To save the page size, orientation, and number of copies that was set in each sheet, click Options...,
and check each item.
Note
• When you re-install the printer driver or upgrade the printer driver version, the print settings that are
already registered will be deleted from Commonly Used Settings.
Registered print settings cannot be saved and preserved. If a profile is deleted, register the print
settings again.
Note
• Printing profiles that are registered in the initial settings cannot be deleted.
199
Setting the Ink Cartridge to be Used
This feature enables you to specify the most appropriate FINE cartridge among installed cartridges
according to an intended use.
When one of the FINE cartridges becomes empty and cannot be replaced immediately by a new one, you
can specify the other FINE cartridge that still has ink and continue printing.
Important
• When the following settings are specified, Black Only does not function because the printer uses the
color FINE cartridge to print documents.
• Other than Plain Paper, or Envelope is selected for Media Type on the Main tab
• Borderless is selected from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab
• Do not detach the FINE cartridge that is not in use. Printing cannot be performed while either FINE
cartridge is detached.
200
Managing the Printer Power
This function allows you to manage the printer power from the printer driver.
Power Off
The Power Off function turns off the printer. When you use this function, you will not be able to turn the
printer on from the printer driver.
Important
• You cannot receive faxes when the printer is switched off.
Auto Power
Auto Power allows you to set Auto Power Off.
The Auto Power Off function automatically turns off the printer when there are no operations from the
printer driver or the printer for a specified period of time.
2. Make sure that the printer is on and then click Auto Power on the Maintenance tab
The Auto Power Setting dialog box opens.
Note
• If the printer is off or if communication between the printer and the computer is disabled, an
error message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status.
If this happens, click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer.
201
The setting is enabled after this. If you want to disable this function, select Disable from the list
according to the same procedure.
Important
• In the following cases, you can set Auto Power Off but the power will not be turned off automatically.
• When you use the printer by connecting it to a network
• When you use the printer by connecting it to a telephone line via a modular cable
202
Reducing the Printer Noise
The silent function allows you to reduce the operating noise of this printer. Select when you wish to reduce
the operating noise of the printer at night, etc.
Using this function may lower the print speed.
Quiet Settings
Note
• If the printer is off or if communication between the printer and the computer is disabled, an
error message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status.
Important
• You can set the quiet mode from the operation panel of the printer, the printer driver, or
ScanGear (scanner driver).
No matter how you use to set the quiet mode, the mode is applied when you perform operations
from the operation panel of the printer or printing and scanning from the computer.
Note
• The effects of the quiet mode may be less depending on the print quality settings.
203
Changing the Printer Operation Mode
If necessary, switch between various modes of printer operation.
Custom Settings
2. Make sure that the printer is on, and then click Custom Settings on the Maintenance
tab
The Custom Settings dialog box opens.
Note
• If the printer is off or if communication between the printer and the computer is disabled, an
error message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status.
If this happens, click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer.
204
Don't detect mismatch of paper settings when printing from computer
When you print documents from your computer and the paper settings on the printer driver and
the cassette paper information registered on the printer do not match, this setting disables the
message display and allows you to continue printing.
To disable detection of paper setting mismatches, select this check box.
Ink Drying Wait Time
You can set the length of the printer rest time until printing of the next page begins. Moving the
slider to the right increases the pause time, and moving the slider to the left decreases the time.
If the paper gets stained because the next page is ejected before the ink on the printed page
dries, increase the ink drying wait time.
Reducing the ink drying wait time speeds up printing.
205
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Fax settings
Output settings
LAN settings
Dev. user settings
Firmware update
Cassette settings
Reset setting
About Quiet setting
Using the Machine with the Access Point Mode
206
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
This section describes the procedure to change the settings in the Device settings screen, taking the steps
to specify Extended copy amt. as an example.
Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
3. Use the button to select Device settings, then press the OK button.
When you change the fax settings, press the Setup button, then select Fax settings.
4. Use the button to select Output settings, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select Extended copy amt., then press the OK button.
6. Use the button to select a setting item, then press the OK button.
Fax settings
Output settings
LAN settings
Firmware update
Cassette settings
Reset setting
Note
• You can reduce the operating noise when printing at night.
207
Fax settings
This section describes the setting items in Fax settings.
Easy setup
Security control
Note
• Before changing the settings, you can confirm the current settings by printing USER'S DATA LIST.
Summary of Reports and Lists
Easy setup
The machine must be set up depending on your telephone line and use of the faxing function. Follow the
procedure according to the instructions on the LCD.
Note
• You can specify the setup setting individually or the advanced setting.
Note
• This setting may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase.
208
• TEL line auto select (China only)
If you select OFF, you can select the telephone line type manually.
If you select ON, you can specify the maximum number of redial attempts and the length of time the
machine waits between redial attempts.
Avoids mistransmission when reception and transmission occur at the same time.
If you select ON, the machine transmits the fax after confirming the dial tone.
Note
• This setting may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase.
Sets the length of pause time for each when you enter "P" (pause).
• TTI position
Selects the position of the sender information (outside or inside the image area).
• Remote RX
If you select ON, you can specify the remote reception ID.
Remote Reception
• Color transmission
When faxing color documents using the ADF, selects whether to convert them into black & white data
if the recipient's fax machine does not support color faxing.
If you select If incompatible, end, the machine does not send color documents when the recipient's
fax machine does not support color faxing.
• RX image reduction
Enables/disables automatic reduction of incoming faxes so that they fit in the selected paper.
If you select ON, you can select the image reduction direction.
• Adv. communication
◦ ECM TX
Selects whether to send faxes in Error Correction Mode (ECM).
◦ ECM RX
209
Selects whether to receive faxes in Error Correction Mode (ECM).
◦ TX start speed
Selects the fax transmission speed.
Ex:
The fax transmission start speed will be faster as the value is bigger.
Some of settings are not available depending on the country or region of purchase.
When the telephone line condition or connection is poor, selecting a lower transmission start
speed may solve transmission problems.
◦ RX start speed
Ex:
The fax reception start speed will be faster as the value is bigger.
Some of settings are not available depending on the country or region of purchase.
When the telephone line condition or connection is poor, selecting a lower reception start speed
may solve reception problems.
Selects whether to print the received fax automatically when receiving a fax.
If you select Do not print, the received fax is stored in the machine's memory.
• Activity report
If you select Print, the machine prints ACTIVITY REPORT for the 20 histories of sent and received
faxes automatically.
210
Summary of Reports and Lists
• TX report
Selects whether to print TX REPORT/ERROR TX REPORT automatically after sending a fax.
If you print the report, select Print error only or Print for each TX.
If you select Print error only or Print for each TX, you can specify the print setting that the first page
of the fax is printed along with the report.
• RX report
If you print RX REPORT, select Print error only or Print for each RX.
Sets whether to continue printing the received fax without storing it in the machine's memory when the
ink has run out.
However, part or all of the fax may not be printed since the ink has run out.
Security control
• FAX no. re-entry
If you select ON, you can set the machine to send faxes after using the Numeric buttons to enter the
number twice. By using this setting, you can avoid the mistransmission of faxes.
If you select ON, the machine checks whether the recipient's fax machine information matches the
dialed number. If it matches the number, the machine starts to send faxes.
• Hook setting
If you select Enable, you can use the on hook dial function.
• FAX RX reject
If you select ON, the machine rejects the reception of faxes with no sender information or faxes from
specific senders.
Rejecting Fax Reception
• Caller rejection
If you subscribe to the Caller ID service, the machine detects the sender's Caller ID. If the sender's ID
matches the condition specified in this setting, the machine rejects the phone call or fax reception
from the sender.
Note
• This setting may not be supported depending on the country or region of purchase. Contact your
telephone company to confirm whether it provides this service.
211
Output settings
• Prevent abrasion
Use this setting only if the print surface becomes smudged.
Important
• Be sure to set this back to OFF after printing since it may result in lower printing speed or lower
print quality.
Selects the amount of image that extends off the paper when copying in Borderless (full).
Slight cropping may occur at the edges since the copied image is enlarged to fill the whole page. You
can change the width to be cropped from the borders of the original image as needed.
Note
• If printouts contain margins even though you are copying in Borderless, specifying Amount: Large
for this setting may help solve the problem.
• Prevent double-feed
Important
• Select ON only when double-feed of plain paper occurs.
212
LAN settings
• Change LAN
Enables/disables either wireless LAN or access point mode.
If your wireless router is compatible with WPS, set up wireless LAN following the on-screen instructions.
If not, select one of the setup methods below.
◦ Standard setup
Select when you perform settings for wireless LAN manually using the operation panel of the
machine.
Select when you perform settings for wireless LAN using a wireless router supporting a Wi-Fi
Protected Setup (WPS) push button method. Follow the on-screen instructions during setup.
◦ Other setup
Manual setup
Select when you perform settings for wireless LAN manually. You can specify multiple WEP
keys.
Cableless setup
Select if you specify the settings of the access point information to the machine directly from a
device (such as a smartphone) without operating the wireless router. Follow the on-screen
instructions of the connecting device for the setup procedure.
• AP mode settings
When you use the machine as an access point (wireless router), specify the access point name (SSID)
and the security setting.
You can print out the network settings of the machine such as its IP address and SSID.
For more information on the machine's network setting is printed out, refer to Printing Out Network
Setting Information.
Important
• This printout contains valuable information about your computer. Handle it with care.
• Other settings
Important
• You cannot select the items below when LAN inactive is selected for Change LAN.
Specifies the printer name. You can use up to 15 characters for the name.
213
Note
• You cannot use the same printer name as that already used for other LAN connected devices.
• You cannot use a hyphen for the initial or last character of the printer name.
◦ TCP/IP settings
◦ WSD setting
Setting items when you use WSD (one of the network protocols supported in Windows 8.1,
Windows 8, Windows 7, and Windows Vista).
Enable/disable WSD
Selects whether WSD is enabled or disabled.
Note
• When this setting is enabled, the printer icon is displayed on the Network Explorer in Windows
8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, and Windows Vista.
Timeout setting
Specifies the timeout length.
◦ Bonjour settings
Enab./disab. Bonjour
Selecting Active allows you to use Bonjour to perform the network settings.
Note
• You cannot use the same service name as that already used for other LAN connected devices.
◦ LPR setting
◦ DRX setting
Selecting Active allows you to enable discontinuous reception when using wireless LAN. It allows
you to save electricity.
Note
• Depending on the wireless router you are using, discontinuous reception may not be enabled
even though Active is selected.
• Discontinuous reception is enabled only while the machine is on standby. (The LCD is in the
screen saver mode.)
214
Dev. user settings
• Date/time setting
Sets the current date and time.
Important
• If a power failure occurs or you unplug the power cord, the date/time settings will be reset.
Sets the format of dates displayed on the LCD and printed on sent faxes.
• DST setting
Some countries adopt the daylight saving time (summer time) system that shifts the clock time forward
at certain periods of the year.
You can set your machine to automatically change the time by registering the date and time that daylight
saving time (summer time) begins and ends.
Note
• This setting may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase.
• Sound control
Selects whether the beep sound is enabled or not when pressing the buttons on the operation
panel.
◦ Alarm sound
◦ Offhook alarm
Selects whether the alarm is enabled or not when the phone receiver is not put on the hook
properly.
• Country or region
Selects the country or region where you are using the machine.
Note
• This setting may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase.
• Language selection
Japanese / English / German / French / Italian / Spanish / Dutch / Portuguese / Norwegian / Swedish /
Danish / Finnish / Russian / Ukrainian / Polish / Czech / Slovak / Hungarian / Slovene / Croatian /
215
Romanian / Bulgarian / Turkish / Greek / Estonian / Latvian / Lithuanian / Simplified Chinese / Traditional
Chinese / Korean / Indonesian / Vietnamese
• Key repeat
Enables/Disables continuous input by pressing and holding down the button when setting the
number of copies, the zoom ratio, etc.
The machine turns off automatically if no operation is made or no printing data is sent to the machine for
a specified period of time. Select OFF if you want the machine not to turn off automatically.
Important
• Under the following conditions, the machine does not turn off automatically even though this setting
is enabled.
• When using the machine via a network and the network connection is enabled
Note
• You can select whether you turn off the machine automatically from the operation panel of the
machine, the printer driver, or ScanGear (scanner driver).
• The machine does not have a function to turn itself on automatically.
216
Firmware update
You can update the firmware of the machine, check the firmware version, or perform settings of a
notification screen, a DNS server and a proxy server.
Note
• Only Current version is available when LAN inactive is selected for Change LAN in LAN settings.
• Install update
• Current version
• Update notification
When ON is selected and the firmware update is available, the screen to inform you of the firmware
update is displayed on the LCD.
Performs settings for a DNS server. Select Auto setup or Manual setup. If you select Manual setup,
follow the display on the LCD to perform settings.
Performs settings for a proxy server. Follow the display on the LCD to perform settings.
217
Cassette settings
By registering the paper size and the media type loaded in the cassette, you can prevent the machine from
misprinting by displaying the message before printing starts when the paper size or the media type of the
loaded paper differs from the print settings.
For details:
Registers the paper size and the media type you load in the cassette.
Note
• For details on the combination of paper settings you can specify by the printer driver or on the LCD:
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
If you select ON, the machine detects whether the paper size and the media type are the same as those
registered in Register paper info. If printing starts with the settings that do not match, an error message
is displayed on the LCD.
Note
• When OFF is selected, Detect reinsertion is disabled.
• Detect reinsertion
If you select ON, the machine detects the cassette is reinserted. When the Register paper info screen
is displayed, register the paper size and the media type.
218
Reset setting
Returns all settings you made to the machine back to the default. However, some data may not be changed,
depending on the current usage state of your machine.
Important
• Depending on the setting item, it is necessary to perform connection or setup again after you have
returned the setting back to the default.
• LAN settings
Returns the LAN settings other than the administrator password specified by IJ Network Tool back to the
default.
• Setting data
Returns the settings such as the paper size, media type, or other setting items back to the default. The
LAN settings and the telephone/fax number are not returned back to the default.
Returns only the device information sending settings back to the default.
• FAX settings
Returns the fax settings back to the default. Disconnect the telephone line from the machine before you
return this setting item back to the default.
• All data
Returns all settings you made to the machine back to the default. The administrator password specified
by IJ Network Tool returns to the default setting.
Note
• You cannot return the following setting items back to the default:
219
About Quiet setting
Enables this function on the machine if you want to reduce the operating noise, such as when printing at
night. In addition, you can specify the time range to reduce the operating noise.
Important
• Set the current date and time in advance.
3. Use the button to select Quiet setting, then press the OK button.
4. Use the button to select ON or Use in specified hrs, then press the OK button.
• When ON is selected:
The screen to specify starting/ending time is displayed. Use the button to move the cursor
under the desired position, use the Numeric buttons to enter the time, then press the OK button.
You can reduce the operating noise during the specified time.
Important
• Operating speed may be reduced compared to when OFF is selected.
• This function may not be so effective depending on the machine's setting. Furthermore, certain
noise, such as when the machine is preparing for printing, is not reduced.
Note
• You can set the quiet mode from the operation panel of the machine, the printer driver, or
ScanGear (scanner driver). No matter how you set the quiet mode, the mode is applied when you
perform operations from the operation panel of the machine or printing and scanning from the
computer.
220
Using the Machine with the Access Point Mode
By using the machine as an access point in an environment that does not have wireless router, or by using
the machine as an access point temporarily in an environment that has wireless router, you can connect the
machine to an external device such as a computer or a smartphone and print/scan from them.
This section describes how to enable the access point mode, the access point name of the machine, and
the security setting.
Important
• Before using the machine with the access point mode, confirm the usage restrictions then switch the
machine to the access point mode.
Restrictions
• If you use the machine with the access point mode for the long time, we recommend that you change
the default access point name and the default password to the combination of numbers and letters from
the point of view of security.
3. Use the button to select Device settings, then press the OK button.
The Device settings screen is displayed.
4. Use the button to select LAN settings, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select Change LAN, then press the OK button.
6. Use the button to select Access point mode, then press the OK button.
7. Use the button to select Start setup, then press the OK button.
The access point mode is enabled and the machine can be used as an access point.
Note
• If you select SSID or Security protocol using the button and press the OK button, you
can confirm the current access point name (SSID) and the current security setting.
221
Printing/Scanning with the Access Point Mode
Print/Scan with the access point mode following the procedure below.
Note
• For details on how to perform wireless LAN settings with an external device, refer to the
device's instruction manual.
• When a WPA2-PSK (AES) password is valid on the machine, entering the password is required
to connect an external device to the machine via wireless LAN. Enter the password specified for
the machine.
Note
• For details on how to print or scan from an external device such as a computer or a smartphone
via wireless LAN, refer to the device's or application's instruction manual.
2. Use the button to select Device settings, then press the OK button.
The Device settings screen is displayed.
3. Use the button to select LAN settings, then press the OK button.
4. Use the button to select Change LAN, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select Wireless LAN, then press the OK button.
If you do not use the machine over wireless LAN, select LAN inactive.
222
2. Press the Setup button.
The Setup menu screen is displayed.
3. Use the button to select Device settings, then press the OK button.
The Device settings screen is displayed.
4. Use the button to select LAN settings, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select AP mode settings, then press the OK button.
The screen to enter the access point name (SSID) is displayed.
8. Use the button to select the security setting, then press the OK button.
WPA2-PSK (AES)
Specifies the security setting applying WPA2-PSK (AES). Proceed to the next step when the
screen to specify the password is displayed.
Disable
Finishes the access point settings without specifying the security setting.
Note
• If you change the access point mode setting of the machine, also change the access point setting of
the external device such as a computer or a smartphone.
223
Information about Network Connection
Useful Information about Network Connection
224
Useful Information about Network Connection
Default Values Set at Factory (Network)
Connecting the Machine to the Computer Using a USB Cable
When Detecting the Printers Have the Same Name during Setup
Connecting to Other Computer with LAN/Changing the Connection Method
from USB to LAN
Printing Out Network Setting Information
225
Default Values Set at Factory (Network)
SSID BJNPSETUP
226
Connecting the Machine to the Computer Using a USB Cable
Connect the machine and the computer using a USB cable as the illustration below. The USB port is located
on the rear of the machine.
227
When Detecting the Printers Have the Same Name during Setup
When the printer is detected during setup, you may see multiple printers of the same name on the detection
result screen.
Select a printer with checking the MAC address or the serial number set to the printer against that on the
detection result screen.
Note
• A serial number may not be displayed on the detection result screen.
To check the MAC address of the printer, print out the network setting information using the operation panel
of the printer.
228
Connecting to Other Computer with LAN/Changing the Connection
Method from USB to LAN
To add the computer connecting the machine with LAN or to change the connection method between the
machine and the computer from USB to LAN, perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according
to the instructions on our website.
229
Printing Out Network Setting Information
You can print out the current network settings of the machine.
Important
• This print out contains valuable information about your computer. Handle it with care.
4. Use the button to select Device settings, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select LAN settings, then press the OK button.
6. Use the button to select Print LAN details, then press the OK button.
The machine starts printing the network setting information.
230
Subnet Mask Subnet Mask XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Bonjour Service Name Bonjour service name Bonjour service name (Up to 52 alphanumeric
characters)
*1 Depending on the country or region of purchase, one of the channels from 1 to 11 is printed.
*3 Only when IPv6 and the IPsec setting are enabled, the status of the network is printed.
231
About Network Communication
Changing and Confirming Network Settings
Screens for Network Connection of IJ Network Tool
Other Screens of IJ Network Tool
Appendix for Network Communication
232
Changing and Confirming Network Settings
IJ Network Tool
Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet
Changing the WEP Detailed Settings
Changing the WPA/WPA2 Detailed Settings
Changing the Settings in the Wired LAN Sheet
Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet
Monitoring Wireless Network Status
Initializing the Network Settings of the Machine
Viewing the Modified Settings
233
IJ Network Tool
IJ Network Tool is a utility that enables you to display and modify the machine network settings. It is installed
when the machine is set up.
Important
• To use the machine over LAN, make sure you have the equipment necessary for the connection type,
such as a wireless router or a LAN cable.
• If the firewall function of your security software is turned on, a message may appear warning that
Canon software is attempting to access the network. If the warning message appears, set the security
software to always allow access.
• IJ Network Tool has been verified to work on Windows XP, however, it does not support Fast User
Switching. We recommend to exit IJ Network Tool before switching users.
• In Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP, click Start and select All programs, Canon
Utilities, IJ Network Tool, and then IJ Network Tool.
Depending on the printer you are using, an administrator password is already specified for the printer at
the time of purchase. When you change the network settings, authentication by the administrator
password is required.
For details:
234
Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet
To change the wireless network settings of the printer, connect the printer and the computer with a USB
cable temporarily. If you modify the wireless network settings of the computer over wireless connection
without USB connection, your computer may not be able to communicate with the machine after modifying
the settings.
Note
• This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.
• Enable the wireless LAN setting of the printer to change the settings in the Wireless LAN sheet.
For details on the Wireless LAN sheet, see Wireless LAN Sheet.
When the printer is connected with USB, the Search screen appears by clicking Search.... Set the
SSID of the wireless router by selecting the one of the detected wireless routers.
Search Screen
235
Note
• Enter the same SSID that the wireless router is configured to use. The SSID is case-sensitive.
Encryption Method:
Select the encryption method used over the wireless LAN.
You can change WEP settings with selecting Use WEP and clicking Configuration....
You can change WPA/WPA2 settings with selecting Use WPA/WPA2 and clicking Configuration....
Important
• If all encryption types of the wireless router, printer, or computer do not match, the printer cannot
communicate with the computer. If the printer cannot communicate with the computer after the
encryption type of the printer was switched, make sure that encryption types for the computer and
the wireless router match that set to the printer.
• If you connect to a network that is not protected with security measures, there is a risk of disclosing
data such as your personal information to a third party.
TCP/IP Setup:
Sets the IP address of the printer to be used over the LAN. Specify a value appropriate for your
network environment.
6. Click OK.
After changing configuration, a screen is displayed asking you for confirmation before the settings are
sent to the printer. If you click Yes, the settings are sent to the printer and the Transmitted Settings
screen is displayed.
Note
• Changing the network settings with the USB cable temporarily may switch the default printer. In
this case, reset Set as Default Printer.
236
Changing the WEP Detailed Settings
Note
• This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.
To change the wireless network settings of the printer, connect the printer and the computer with a USB
cable temporarily. If you modify the wireless network settings of the computer over wireless connection
without USB connection, your computer may not be able to communicate with the machine after modifying
the settings.
1. WEP Key:
Enter the same key as the one set to the wireless router.
The number of characters and character type that can be entered differ depending on the
combination of the key length and key format.
Key Length
64bit 128bit
237
2. Key Length:
3. Key Format:
5. Authentication:
Select the authentication method to authenticate the printer's access to the wireless router.
Normally, select Auto. If you want to specify the method manually, select Open System or
Shared Key according to the setting of the wireless router.
7. Click OK.
Important
• If the printer cannot communicate with the computer after the encryption type of the printer was
switched, make sure that encryption types for the computer and the wireless router match that set
to the printer.
Note
• Changing the network settings with the USB cable temporarily may switch the default printer. In
this case, reset Set as Default Printer.
238
Changing the WPA/WPA2 Detailed Settings
Note
• This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.
To change the wireless network settings of the printer, connect the printer and the computer with a USB
cable temporarily. If you modify the wireless network settings of the computer over wireless connection
without USB connection, your computer may not be able to communicate with the machine after modifying
the settings.
The example screenshots in this section refer to the WPA detailed settings.
If encryption is not set to the printer, the Authentication Type Confirmation screen is displayed. Go to
step 7.
239
8. Enter the passphrase, then click Next>.
Enter the passphrase set to the wireless router. The passphrase should be a string of 8 to 63
alphanumeric characters or a 64-digit hexadecimal value.
If you do not know the wireless router passphrase, refer to the instruction manual provided with the
wireless router or contact its manufacturer.
The dynamic encryption method is selected from either TKIP (basic encryption) or AES (secure
encryption) automatically.
Important
• If Auto is not displayed on Dynamic Encryption Type:, select either TKIP(Basic Encryption) or
AES(Secure Encryption).
9. Click Finish.
240
Important
• If the printer cannot communicate with the computer after the encryption type of the printer was
switched, make sure that encryption types for the computer and the wireless router match that set
to the printer.
Note
• Changing the network settings with the USB cable temporarily may switch the default printer. In
this case, reset Set as Default Printer.
241
Changing the Settings in the Wired LAN Sheet
Note
• This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.
• Enable the wired LAN setting of the printer to change the settings in the Wired LAN sheet.
For details on the Wired LAN sheet, see Wired LAN Sheet.
6. Click OK.
After changing configuration, a screen is displayed asking you for confirmation before the settings are
sent to the printer. If you click Yes, the settings are sent to the printer and the Transmitted Settings
screen is displayed.
242
Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet
Note
• You cannot change the settings when using the access point mode.
For details on the Admin Password sheet, see Admin Password Sheet.
Important
• The password should consist of alphanumeric characters and be no longer than 32 characters.
The password is case-sensitive. Do not forget the password you set.
If you forget the administrator password you specified, initialize the printer to return the password
to the default setting.
6. Click OK.
A screen is displayed asking you for confirmation before the settings are sent to the printer. If you click
Yes, the settings are sent to the printer and the Transmitted Settings screen is displayed.
243
Monitoring Wireless Network Status
Note
• This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.
• When using the machine over the wired LAN, you cannot monitor network status.
1. Signal Strength:
Indicates the strength of the signal received by the printer, ranging from 0% to 100%.
2. Link Quality:
Indicates the signal quality excluding the noise while communicating, ranging from 0% to 100%.
Important
• If the indicated value is low, move your printer closer to the wireless network device.
5. Click Next>.
The measurement starts and the status displays. Measurement takes a few minutes.
244
6. Check the status.
When the measurement is complete, the status is displayed.
When is displayed in Connection Performance between the Printer and the Wireless Router:,
the printer can communicate with the wireless router. Otherwise, refer to displayed comments and the
following to improve the status of communication link, and click Remeasurement.
• Check that the printer and the wireless router are located within the wireless connectivity range
with no obstacles between them.
• Check if the distance between the printer and the wireless router is not too far.
If they are too far, move them closer together (within 164 ft. / 50 m).
• Check that there is no barrier or obstacle between the printer and the wireless router.
245
The wireless connection may use the same frequency band as microwave ovens and other
sources of radio interference. Try to keep the printer and the wireless router away from such
sources.
• Check if the radio channel of the wireless router is close to that of other wireless routers nearby.
If the radio channel of the wireless router is close to that of other wireless routers nearby, the
connection performance may become unstable. Be sure to use a radio channel that does not
interfere with other wireless routers.
• Check that the printer and the wireless router face each other.
Connection performance may depend on the orientations of the wireless devices. Replace the
wireless router and the printer in another direction to achieve the best performance.
• Check whether other computers are not accessing the printer.
If appears in the result of the measurement, check whether other computers are not accessing
the printer.
If still appears even if you have tried the above, finish the measurement, then restart the IJ Network
Tool to start over the measurement.
7. Click Finish.
Note
• If any messages appear on Overall Network Performance:, move the machine and wireless
router as instructed on the screen to improve the performance.
246
Initializing the Network Settings of the Machine
Important
• Note that initialization erases all network settings on the machine, and printing or scanning operation
from a computer over network becomes impossible. To use the machine over network, perform setup
with the Setup CD-ROM or perform setup according to the instructions on our website.
4. Click Initialize.
Performing initialization when connected over wireless LAN will break the connection, so perform setup
with the Setup CD-ROM or perform setup according to the instructions on our website.
Note
• You can change the network settings of the printer using IJ Network Tool with USB connection after
initializing the LAN settings. To change the network settings using Canon IJ Network Tool, enable
wireless LAN in advance.
247
Viewing the Modified Settings
The Confirmation screen is displayed after you modified the printer settings on the Configuration screen.
When you click Yes on the Confirmation screen, the following screen is displayed for confirming the
modified settings.
248
Screens for Network Connection of IJ Network Tool
Canon IJ Network Tool Screen
Configuration Screen
Wireless LAN Sheet
Search Screen
WEP Details Screen
WPA/WPA2 Details Screen
Authentication Type Confirmation Screen
PSK:Passphrase and Dynamic Encryption Setup Screen
Setup Information Confirmation Screen
Wired LAN Sheet
Admin Password Sheet
Network Information Screen
Access Control Sheet
Edit Accessible MAC Address Screen/Add Accessible MAC Address Screen
Edit Accessible IP Address Screen/Add Accessible IP Address Screen
249
Canon IJ Network Tool Screen
This section describes the items and menus displayed on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.
Items on the Canon IJ Network Tool Screen
1. Printers:
The printer name, status, printer model name, and port name are displayed.
A check mark next to the printer in the Name list indicates it is set as the default printer.
2. Update
Performs printer detection again. Click this button if the target printer is not displayed.
Important
• To change the printer's network settings using IJ Network Tool, it must be connected via a LAN.
• If No Driver is displayed for the name, associate the port with the printer.
• If the printer on a network is not detected, make sure that the printer is turned on, then click
Update. It may take several minutes to detect printers. If the printer is not yet detected, connect
the machine and the computer with a USB cable, then click Update.
• If the printer is being used from another computer, a screen is displayed informing you of this
condition.
250
Note
• This item has the same function as Refresh in the View menu.
3. Configuration...
Click to configure settings of the selected printer.
Configuration Screen
Note
• You cannot configure a printer that has the status Not Found.
• This item has the same function as Configuration... in the Settings menu.
1. File menu
Exit
Exits IJ Network Tool.
2. View menu
Status
Displays the Status screen to confirm the printer connection status and wireless communication
status.
In the access point mode, this item is grayed out and you cannot confirm the printer connection
status.
Status Screen
Refresh
Updates and displays the contents of Printers: on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen to the
latest information.
Important
• To change the printer's network settings using IJ Network Tool, it must be connected via a LAN.
251
• If No Driver is displayed for the name, associate the port with the printer.
• If the printer is being used from another computer, a screen is displayed informing you of this
condition.
Note
• This item has the same function as Update in the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.
Network Information
Displays the Network Information screen to confirm the network settings of the printer and the
computer.
When this menu is selected, the instruction screen is displayed if one or more ports are
unavailable for printing.
3. Settings menu
Configuration...
Displays the Configuration screen to configure settings of the selected printer.
Configuration Screen
Note
• This item has the same function as Configuration... in the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.
Note
• When this function is enabled, a check mark appears on the menu.
Associate Port...
Displays the Associate Port screen and you can associate a port with the printer.
This menu is available when No Driver is displayed for the selected printer. Associating a port
with the printer enables you to use it.
252
Maintenance...
Displays the Maintenance screen to return the network settings of the printer to factory default
and to mount the card slot as the network drive.
Maintenance Screen
Note
• You can use this function only when you are using a computer compatible with the wireless LAN.
4. Help menu
Instructions
Displays this guide.
About
Displays the version of IJ Network Tool.
253
Configuration Screen
You can change the configuration of the printer selected on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.
The following screen is the example to change the setting on the Wireless LAN sheet.
Note
• This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.
254
Wireless LAN Sheet
Note
• This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.
To display the Wireless LAN sheet, click the Wireless LAN tab on the Configuration screen.
1. Network Type:
Displays the wireless LAN mode currently selected.
Infrastructure
Connects the printer to the wireless LAN with a wireless router.
Note
• When Access point mode is displayed on Network Type:, you cannot change the settings on the
Wireless LAN sheet or the Admin Password sheet.
• You can perform setting from Set up printer's access point mode... on the Settings menu when
you use the printer with the access point mode.
Depending on the printer you are using, you can change the settings using the operation panel.
2. SSID:
The network name (SSID) of the wireless LAN currently used is displayed.
In the access point mode, the access point name (SSID) of the printer is displayed.
Note
• Enter the same SSID that the wireless router is configured to use. The SSID is case-sensitive.
255
3. Search...
The Search screen is displayed to select a wireless router to connect to.
Search Screen
Note
• When IJ Network Tool runs over a LAN, the button is grayed out and cannot be selected. Connect
the printer and the computer with a USB cable temporarily to change the settings.
4. Encryption Method:
Select the encryption method used over the wireless LAN.
Do not use
Select to disable encryption.
Use WEP
Transmission is encrypted using a WEP key you specified.
If a WEP key has not been set, the WEP Details screen is displayed automatically. To change WEP
settings set before, click Configuration... to display the screen.
Changing the WEP Detailed Settings
Use WPA/WPA2
Transmission is encrypted using a WPA/WPA2 key you specified.
If a WPA/WPA2 key has not been set, the Authentication Type Confirmation screen is displayed
automatically. To change WPA/WPA2 settings set before, click Configuration... to display the
WPA/WPA2 Details screen.
5. Configuration...
The detailed settings screen is displayed. The WEP or the WPA/WPA2 key selected in Encryption
Method: can be confirmed and changed.
6. TCP/IP Setup:
Sets the IP address of the printer to be used over the LAN. Specify a value appropriate for your network
environment.
256
Search Screen
Note
• This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.
Important
• If you connect to a network that is not protected with security measures, there is a risk of
disclosing data such as your personal information to a third party.
Note
• Signal strength is displayed as follows.
: Good
: Fair
: Poor
• Type of encryption is displayed as follows.
Blank: No encryption
2. Update
Click to update the list of wireless routers when your target wireless router is not detected.
If the target wireless router is set to the stealth mode, click Cancel to return to the previous screen and
enter the wireless router's SSID in SSID: on the Wireless LAN sheet.
Note
• When detecting your target wireless router, make sure that the wireless router is turned on.
257
3. Set
Click to set the wireless router's SSID in SSID: on the Wireless LAN sheet.
Note
• The WPA/WPA2 Details screen or the WEP Details screen appears if the selected wireless
router is encrypted. In this case, configure the details to use the same encryption settings set to
the wireless router.
• Wireless routers that cannot be used by this machine (including those configured to use different
encryption methods) are displayed grayed out and cannot be configured.
258
WEP Details Screen
Note
• This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.
Note
• When changing the password (WEP key) of the printer, the same change must be made to the
password (WEP key) of the wireless router.
1. WEP Key:
Enter the same key as the one set to the wireless router.
The number of characters and character type that can be entered differ depending on the combination of
the key length and key format.
Key Length
64bit 128bit
2. Key Length:
Select either 64bit or 128bit.
3. Key Format:
Select either ASCII or Hex.
4. Key ID:
Select the Key ID (index) set to the wireless router.
5. Authentication:
Select the authentication method to authenticate the printer's access to the wireless router.
259
WPA/WPA2 Details Screen
Note
• This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.
The value displayed on the screen differs depending on the present settings.
1. Authentication Type:
Displays the type of authentication used for client authentication. This machine supports the PSK
authentication method.
3. Change Settings...
Displays the Authentication Type Confirmation screen.
260
Authentication Type Confirmation Screen
Note
• This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.
1. Authentication Type
Type of authentication used for client authentication is displayed.
PSK
This machine supports the PSK authentication method.
261
PSK:Passphrase and Dynamic Encryption Setup Screen
Note
• This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.
1. Passphrase:
Enter the passphrase set to the wireless router. The passphrase should be a string of 8 to 63
alphanumeric characters or a 64-digit hexadecimal value.
If you do not know the wireless router passphrase, refer to the instruction manual provided with the
wireless router or contact its manufacturer.
262
Setup Information Confirmation Screen
Note
• This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.
263
Wired LAN Sheet
Note
• This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.
To display the Wired LAN sheet, click the Wired LAN tab on the Configuration screen.
1. TCP/IP Setup:
Sets the IP address of the printer to be used over the LAN. Specify a value appropriate for your network
environment.
264
Admin Password Sheet
Sets a password for the printer to allow specific people to perform setup and configurations operation.
To display the Admin Password sheet, click the Admin Password tab on the Configuration screen.
2. Password:
Enter the password to set.
3. Password Confirmation:
Enter the password again for confirmation.
Important
• If you forget the administrator password you specified, initialize the printer to return the password to the
default setting.
265
Network Information Screen
Displays the network information that is set for the printers and the computers.
To display the Network Information screen, select Network Information from the View menu.
1. OK
Returns to the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.
266
Access Control Sheet
Note
• This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.
You can register the MAC addresses or the IP addresses of computers or network devices to allow access.
To display the Access Control sheet, click the Access Control tab on the Configuration screen.
The setting items may differ depending on the choice of access control methods.
267
1. Enable printer access control(MAC address)
Select to enable access control to the printer by MAC address.
Note
• The two types of access control (i.e., by MAC address and by IP address) can be enabled at
the same time.
An access control type is enabled as long as the Enable printer access control check box is
selected, regardless of the type currently displayed by selecting in Printer Access Control
Type:.
• When both access control types are enabled at the same time, a computer or a network device
whose address is registered to either list will be allowed access to the printer.
3. Edit...
The Edit Accessible MAC Address screen is displayed to edit the settings selected in Accessible
MAC Addresses:.
4. Add...
The Add Accessible MAC Address screen is displayed to register the MAC address of a computer or
a network device from which to access the printer over the network.
Important
• Add the MAC address of all computers or network devices within the network from which to
access the printer. The printer cannot be accessed from a computer or a network device that is
not on the list.
5. Delete
Deletes the selected MAC address from the list.
268
1. Enable printer access control(IP address)
Select to enable access control to the printer by IP address.
Note
• The two types of access control (i.e., by MAC address and by IP address) can be enabled at
the same time.
An access control type is enabled as long as the Enable printer access control check box is
selected, regardless of the type currently displayed by selecting in Printer Access Control
Type:.
• When both access control types are enabled at the same time, a computer or a network device
whose address is registered to either list will be allowed access to the printer.
2. Accessible IP Addresses:
Shows the registered IP addresses and any comments.
3. Edit...
The Edit Accessible IP Address screen is displayed to edit the settings selected in Accessible IP
Addresses:.
4. Add...
The Add Accessible IP Address screen is displayed to register the IP address of a computer or a
network device from which to access the printer over the network.
Important
• Add the IP address of all computers or network devices within the network from which to access
the printer. The printer cannot be accessed from a computer or a network device that is not on
the list.
• Up to 16 IP addresses can be registered. IP addresses specified by Range Specification are
counted as one address. Use Range Specification when you intend to register 17 or more IP
addresses.
269
5. Delete
Deletes the selected IP address from the list.
270
Edit Accessible MAC Address Screen/Add Accessible MAC
Address Screen
Note
• This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.
The example screenshots in this section refer to the Add Accessible MAC Address Screen.
1. MAC Address:
Enter the MAC address of a computer or a network device to allow access.
2. Comment:
Optionally enter any information to identify the device, such as the name of the computer.
Important
• Comments will be displayed only on the computer used to enter them.
271
Edit Accessible IP Address Screen/Add Accessible IP Address
Screen
Note
• This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.
The example screenshots in this section refer to the Add Accessible IP Address Screen.
1. Specification Method:
Select either Single Address Specification or Range Specification to add the IP address(es).
Range Specification
Specify a range of successive IP addresses.
2. IP Address:
Enter the IP address of a computer or a network device to allow access when you selected Single
Address Specification in Specification Method:.
Start IP Address:
Enter the first IP address in the range of addresses of the computers or network devices to allow
access when you selected Range Specification in Specification Method:.
Note
• The Start IP Address: must be a smaller value than the End IP Address:.
3. Comment:
Optionally enter any information to identify the device, such as the name of the computer.
Important
• Comments will be displayed only on the computer used to enter them.
272
Other Screens of IJ Network Tool
Canon IJ Network Tool Screen
Status Screen
Connection Performance Measurement Screen
Maintenance Screen
Network Setup of the Card Slot Screen
Associate Port Screen
Network Information Screen
273
Canon IJ Network Tool Screen
This section describes the items and menus displayed on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.
Items on the Canon IJ Network Tool Screen
1. Printers:
The printer name, status, printer model name, and port name are displayed.
A check mark next to the printer in the Name list indicates it is set as the default printer.
2. Update
Performs printer detection again. Click this button if the target printer is not displayed.
Important
• To change the printer's network settings using IJ Network Tool, it must be connected via a LAN.
• If No Driver is displayed for the name, associate the port with the printer.
• If the printer on a network is not detected, make sure that the printer is turned on, then click
Update. It may take several minutes to detect printers. If the printer is not yet detected, connect
the machine and the computer with a USB cable, then click Update.
• If the printer is being used from another computer, a screen is displayed informing you of this
condition.
274
Note
• This item has the same function as Refresh in the View menu.
3. Configuration...
Click to configure settings of the selected printer.
Configuration Screen
Note
• You cannot configure a printer that has the status Not Found.
• This item has the same function as Configuration... in the Settings menu.
1. File menu
Exit
Exits IJ Network Tool.
2. View menu
Status
Displays the Status screen to confirm the printer connection status and wireless communication
status.
In the access point mode, this item is grayed out and you cannot confirm the printer connection
status.
Status Screen
Refresh
Updates and displays the contents of Printers: on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen to the
latest information.
Important
• To change the printer's network settings using IJ Network Tool, it must be connected via a LAN.
275
• If No Driver is displayed for the name, associate the port with the printer.
• If the printer is being used from another computer, a screen is displayed informing you of this
condition.
Note
• This item has the same function as Update in the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.
Network Information
Displays the Network Information screen to confirm the network settings of the printer and the
computer.
When this menu is selected, the instruction screen is displayed if one or more ports are
unavailable for printing.
3. Settings menu
Configuration...
Displays the Configuration screen to configure settings of the selected printer.
Configuration Screen
Note
• This item has the same function as Configuration... in the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.
Note
• When this function is enabled, a check mark appears on the menu.
Associate Port...
Displays the Associate Port screen and you can associate a port with the printer.
This menu is available when No Driver is displayed for the selected printer. Associating a port
with the printer enables you to use it.
276
Maintenance...
Displays the Maintenance screen to return the network settings of the printer to factory default
and to mount the card slot as the network drive.
Maintenance Screen
Note
• You can use this function only when you are using a computer compatible with the wireless LAN.
4. Help menu
Instructions
Displays this guide.
About
Displays the version of IJ Network Tool.
277
Status Screen
You can check the printer status and connection performance.
To display the Status screen, select Status from the View menu.
Note
• This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.
• When using wired LAN, Signal Strength:, Link Quality: and Advanced Measurement... are not
available.
1. Device Status:
The device status is displayed as Available or Unavailable.
2. Signal Strength:
Indicates the strength of the signal received by the printer, ranging from 0% to 100%.
3. Link Quality:
Indicates the signal quality excluding the noise while communicating, ranging from 0% to 100%.
4. Advanced Measurement...
To examine the connection performance between the printer and the wireless router or between the
printer and the computer.
278
Connection Performance Measurement Screen
Note
• This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.
279
1. Connection Performance between the Printer and the Wireless Router:
A mark indicates the result of the connection performance measurement between the printer and the
wireless router.
: Cannot connect
2. Remeasurement
Measures the connection performance again.
Note
• If any messages appear on Overall Network Performance:, move the machine and wireless router
as instructed to improve the performance.
280
Maintenance Screen
Displays to perform Setting Initialization and Network Setup of the Card Slot.
1. Setting Initialization
Returns all the network settings of the printer to factory default. Click Initialize to display the Initialize
Settings screen and click Yes to initialize the network settings of the printer. Do not turn off the printer
during initialization. Click OK when initialization is complete.
Performing initialization when connected over wireless LAN will break the connection, so perform setup
with the Setup CD-ROM or perform setup according to the instructions on our website.
Note
• This item is not available depending on the printer you are using.
When you click, the Network Setup of the Card Slot is displayed.
281
Network Setup of the Card Slot Screen
Note
• This function is not available depending on the printer you are using. To confirm whether this function is
available with your printer, refer to List of Function for Each Model.
Displays settings of the card slot and allows you to map a card slot on the network as a network drive on the
computer.
Displays when you click Setup on the Maintenance screen.
Note
• You can change the network settings of the printer using IJ Network Tool with USB connection after
initializing the LAN settings. To change the network settings using IJ Network Tool, enable the LAN
settings in advance.
1. Drive:
Select the drive letter to assign to the network drive.
2. Update
Reloads the drive letters that are unassigned in Computer (My Computer in Windows XP) and
displays them in the Drive: list.
282
1. Skip
Completes the setup without mapping a network drive to the card slot.
2. Retry
Returns to Network Setup of the Card Slot screen and re-executes the network drive mapping.
3. Cancel
Cancels the card slot setup. When IJ Network Tool is running over LAN, the Cancel button is
displayed grayed out and cannot be clicked.
283
Associate Port Screen
Allows you to associate a created port with a printer driver.
Select the printer for which you want to change the association, then click OK.
Note
• You cannot print with the printer unless the printer driver is associated with the port.
1. Model:
Displays the name of device specified as a destination port.
2. Printer:
Displays the printer driver installed in the computer.
Select the printer for which you want to change the association.
3. OK
Performs association.
284
Network Information Screen
Displays the network information that is set for the printers and the computers.
To display the Network Information screen, select Network Information from the View menu.
1. OK
Returns to the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.
285
Appendix for Network Communication
Using the Card Slot over a Network
When the Printer Driver Is Not Associated with a Port
About Technical Terms
Restrictions
About Firewall
286
Using the Card Slot over a Network
Note
• This function is not available depending on the printer you are using. To confirm whether this function is
available with your printer, refer to List of Function for Each Model.
To mount the card slot as the network drive, follow the procedure below.
5. Click Setup.
287
7. Make sure that the card slot is mounted.
When the card slot is mounted, the following icon appears on Computer (or My Computer).
• If your computer joins a domain, the card slot may not be mounted as the network drive.
• If you use the memory card stored the large size files or many files, a large amount of card access
may be generated. In this case, the operation in the memory card may be impossible or slow. Operate
after the Access lamp of the machine is lit.
• When you access the network drive for the card slot over the network, file names consisting of eight
or less lowercase letters (not including its extension) may be shown in uppercase.
For example, a file name such as "abcdefg.doc" will be "ABCDEFG.DOC", while a name such as
"AbcdeFG.doc" will appear the same.
• When you enable a memory card in the card slot of the machine to be writable only from a USB-
connected computer, you cannot access the network drive of the card slot. On the other hand, when
you enable it to be writable only from a LAN-connected computer, the card slot is not detected via
USB. Make sure that the card slot setting is selected properly according to your connection method.
To read files from a memory card via USB and over a network, disable the function to write files to a
memory card from a computer. You cannot write files to a memory card in either way with this setting.
• When you enable a memory card in the card slot of the machine to be writable only from a LAN-
connected computer, you can write files to a memory card from a computer connected to a network.
Note that it may increase the risk that the data on the memory card is infected by computer viruses or
accessed illegally.
We recommend to use the access control function of the machine or connect to the Internet via a
router. For information on using a router, contact your Internet service provider or a network device
manufacturer.
• If you write files to a memory card over a network when IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is not
running, the Date Modified of the files may not be proper. Make sure to start up IJ Network Scanner
Selector EX before you write files to a memory card over the network. For details, refer to "IJ Network
Scanner Selector EX Menu and Setting Screen" from the HOME of your product's Online Manual.
288
When the Printer Driver Is Not Associated with a Port
If No Driver is displayed for the printer's name on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen, the printer driver is
not associated with a created port.
5. Click OK.
289
About Technical Terms
In this section, technical terms used in the manual are explained.
A
A
• Access point mode
The machine is used as a wireless router to connect external wireless communication devices (e.g.
computers, smartphones, or tablets) in an environment where no wireless router is available. You can
connect up to 5 devices to the machine using the access point mode.
• Ad-hoc
Client computer and machine setting where wireless communication occurs on a peer-to-peer basis,
i.e., all clients in with the same SSID/network name communicate directly with each other. No wireless
router is required. This machine does not support ad-hoc communication.
• Admin Password
Administrator password in IJ Network Tool to restrict access to network users. It must be entered to
access the printer and change printer settings.
• AES
An encryption method. It is optional for WPA/WPA2. Strong cryptographic algorithm adopted within
U.S. government organizations for information processing.
• Authentication Method
The method that a wireless router uses to authenticate a printer through a wireless LAN. The methods
are agreeable each other.
290
When using WEP as an encryption method, the authentication method is able to fix to Open System
or Shared Key.
◦ Auto
The printer automatically changes its authentication method to match the wireless router.
◦ Open System
In this authentication method, the communication partner is authenticated without using WEP key
even if Use WEP is selected.
◦ Shared Key
In this authentication method, the communication partner is authenticated using the WEP key that
was set for encryption.
B
• Bonjour
A service built into Mac OS X operating system to detect the connectable devices on a network
automatically.
C
• Channel
Frequency channel for wireless communication. In the infrastructure mode, the channel is
automatically adjusted to match that set to the wireless router. This machine supports channels 1 to
13. (Channels 12 and 13 are not supported depending on the country or region of purchase.) Note
that the number of channels that can be used for your wireless LAN varies depending on the region or
country.
D
• Default Gateway
The router assigns an IP address automatically whenever the printer or the personal computer on a
network starts up.
• DNS server
A server that converts device names into IP addresses. When specifying IP addresses manually,
specify the addresses of both a primary and a secondary server.
F
• Firewall
It is a system that prevents an unlawful computer access in the network. To prevent, you can use the
firewall function of a broadband router, the security software installed in the computer, or operation
system for computer.
291
I
• IEEE 802.11b
International standard for wireless LAN using the 2.4 GHz frequency range with a throughput of up to
11 Mbps.
• IEEE 802.11g
International standard for wireless LAN using the 2.4 GHz frequency range with a throughput of up to
54 Mbps. Compatible with 802.11b.
• IEEE 802.11n
International standard for wireless LAN using the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz frequency ranges. Even when
using two or more antennas simultaneously or obtaining a bigger transfer rate than before by using
multiple communication channels at the same time, the transmission speed may be influenced by the
connected apparatus.
At the maximum transfer rate of 600 Mbps, it is possible to communicate with multiple computer
terminals within a dozen or so metre radius.
Compatible with 802.11b and 802.11g.
• Infrastructure
Client computer and machine setup where all wireless communications pass through a wireless
router.
• IP Address
A unique number with four parts separated by dots. Every network device that is connected to the
Internet has an IP address. Example: 192.168.0.1
An IP address is usually assigned by a wireless router or a DHCP server of the router automatically.
• IPv4/IPv6
They are internetwork-layer protocol used on the internet. IPv4 uses 32-bit addresses and IPv6 uses
128-bit addresses.
K
• Key Format
Select either ASCII or Hex as the WEP key format. The character that can be used for the WEP key
differs depending on the selected key formats.
◦ ASCII
Specify with a 5 or 13-character string that can include alphanumeric and underscore "_"
characters. It is case-sensitive.
◦ Hex
Specify a 10-digit or 26-digit string that can contain hexadecimal (0 to 9, A to F, and a to f).
• Key Length
Length of the WEP key. Select either 64 bits or 128 bits. Longer key length allows you to set a more
complex WEP key.
292
L
• Link Quality
The status of the connection between the wireless router and the printer excluding noise
(interference) is indicated with a value from 0 to 100%.
• LPR
A platform-independent printing protocol used in TCP/IP networks. It does not support bidirectional
communication.
M
• MAC Address
Also known as the physical address. A unique and permanent hardware identifier that is assigned to
network devices by its manufacturer. MAC addresses are 48 bits long and are written as a
hexadecimal number separated by colons, i.e., 11:22:33:44:55:66.
O
• Operation Status
P
• Proxy server
A server that links a LAN-connected computer to the Internet. When using a proxy server, specify the
address and the port number of the proxy server.
• PSK
R
• Router
S
• Signal Strength
The strength of the signal received by the printer from the wireless router is indicated with a value
from 0 to 100%.
• SSID
Unique label for wireless LAN. It is often represented such as a network name or a wireless router
name.
293
The printer and all clients on a wireless LAN must use the same SSID in order to communicate with
each other. The SSID can be up to 32 characters long, and is made up of alphanumeric characters.
The SSID may also be referred to by its network name.
• Stealth
In the stealth mode, a wireless router hides itself by not broadcasting its SSID. The client must specify
the SSID set to the wireless router to detect it.
• Subnet Mask
IP address has two components, the network address and the host address. Subnet Mask used to
calculate the Subnet Mask address from the IP address. A Subnet Mask is usually assigned by a
wireless router or a DHCP server of the router automatically.
Example:
IP Address: 192.168.127.123
T
• TCP/IP
Suite of communications protocols used to connect hosts on the Internet or the LAN. This protocol
allows different terminals to communicate with each other.
• TKIP
U
• USB
Serial interface designed to enable you to "hot-swap" devices, i.e., by plugging and unplugging them
without turning off the power.
W
• WCN (Windows Connect Now)
Users running Windows Vista or later can obtain the setting information directly via wireless network
(WCN-NET).
• WEP/WEP Key
An encryption method employed by IEEE 802.11. Shared security key used to encrypt and decrypt
data sent over wireless networks. This printer supports key length of 64 bits or 128 bits, key format of
ASCII code or Hexadecimal, and key number of 1 to 4.
• Wi-Fi
International association that certifies interoperability of wireless LAN products based on the IEEE
802.11 specification.
294
• Wireless LAN
A network that, instead of being connected by physical wires, is connected by a wireless technology,
such as Wi-Fi.
• Wireless Router
A wireless transceiver or base station that receives information from wireless clients/the machine and
rebroadcasts it. Required in an infrastructure network.
• WPA
Security framework announced by the Wi-Fi Alliance in October 2002. The security has been
strengthened more than WEP.
◦ Authentication
WPA defines the following authentication methods: PSK that can be used without an
authentication server, plus WPA-802.1x that do require an authentication server.
• WPA2
Security framework released by the Wi-Fi Alliance in September 2004 as a later version of WPA.
Provides a stronger encryption mechanism through Advanced Encryption Standard (AES).
◦ Authentication
WPA2 defines the following authentication methods: PSK that can be used without an
authentication server, plus WPA2-802.1x that do require an authentication server.
PIN entry: a mandatory method of setup for all WPS certified devices
Push button configuration (PBC): an actual push button on the hardware or through a simulated push
button in the software.
295
Restrictions
If you use a printer over the wireless LAN, the printer may recognize nearby wireless systems, you should
set a network key (WEP or WPA/WPA2) to the wireless router to encrypt wireless transmission. Wireless
communication with a product that does not comply with the Wi-Fi standard cannot be guaranteed.
Connecting with too many computers may affect the printer performance, such as printing speed.
296
About Firewall
A firewall is a function of the security software installed in the computer or operation system for computer,
and is a system that is designed to prevent unauthorized access to a network.
• During the printer setup, you may be prompted to enable or disable communications, depending on
the firewall function of the security software or operation system. If so, choose to enable
communications.
• When using IJ Network Tool, you may be prompted to enable or disable communications, depending
on the firewall function of the security software. If so, choose to enable communications.
• If you cannot set up the printer, temporarily disable the firewall function of the security software or
operation system.
Important
• If you disabled the firewall function, disconnect your network from the Internet.
• Some applications (like the network configuration software) override firewall settings. Check the
application's settings beforehand.
• If the printer you use is set to Get IP address automatically, the IP address changes every time the
printer connects to the network. This may disable printer setup and communications, depending on
the firewall settings. In this case, either change the firewall settings or assign a fixed IP address to the
printer. An IP address can be set using IJ Network Tool.
When assigning a fixed IP address to the printer, you will need to specify an IP address with which the
computer can communicate.
Note
• For the operation system firewall settings or the security software firewall settings, refer to the
instruction manual of the computer or software, or contact its manufacturer.
297
Tips for Ensuring Optimal Printing Quality
Useful Information about Ink
Key Points to Successful Printing
Be Sure to Check Paper Settings before Printing
Be Sure to Set Cassette Paper Information after Loading Paper
Canceling a Print Job
Storing Printed Images
Key to Enjoying Consistent Printing Quality
Precautions for Safe Transport of the Machine
298
Useful Information about Ink
The machine has the function to automatically clean the ink jet nozzles to prevent clogging. In the
cleaning procedure, used ink for nozzle cleaning is limited to a small amount.
299
Key Points to Successful Printing
If a print head nozzle is clogged, print will be faint and papers will be wasted. Print the nozzle check
pattern to check the print head.
Maintenance Procedure
After printing large quantities of paper or performing borderless printing, the area where papers go
through may get smeared with ink. Clean the inside of your machine with Bottom Plate Cleaning.
To load paper in the cassette, load paper WITH THE PRINTING SIDE FACING DOWN.
Loading Paper
The curled paper causes paper jam. Flatten the curled paper, then reload it.
"Load the paper after correcting its curl." in Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched
300
Be Sure to Check Paper Settings before Printing
Before printing, make paper settings in the operation panel or the computer screen.
There are various types of paper, such as paper with a special surface coating for printing photos at optimal
quality and paper suitable for documents.
Each media type has specific preset settings (how ink is used and sprayed, distance from nozzles, etc.), that
allow you to print to that type with optimal image quality. The wrong paper settings may cause poor printout
color quality or scratches on the printed surface.
If you notice blurring or uneven colors, increase the print quality setting and try printing again.
301
Be Sure to Set Cassette Paper Information after Loading Paper
When you insert a cassette into the machine after loading paper, the screen for setting the type and size of
paper is displayed. Set the cassette paper information according to the type and size of loaded paper.
To prevent incorrect printing, this machine has a function that detects whether the information set for the
paper loaded in the cassette matches the paper settings. Before printing, make paper settings in
accordance with the cassette paper information. When this function is enabled, an error message is
displayed if these settings do not match to prevent incorrect printing. When this error message is displayed,
check and correct the paper settings.
To check cassette paper information, display the paper information screen on the operation panel.
302
Canceling a Print Job
303
Storing Printed Images
Store printed images in albums, clear photo sleeves, or glass frames to protect them from direct exposure to
air.
Note
• Storing printed images without sufficient drying may cause blurring or discoloration.
304
Key to Enjoying Consistent Printing Quality
The key to printing with the optimal printing quality is to prevent the print head from drying or clogging.
Always observe the following rules for optimal printing quality.
Note
• Depending on the type of paper, ink may blur if you trace the printed area with a highlight pen or paint-
stick, or bleed if water or sweat comes in contact with the printed area.
Never unplug the power cord until the power is turned off!
If you press the ON button to turn off the power, the machine caps the print head (nozzles) automatically
to prevent from drying. If you unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before the POWER lamp is
turned off, the print head will not be capped properly and this will cause drying or clogging.
When unplugging the power cord, make sure that the POWER lamp is not lit.
Important
• If the power cord is unplugged, the date/time settings will be reset and all documents stored in the
machine's memory will be lost. Send or print a necessary document before unplugging the power
cord.
Print periodically!
Just as the tip of a felt pen becomes dry and unusable if it has not been used for a long time, even if it is
capped, the print head too, may become dried or clogged if the machine has not been used for a long
time. We recommend you to use the machine at least once a month.
305
Precautions for Safe Transport of the Machine
When relocating the machine, make sure of the following.
Important
• Pack the machine in a sturdy box so that it is placed with its bottom facing down, using sufficient
protective material to ensure safe transport.
• With the FINE cartridge left installed in the machine, press the ON button to turn off the power. This
allows the machine to automatically cap the print head, thus preventing it from drying.
• After packing, do not tilt the box containing the machine or turn it on its side or upside down. Doing so
may cause the ink to leak during transport and cause damage to the machine.
• When a shipping agent is handling transport of the machine, have its box marked "THIS SIDE UP" to
keep the machine with its bottom facing down. Mark also with "FRAGILE" or "HANDLE WITH CARE".
2. Confirm that the POWER lamp is off and unplug the power cord.
Important
• Do not unplug the machine while the POWER lamp is lit or flashing, as it may cause malfunction
or damage to the machine, making the machine unable to print.
3. Retract the paper output support with the output tray extension closed.
5. Unplug the printer cable from the computer and from the machine, then unplug the power
cord from the machine.
6. Use adhesive tape to secure all the covers on the machine to keep them from opening
during transportation. Then pack the machine in the plastic bag.
7. Attach the protective material to the machine when packing the machine in the box.
Important
• We recommend to hold and carry out this machine as shown in the figure below. If you hold the
front cover or the cassette, it may fall out of the machine.
306
307
Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images
It may be unlawful to make copies of, scan, print, or use reproductions of the following documents.
The list provided is non-exhaustive. When in doubt, check with a legal representative in your jurisdiction.
• Paper money
• Money orders
• Certificates of deposit
• Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
• Identifying badges or insignias
• Selective service or draft papers
• Checks or drafts issued by governmental agencies
• Motor vehicle licenses and certificates of title
• Traveler's checks
• Food stamps
• Passports
• Immigration papers
• Internal revenue stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
• Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness
• Stock certificates
• Copyrighted works/works of art without permission of copyright owner
308
Specifications
General Specifications
Printing resolution (dpi) 4800* (horizontal) x 1200 (vertical)
Hi-Speed USB *1
LAN Port:
*2 Setup possible through Standard setup, WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), WCN
(Windows Connect Now) or Cableless setup.
Recommended conditions:
* For the temperature and humidity conditions of papers such as photo paper,
refer to the paper's packaging or the supplied instructions.
*1 USB connection to PC
External dimensions Approx. 17.2 (W) x 11.7 (D) x 7.5 (H) inches
Canon FINE Cartridge Total 1280 nozzles (BK 320 nozzles, C/M/Y each 320 nozzles)
309
ADF capacity A4 or Letter size: max. 20 sheets (20 lb/75 g /m2 paper), up to 0.08 inch/2 mm
in height
Legal size: max. 5 sheets (20 lb/75 g /m2 paper), up to 0.02 inch/0.5 mm in
height
Copy Specifications
Multiple copy max. 99 pages
Scan Specifications
Scanner driver Windows: TWAIN 1.9 Specification, WIA
Scanning resolution Optical resolution (horizontal x vertical) max: 600 x 1200 dpi *1
*2 Increasing the scanning resolution will limit the maximum possible scanning
area.
Fax Specifications
Applicable line Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
Color: JPEG
(Automatic fallback)
(Based on ITU-T No.1 chart for US specifications and Canon FAX Standard
chart No.1 for others, both in standard mode.)
310
Density adjustment 3 levels
(Based on ITU-T No.1 chart for US specifications and Canon FAX Standard
chart No.1 for others, both in standard mode.)
Fax resolution Black Standard: 203 pels/inch x 98 lines/inch (8 pels/mm x 3.85 lines/mm)
Black Fine, Photo: 203 pels/inch x 196 lines/inch (8 pels/mm x 7.70 lines/mm)
Automatic redialing
Network Specifications
Communication protocol TCP/IP
Security:
WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES)
WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES)
Setup:
Standard setup
Cableless setup
311
Windows
Operating System Windows 8.1*, Windows 8
The necessary amount of hard disk space may be changed without notice.
Mac OS
Operating System Mac OS X v10.7.5 or later
The necessary amount of hard disk space may be changed without notice.
Other Supported OS
Some functions may not be available with each OS. Refer to the Canon web site for details on operation with iOS,
Android, and Windows RT.
312
• In an in-house network environment, the 5222 port must be open. Contact the network
administrator for details.
313
About the Administrator Password
An administrator password "canon" is already specified for the printer at the time of purchase.
Important
• For security reasons, it is recommended to change the password before you use the printer.
• You can change the password using one of the tools below. (Some tools may not be available
depending on the printer you are using.)
• IJ Network Tool
• If the password has been changed while you are sharing the printer and you do not know the password,
ask the administrator of the printer you are using.
• The password reverts to the default setting by initializing the printer settings.
314
List of Function for Each Model
MG series
MX series
MB series
E series
P series
iP series
iX series
iB series
PRO series
MG series
Model name Card slot
MG7530F ✓
MG7500 ✓
MG7100 ✓
MG6730 ✓
MG6600 ✓
MG6500 ✓
MG6400 ✓
MG5600 –
MG5500 –
MG3500 –
MG2900 –
MG2500 –
MG2400 –
MX series
Model name Card slot
MX920 –
MX720 –
MX530 –
MX520 –
MX490 –
MX470 –
MX450 –
MX390 –
315
MB series
Model name Card slot
MB5300 –
MB5000 –
MB2300 –
MB2000 –
E series
Model name Card slot
E610 –
E560 –
E480 –
E460 –
E400 –
P series
Model name Card slot
P200 –
iP series
Model name Card slot
iP8700 –
iP2800 –
iP110 –
iX series
Model name Card slot
iX6800 –
iX6700 –
iB series
Model name Card slot
iB4000 –
PRO series
Model name Card slot
PRO-100S –
316
PRO-10S –
317
Printing
318
Printing from a Computer
Printing with Application Software that You are Using (Printer Driver)
319
Printing with Application Software that You are Using (Printer
Driver)
Printing with Easy Setup Basic
Various Printing Methods
Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data
Overview of the Printer Driver
Printer Driver Description
Updating the MP Drivers
320
Printing with Easy Setup
This section describes the simple procedure for setting the Quick Setup tab so that you can carry out
appropriate printing on this printer.
321
Important
• The print quality settings that can be selected may differ depending on a printing profile.
Important
• When you select the Always Print with Current Settings check box, all settings specified on the
Quick Setup, Main, and Page Setup tabs are saved, and you can print with the same settings from the
next time as well.
• In the Commonly Used Settings window, click Save... to register the specified settings.
322
Note
• If the paper settings on the printer driver differ from the cassette paper information registered on the
printer, an error may occur. For instructions on what to do if an error occurs, see "Paper setting for
Printing."
For details about the cassette paper information to be registered on the printer, see the following:
• Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
• Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
323
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
When you use this printer, selecting a media type and paper size that matches the print purpose will help
you achieve the best print results.
You can use the following media types on this printer.
Photo Paper Plus Glossy II <PP-201> Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PlusGlossyII
Photo Paper Pro Platinum <PT-101> Photo Paper Pro Platinum ProPlatinum
Photo Paper Pro Luster <LU-101> Photo Paper Pro Luster Pro Luster
Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss <SG-201> Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss Semi-gloss
324
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
When you use this printer, selecting a paper size that matches the print purpose will help you achieve the
best print results.
You can use the following paper sizes on this printer.
Printer Paper Size in the printer driver Cassette paper information registered on the printer
A5 A5
A4 A4
B5 B5
Envelope DL Envelope DL
325
Various Printing Methods
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
Setting the Stapling Margin
Execute Borderless Printing
Fit-to-Page Printing
Scaled Printing
Page Layout Printing
Tiling/Poster Printing
Booklet Printing
Duplex Printing
Stamp/Background Printing
Registering a Stamp
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
Setting Up Envelope Printing
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History
326
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
The paper size and orientation are essentially determined by the application software. When the page size
and orientation set for Page Size and Orientation on the Page Setup tab are same as those set with the
application software, you do not need to select them on the Page Setup tab.
When you are not able to specify them with the application software, the procedure for selecting a page size
and orientation is as follows:
You can also set page size and orientation on the Quick Setup tab.
3. Set Orientation
Select Portrait or Landscape for Orientation. Check Rotate 180 degrees check box when you want to
perform printing with the original being rotated 180 degrees.
Note
• If Normal-size is selected for Page Layout, then Automatically reduce large document that the
printer cannot output is displayed.
Normally, you can leave the check box checked. During printing, if you do not want to reduce large
documents that cannot be printed on the printer, uncheck the check box.
327
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
The procedure for specifying the number of copies and printing order is as follows:
You can also set the number of copies on the Quick Setup tab.
328
• Print from Last Page: /Collate:
Important
• When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function, specify the
settings on the printer driver. However, if the print results are not acceptable, specify the function
settings on the application software. When you specify the number of copies and the printing order with
both the application software and this printer driver, the number of copies may be multiplied numbers of
the two settings or the specified printing order may not be enabled.
• Print from Last Page appears grayed out and is unavailable when Tiling/Poster is selected for Page
Layout.
• When Booklet is selected for Page Layout, Print from Last Page and Collate appear grayed out and
cannot be set.
• When Duplex Printing (Manual) is selected, Print from Last Page appears grayed out and cannot be
set.
Note
• By setting both Print from Last Page and Collate, you can perform printing so that papers are collated
one by one starting from the last page.
These settings can be used in combination with Normal-size, Borderless, Fit-to-Page, Scaled, and
Page Layout.
329
Setting the Stapling Margin
The procedure for setting the staple side and the margin width is as follows:
330
Note
• The printer automatically reduces the print area depending on the staple position margin.
Important
• Stapling Side and Specify Margin... appear grayed out and are unavailable when:
• Borderless, Tiling/Poster, or Booklet is selected for Page Layout
• Scaled is selected for Page Layout (When Duplex Printing (Manual) is also selected, only
Stapling Side can be specified.)
331
Execute Borderless Printing
The borderless printing function allows you to print data without any margin by enlarging the data so that it
extends slightly off the paper. In standard printing, margins are created around the document area.
However, in borderless printing function, these margins are not created. When you want to print data such
as a photo without providing any margin around it, set borderless printing.
You can also set borderless printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab.
332
Check the Page Size list. When you want to change it, select another page size from the list. The list
displays only sizes that can be used for borderless printing.
Important
• When the Amount of Extension slider is set to the rightmost position, the back side of the
paper may become smudged.
Important
• When a page size that cannot be used for borderless printing is selected, the size is automatically
changed to the valid page sizes for borderless printing.
• When Borderless is selected, the Printer Paper Size, Duplex Printing (Manual), Stapling Side
settings, and the Stamp/Background... (Stamp...) button on the Page Setup tab appear grayed out
and are unavailable.
• When Envelope, or High Resolution Paper is selected from the Media Type list on the Main tab,
you cannot perform borderless printing.
• Depending on the type of the media used during borderless printing, the print quality may deteriorate
at the top and bottom of the sheet or stains may form.
• When the ratio of the height to the width differs from the image data, a portion of the image may not
be printed depending on the size of the media used.
In this case, crop the image data with an application software according to the paper size.
Note
• When Plain Paper is selected for Media Type on the Main tab, borderless printing is not
recommended. Therefore, the message for media selection appears.
When you are using plain paper for test printing, select Plain Paper, and click OK.
When you are not satisfied with the result of borderless printing, reduce the amount of extension. The
extension amount decreases as the Amount of Extension slider is moved to the left.
333
Important
• When the amount of extension is decreased, an unexpected margin may be produced on the print,
depending on the size of the paper.
Note
• When the Amount of Extension slider is set to the leftmost position, image data will be printed in the
full size.
• When Preview before printing is checked on the Main tab, you can confirm whether there will be no
margin before printing.
334
Fit-to-Page Printing
The procedure for printing a document that is automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the page size to be
used is as follows:
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
335
5. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the document will be enlarged or reduced to fit to the page size.
336
Scaled Printing
The procedure for printing a document with pages enlarged or reduced is as follows:
When the printer paper size is smaller than the Page Size, the page image will be reduced. When
the printer paper size is larger than the Page Size, the page image will be enlarged.
337
• Specify a scaling factor
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
Important
• When the application software which you used to create the original has the scaled printing function,
configure the settings on your application software. You do not need to configure the same setting in
the printer driver.
338
Note
• Selecting Scaled changes the printable area of the document.
339
Page Layout Printing
The page layout printing function allows you to print more than one page image on a single sheet of paper.
4. Set the number of pages to be printed on one sheet and the page order
If necessary, click Specify..., specify the following settings in the Page Layout Printing dialog box, and
click OK.
340
Pages
To change the number of pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper, select the number of
pages from the list.
Page Order
To change the page arrangement order, select a placement method from the list.
Page Border
To print a page border around each document page, check this check box.
341
Tiling/Poster Printing
The tiling/poster printing function allows you to enlarge image data, divide it into several pages, and print
these pages on separate sheets of paper. You can also paste the pages together to create a large print like
a poster.
342
If necessary, click Specify..., specify the following settings in the Tiling/Poster Printing dialog box,
and then click OK.
Image Divisions
Select the number of divisions (vertical x horizontal).
As the number of divisions increases, the number of sheets used for printing increases. If you are
pasting pages together to create a poster, increasing the number of divisions allows you to create
a larger poster.
Print "Cut/Paste" in margins
To leave out words "Cut" and "Paste", uncheck this check box.
Note
• This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers or operating environments are
used.
343
Note
• Click the deleted pages to display them again.
• Right-click the settings preview to select Print all pages or Delete all pages.
Important
• Since tiling/poster printing enlarges the document when printing it, the print results may become coarse.
344
Booklet Printing
The booklet printing function allows you to print data for a booklet. Data is printed on both sides of the
paper. This type of printing ensures that pages can be collated properly, in page number order, when the
printed sheets are folded and stapled at the center.
345
Margin for stapling
Select which side should the stapling margin be on when the booklet is completed.
Insert blank page
To leave one side of a sheet blank, check the check box, and select the page to be left blank.
Margin
Enter the margin width. The specified width from the center of the sheet becomes the margin width
for one page.
Page Border
To print a page border around each document page, check the check box.
Important
• Booklet cannot be selected when a media type other than Plain Paper is selected for Media Type on
the Main tab.
Note
• The stamp and background are not printed on the inserted blank sheets with the Insert blank page
function of booklet printing.
346
Duplex Printing
The procedure for printing data on both sides of one sheet of paper is as follows:
You can also set duplex printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab.
347
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the document is first printed on one side of a sheet of paper. After one side is
printed, reload the paper correctly according to the message.
Then click Start Printing to print the opposite side.
Important
• When a media type other than Plain Paper is selected from Media Type on the Main tab, Duplex
Printing (Manual) appears grayed out and is unavailable.
• When Borderless, Tiling/Poster or Booklet is selected from the Page Layout list, Duplex Printing
(Manual) and Stapling Side appear grayed out and are unavailable.
Related Topics
Changing the Printer Operation Mode
348
Stamp/Background Printing
Stamp or Background may be unavailable when certain printer drivers or operating environments are used.
The Stamp function allows you to print a stamp text or a bitmap over or behind document data. It also
allows you to print date, time and user name. The Background function allows you to print a light illustration
behind the document data.
Printing a Stamp
"CONFIDENTIAL," "IMPORTANT," and other stamps that are used often in companies are pre-registered.
Note
• With the XPS printer driver, the Stamp/Background... button has become the Stamp... button
and only the stamp function can be used.
349
3. Select a stamp
Check the Stamp check box, and select the stamp to be used from the list.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab.
Printing a Background
Two bitmap files are pre-registered as samples.
350
Select Background... button
To use another background or change the layout or density of a background, click this.
Important
• When Borderless is selected, the Stamp/Background... (Stamp...) button appears grayed out and is
unavailable.
Note
• The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page
function of booklet printing.
Related Topics
Registering a Stamp
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
351
Registering a Stamp
This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers or operating environments are used.
You can create and register a new stamp. You can also change and re-register some of the settings of an
existing stamp. Unnecessary stamps can be deleted at any time.
Note
• With the XPS printer driver, the Stamp/Background... button has become the Stamp... button
and only the stamp function can be used.
352
4. Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window
• Stamp tab
Select Text, Bitmap, or Date/Time/User Name that matches your purpose for Stamp Type.
◦ For Text registration, the characters must already be entered in Stamp Text. If necessary,
change the TrueType Font, Style, Size, and Outline settings. You can select the color of
the stamp by clicking Select Color....
◦ For Bitmap, click Select File... and select the bitmap file (.bmp) to be used. If necessary,
change the settings of the Size and Transparent white area.
◦ For Date/Time/User Name, the creation date/time and user name of the printed object are
displayed in Stamp Text. If necessary, change the settings of TrueType Font, Style, Size,
and Outline. You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color....
Important
• Stamp Text appears grayed out and is unavailable when Date/Time/User Name is
selected.
• Placement tab
Select the stamp position from the Position list. You can also select Custom from the Position
list and specify coordinates for X-Position and Y-Position.
You can also change the stamp position by dragging the stamp in the preview window.
To change the stamp position angle, type a value in the Orientation box directly.
Important
• Orientation cannot be changed when Bitmap is selected for Stamp Type on the Stamp tab.
Note
• Spaces, tabs, and returns cannot be entered at the beginning or end of a title.
353
6. Complete the setup
Click OK. The Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box opens again.
The registered title appears in the Stamp list.
354
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers or operating environments are used.
You can select a bitmap file (.bmp) and register it as a new background. You can also change and register
some of the settings of an existing background. An unnecessary background can be deleted.
Note
• With the XPS printer driver, the Stamp/Background... button has become the Stamp... button
and Background cannot be used.
355
4. Select the image data to be registered to the background
Click Select File.... Select the target bitmap file (.bmp), and then click Open.
Intensity
Set the intensity of the background image data with the Intensity slider. Moving the slider to the
right darkens the background, and moving the slider to the left lightens the background. To print
the background at the original bitmap intensity, move the slider to the rightmost position.
Note
• Spaces, tabs, and returns cannot be entered at the beginning or end of a title.
356
3. Specify each item on the Background tab while viewing the preview window
357
Setting Up Envelope Printing
The procedure for performing envelope printing is as follows:
358
Note
• If the paper settings on the printer driver differ from the cassette paper information registered on the
printer, an error may occur. For instructions on what to do if an error occurs, see "Paper setting for
Printing."
For details about the cassette paper information to be registered on the printer, see the following:
• Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
• Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
359
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
If you are using the XPS printer driver, replace "Canon IJ Preview" with "Canon IJ XPS Preview" when
reading this information.
You can display and check the print result before printing.
The procedure for displaying the print result before printing is as follows:
You can also set the print results display on the Quick Setup tab.
Important
• In the Manual Color Adjustment dialog box, the Color Adjustment tab contains the Print a pattern
for color adjustment check box. When this check box is selected, the Preview before printing
appears grayed out and is unavailable.
Related Topic
Canon IJ Preview
360
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
You can specify the height and width of paper when its size cannot be selected from the Page Size. Such a
paper size is called "custom size."
You can also set a custom size in Printer Paper Size on the Quick Setup tab.
361
Important
• If the application software that created the document has a function for specifying height and width
values, use the application software to set the values. If the application software does not have such a
function or if the document does not print correctly, perform the above procedure from the printer driver
to set the values.
• Printing may be disabled depending on the size of the specified user-defined media.
For information about printable sizes for user-defined media, see "Media Types You Can Use."
Note
• If the paper settings on the printer driver differ from the cassette paper information registered on the
printer, an error may occur. For instructions on what to do if an error occurs, see "Paper setting for
Printing."
For details about the cassette paper information to be registered on the printer, see the following:
• Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
• Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
362
Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History
This function is unavailable when the standard IJ printer driver is used.
In the Canon IJ XPS preview window, you can edit the print document or retrieve the document print history
to print the document.
Combine Documents
Delete Document
Reset Documents
View Thumbnails
Move Document
Undo
Move Page
Delete Page
Note
• By clicking View Thumbnails, you can display or hide thumbnails of the print documents selected
in the Document Name list.
• Clicking Undo reverses the change that just performed.
363
Editing and Printing a Print Document
When printing multiple documents or pages, you can combine documents, change the print sequence of
the documents or pages, or delete documents or pages.
◦ To change the sequence of the print documents, go to the Document Name list, and select
the print document to be moved. Next, on the Edit menu, select Move Document from
Documents, and select the appropriate item. You can also click and drag a print document
to change the print sequence.
◦ To change the sequence of the print pages, click View Thumbnails from the Option menu,
and select the print page to be moved. Next, on the Edit menu, select Move Page from
Pages, and select the appropriate item. You can also click and drag a print page to change
the print sequence.
• Deleting print documents and print pages
◦ To delete a print document, select the target document from the Document Name list, and
on the Edit menu, choose Documents and then Delete Document.
◦ To delete a print page, click View Thumbnails from the Option menu, and select the print
page to be deleted. Next, on the Edit menu, select Delete Page from Pages.
• Print page recovery
You can recover pages that were deleted with Delete Page.
To recover pages, select the View Deleted Pages check box from the Option menu, and select
the pages to be recovered from among the displayed thumbnail pages. Then from the Edit menu
chose Pages and then Restore Page.
After editing the print documents or print pages, you can change the print settings on the Page
Information, Layout and Manual Color Adjustment tabs as necessary.
364
Important
• To display the multiple documents in the list, open the preview and execute print again.
• To return the print documents to their original condition before they were edited in the preview,
on the Edit menu, select Reset Documents from Documents.
• If the documents to be combined have different print settings, a message may be displayed.
Check the contents of the displayed message before combining the documents.
• If the documents to be combined have different output paper sizes and duplex printing or page
layout printing is to be performed, the printer may not produce the expected print results for
certain print pages.
Check the preview before printing.
• Depending on the print settings of the print document, some functions may not be available in
the Canon IJ XPS preview.
Note
• You can rename Document Name to any name.
5. Executing print
Click Print.
When you execute print, the printer uses the specified settings to print the data.
Important
• To limit the number of print history registrations, click History Entry Limit on the File menu.
• If the limit on the number of registration is exceeded, the print history registrations are deleted
starting from the oldest one.
3. Executing print
Click Print.
Related Topic
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
365
Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data
Setting the Print Quality Level (Custom)
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
Specifying Color Correction
Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Printing with ICC Profiles
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Adjusting Intensity/Contrast Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)
366
Setting the Print Quality Level (Custom)
The print quality level can be set in the Custom.
Important
• Certain print quality levels cannot be selected depending on the settings of Media Type.
Related Topics
Specifying Color Correction
367
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
368
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
You can also set a grayscale printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab.
Important
• When the Grayscale Printing check box is checked, the printer driver processes image data as sRGB
data. In this case, actual colors printed may differ from those in the original image data.
When using the grayscale printing function to print Adobe RGB data, convert the data to sRGB data
using an application software.
Note
• During Grayscale Printing, inks other than black ink may be used as well.
369
Specifying Color Correction
You can specify the color correction method suited to the type of document to be printed.
Normally, the printer driver adjusts the colors by using Canon Digital Photo Color so that data is printed with
color tints that most people prefer. This method is suitable for printing sRGB data.
When you want to print by using the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the image data effectively, select
ICM (ICC Profile Matching). When you want to use an application software to specify a printing ICC profile,
select None.
You can also set color correction on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly
Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.
370
Driver Matching
With Canon Digital Photo Color, you can print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer.
None
The printer driver does not perform color correction. Select this value when you are specifying an
individually created printing ICC profile in an application software to print data.
Important
• When ICM is disabled in the application software, ICM is unavailable for Color Correction and the
printer may not be able to print the image data properly.
• When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Color Correction appears
grayed out and is unavailable.
Related Topics
Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Printing with ICC Profiles
371
Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data
When people print images taken with digital cameras, they sometimes feel that the printed color tones differ
from those of actual image or those displayed on the monitor.
To get the print results as close as possible to the desired color tones, you must select a printing method
that is best suited to the application software used or to your purpose.
Color Management
Devices such as digital cameras, scanners, monitors, and printers handle color differently. Color
management (color matching) is a method that manages device-dependent "colors" as a common color
space.
For Windows, a color management system called "ICM" is built into the operating system.
Adobe RGB and sRGB are popularly used as common color spaces. Adobe RGB has a wider color space
than sRGB.
ICC profiles convert device-dependent "colors" into a common color space. By using an ICC profile and
carrying out color management, you can draw out the color space of the image data within the color
reproduction area that the printer can express.
The printer prints data with color tints that most people prefer, reproducing colors of the original
image data and producing three-dimensional effects and high, sharp contrasts.
• To print by directly applying editing and touch-up results of an application software
When printing the data, the printer brings out subtle color difference between dark and light
areas, while leaving the darkest and lightest areas intact.
When printing the data, the printer applies fine adjustment results, such as brightness
adjustments made with an application software.
372
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
You can specify the color correction function of the printer driver to print sRGB data with color tints that most
people prefer through the use of Canon Digital Photo Color.
When printing from an application software that can identify ICC profiles and allows you to specify them, use
a printing ICC profile in the application software, and select settings for color management.
The procedure for adjusting colors with the printer driver is as follows:
Related Topics
Setting the Print Quality Level (Custom)
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
373
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
374
Printing with ICC Profiles
When the image data has a specified input ICC profile, you can print by using the color space (Adobe RGB
or sRGB) of the data effectively.
The printer driver setting procedure varies depending on the application software used to print.
Specify an ICC Profile from the Application Software and Print the Data
When you print the editing and touch-up results of Adobe Photoshop, Canon Digital Photo Professional,
or any application software that allows you to specify input and printing ICC profiles, you print by
effectively using the color space of the input ICC profile specified in the image data.
To use this printing method, use your application software to select color management items and specify
an input ICC profile and a printing ICC profile in the image data.
Even if you print using a printing ICC profile that you created yourself from your application software, be
sure to select color management items from your application software.
For instructions, refer to the manual of the application software you are using.
375
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the printer uses the color space of the image data.
Specify an ICC Profile with the Printer Driver, and then Print
Print from an application software that cannot identify input ICC profiles or does allow you to specify one
by using the color space of the input ICC profile (sRGB) found in the data. When printing Adobe RGB
data, you can print the data with the Adobe RGB color space even if the application software does not
support Adobe RGB.
Select Standard.
• For Adobe RGB data:
Important
• When the application software specifies an input profile, the input profile setting of the printer
driver becomes invalid.
376
• Adobe RGB (1998) is not displayed when input profiles of Adobe RGB are not installed.
Related Topics
Setting the Print Quality Level (Custom)
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
377
Adjusting Color Balance
You can adjust the color tints when printing.
Since this function adjusts color balance of the output by changing the ink ratios of each color, it changes
the total color balance of the document. Use the application software when you want to change the color
balance significantly. Use the printer driver only when you want to adjust the color balance slightly.
The following sample shows the case when color balance is used to intensify cyan and to diminish yellow so
that the overall colors are more uniform.
You can also set color balance on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly
Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.
378
There are individual sliders for Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow. Each color becomes stronger when the
corresponding slider is moved to the right, and becomes weaker when the corresponding slider is moved
to the left. For example, when cyan becomes weaker, the color red becomes stronger.
You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50. The
current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
After adjusting each color, click OK.
Important
• When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, the color balance (Cyan,
Magenta, Yellow) appear grayed out and are unavailable.
Related Topics
Setting the Print Quality Level (Custom)
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Adjusting Intensity/Contrast Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)
379
Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)
You can look at the print results of pattern print and adjust the color balance.
When you change the color balance or intensity/contrast of a document, the pattern print function prints the
adjustment results in a list, together with the adjustment values.
Described below is the procedure for adjusting the color balance while looking at the pattern.
380
4. Setting pattern print
When the Pattern Print dialog box opens, set the following items, and then click OK.
Parameters to Adjust
Select Cyan/Magenta/Yellow.
Important
• When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
appear grayed out and are unavailable.
381
Note
• Large is about double the size of Medium, and Small is about half the size of Medium.
Important
• Normally, patterns are printed with the color balance settings as the center values. However,
when Black Only is selected for Ink Cartridge Settings on the Maintenance tab, the color
balance settings are not applied to pattern printing.
382
Note
• You can also set color balance on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under
Commonly Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under
Additional Features.
Important
• When Print a pattern for color adjustment is selected on the Color Adjustment tab, the following
items are grayed out and cannot be set:
• Preview before printing on the Main tab
• Stapling Side and Specify Margin... on the Page Setup tab (When Duplex Printing (Manual) is
set, only Stapling Side can be set.)
• You can print a pattern only if the Page Layout setting on the Page Setup tab is Normal-size or
Borderless.
• When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow
appear grayed out and are unavailable.
• Depending on your application software, this function may not be available.
Related Topics
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Adjusting Intensity/Contrast Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)
383
Adjusting Brightness
You can change the brightness of the overall image data during printing.
This function does not change pure white or pure black but it changes the brightness of the intermediate
colors.
The following sample shows the print result when the brightness setting is changed.
You can also set brightness on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used
Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.
384
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed at the specified brightness.
Related Topics
Setting the Print Quality Level (Custom)
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
385
Adjusting Intensity
You can dilute (brighten) or intensify (darken) the colors of the overall image data during printing.
The following sample shows the case when the intensity is increased so that all colors become more intense
when the image data is printed.
You can also set intensity on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used
Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.
3. Adjust intensity
Moving the Intensity slider to the right intensifies (darkens) the colors, and moving the slider to the left
dilutes (brightens) the colors.
You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50. The
current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
386
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the image data is printed with the adjusted intensity.
Related Topics
Setting the Print Quality Level (Custom)
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Contrast
Adjusting Intensity/Contrast Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)
387
Adjusting Contrast
You can adjust the image contrast during printing.
To make the differences between the light and dark portions of images greater and more distinct, increase
the contrast. On the other hand, to make the differences between the light and dark portions of images
smaller and less distinct, reduce the contrast.
You can also set contrast on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used
Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.
388
After adjusting each color, click OK.
Related Topics
Setting the Print Quality Level (Custom)
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Intensity/Contrast Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)
389
Adjusting Intensity/Contrast Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)
You can look at the print results of pattern print and adjust the intensity/contrast.
When you change the color balance or intensity/contrast of a document, the pattern print function prints the
adjustment results in a list, together with the adjustment values.
Described below is the procedure for adjusting the intensity/contrast while looking at the pattern.
390
4. Setting pattern print
When the Pattern Print dialog box opens, set the following items, and then click OK.
Parameters to Adjust
Select Intensity/Contrast.
391
On the Color Adjustment tab, select OK to close the Manual Color Adjustment dialog box.
On the Main tab, select OK, and then execute printing. The printer then prints a pattern in which the
intensity/contrast that you set is the center value.
392
Note
• You can also set intensity/contrast on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under
Commonly Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under
Additional Features.
Important
• When Print a pattern for color adjustment is selected on the Color Adjustment tab, the following
items are grayed out and cannot be set:
• Preview before printing on the Main tab
• Stapling Side and Specify Margin... on the Page Setup tab (When Duplex Printing (Manual) is
set, only Stapling Side can be set.)
• You can print a pattern only if the Page Layout setting on the Page Setup tab is Normal-size or
Borderless.
• Depending on your application software, this function may not be available.
Related Topics
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
393
Overview of the Printer Driver
Canon IJ Printer Driver
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
Canon IJ Status Monitor
Checking the Ink Status from Your Computer
Canon IJ Preview
Deleting the Undesired Print Job
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)
394
Canon IJ Printer Driver
The Canon IJ printer driver (called printer driver below) is a software that is installed on your computer for
printing data with this printer.
The printer driver converts the print data created by your application software into data that your printer can
understand, and sends the converted data to the printer.
Because different models support different print data formats, you need a printer driver for the specific
model you are using.
Important
• To use the XPS printer driver, the standard printer driver must already be installed on your computer.
Related Topic
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
395
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
You can display the printer driver setup window from the application software in use or from the printer icon.
Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Application Software
Follow the procedure below to configure printing profile when printing.
1. Select the command that you perform printing on the application software
In general, select Print on the File menu to open the Print dialog box.
Note
• Depending on application software you use, command names or menu names may vary and
there may be more steps. For details, refer to the user's manual of your application software.
Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window from the Printer Icon
Follow the procedure below to perform printer maintenance operations such as print head cleaning, or to
configure a printing profile that is common to all application software.
2. Right-click your model name icon, and then select Printing preferences from the
displayed menu
The printer driver setup window appears.
Important
• Opening the printer driver setup window through Printer properties (Windows 8.1, Windows 8,
Windows 7) or Properties (Windows Vista, Windows XP) displays such tabs regarding the
Windows functions as the Ports (or Advanced) tab. Those tabs do not appear when opening
through Printing preferences or application software. For tabs regarding Windows functions,
refer to the user's manual for the Windows.
396
Canon IJ Status Monitor
The Canon IJ Status Monitor is an application software that shows the status of the printer and the progress
of printing. You will know the status of the printer with graphics, icons, and messages.
Click the button of the status monitor displayed on the task bar. The Canon IJ Status Monitor appears.
Note
• To open the Canon IJ Status Monitor when the printer is not printing, open the printer driver setup
window and click View Printer Status on the Maintenance tab.
• The information displayed on the Canon IJ Status Monitor may differ depending on the country or
region where you are using your printer.
397
Checking the Ink Status from Your Computer
You can check the remaining ink level and the FINE cartridge types for your model.
Note
• The information displayed on the Canon IJ Status Monitor may differ depending on the country or
region where you are using your printer.
If a warning or error related to the remaining ink amount occurs, a notification icon is displayed at the top
of the image in the Ink Details dialog box.
In such cases, take the appropriate action as described on the screen.
Note
• You can also display the Ink Details dialog box by selecting the ink icon on the Canon IJ Status
Monitor.
398
Canon IJ Preview
The Canon IJ Preview is an application software that displays what the print result will look like before a
document is actually printed.
The preview reflects the information that is set within the printer driver and allows you to check the
document layout, print order, and number of pages. You can also change the media type settings.
When you want to display a preview before printing, open the printer driver setup window, click the Main
tab, and check the Preview before printing check box.
When you do not want to display a preview before printing, uncheck the check box.
Important
• If you are using the XPS printer driver, see "Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print
History."
Related Topic
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
399
Deleting the Undesired Print Job
If you are using the XPS printer driver, replace "Canon IJ Status Monitor" with "Canon IJ XPS Status
Monitor" when reading this information.
If the printer does not start printing, canceled or failed print job data may be remaining.
Delete the undesired print job by using the Canon IJ Status Monitor.
Important
• Users who have not been granted access permission for printer management cannot delete the print
job of another user.
Note
• When you perform this operation, all print jobs are deleted. If the print queue list contained a necessary
print job, start the printing process over from the beginning.
400
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)
This printer driver is subject to the following restrictions. Keep the following points in mind when using the
printer driver.
• Since the resolution in the preview display differs from the printing resolution, text and lines in the
preview display may appear different from the actual print result.
• With some applications, the printing is divided into multiple print jobs.
To cancel printing, delete all divided print jobs.
• If image data is not printed correctly, display the Print Options dialog box from the Page Setup tab
and change the setting of Disable ICM required from the application software. This may solve the
problem.
Note
• Disable ICM required from the application software cannot be used when the XPS printer
driver is used.
401
3. Set the Page Layout that you want, and then click OK to close the window.
4. Without starting printing, close the Print dialog box.
5. Open Word's Print dialog box again.
6. Open the printer driver setup window and click OK.
7. Start printing.
• If bitmap printing is enabled in Adobe Illustrator (Adobe Systems Incorporated), printing may take time
or some data may not be printed. Print after unchecking the Bitmap Printing check box in the Print
dialog box.
402
Printer Driver Description
Quick Setup tab Description
Main tab Description
Page Setup tab Description
Maintenance tab Description
Canon IJ Preview Description
Canon IJ XPS Preview Description
Canon IJ Status Monitor Description
403
Quick Setup tab Description
The Quick Setup tab is for registering commonly used print settings. When you select a registered setting,
the printer automatically switches to the preset items.
Business Document
Select this setting when printing a general document.
If Page Size, Orientation, and Copies were set from the application software, those settings have
priority.
Paper Saving
Select this setting to save paper when printing a general document. The 2-on-1 Printing and
Duplex Printing (Manual) check boxes are checked automatically.
If Page Size, Orientation, and Copies were set from the application software, those settings have
priority.
Photo Printing
If you select this setting when printing a photo, the photo paper and photo size generally used are
set. The Borderless Printing check box is checked automatically.
If Orientation and Copies were set from the application software, those settings have priority.
404
Envelope
If you select this setting for printing an envelope, Media Type is set automatically to Envelope. In
the Envelope Size Setting dialog box, select the size of the envelope to be used.
Note
• The combination of the Additional Features that was displayed for the printing profile that had
been selected when the added printing profile was saved is also displayed when that added
printing profile is selected.
Save...
Displays the Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box.
Click this button when you want to save the information that you set on the Quick Setup, Main, and
Page Setup tabs to Commonly Used Settings.
Delete
Deletes a registered printing profile.
Select the name of the setting to be deleted from Commonly Used Settings, and click Delete. When a
confirmation message is displayed, click OK to delete the specified printing profile.
Note
• Printing profiles that are registered in the initial settings cannot be deleted.
Settings Preview
The paper illustration shows how the original will be laid out on a sheet of paper.
You can check an overall image of the layout.
Additional Features
Displays the frequently used, convenient functions for the printing profile that you selected for
Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab.
When you move the mouse pointer near a function that can be changed, a description of that function is
displayed.
To enable a function, check the corresponding check box.
For some functions, you can set detailed settings from the Main and Page Setup tabs.
Important
• Depending on the printing profiles, certain function may be grayed out and you will not be able to
change them.
2-on-1 Printing
Prints two pages of the document, side by side, on one sheet of paper.
To change the page sequence, click the Page Setup tab, select Page Layout for Page Layout,
and click Specify.... Then in the Page Layout Printing dialog box that appears, specify the Page
Order.
405
4-on-1 Printing
Prints four pages of the document, side by side, on one sheet of paper.
To change the page sequence, click the Page Setup tab, select Page Layout for Page Layout,
and click Specify.... Then in the Page Layout Printing dialog box that appears, specify the Page
Order.
Borderless Printing
Performs borderless printing without any margins on the paper.
With the borderless printing function, the document to be printed is enlarged, so that it extends
slightly off the paper. In other words, the document is printed without any margin.
To adjust the amount that the document extends beyond the paper, click the Page Setup tab,
choose Borderless, and enter the value in Amount of Extension.
Grayscale Printing
This function converts the data to monochrome data when printing your document.
Draft
This setting is appropriate for test printing.
Media Type
Selects a type of printing paper.
Select a media type that matches the paper that is loaded in the printer. This ensures that printing is
carried out properly for the specified paper.
Orientation
Selects the printing orientation.
If the application used to create your document has a similar function, select the same orientation that
you selected in that application.
Portrait
Prints the document so that its top and bottom positions are unchanged relative to the paper feed
direction. This is the default setting.
406
Landscape
Prints the document by rotating it 90 degrees relative to the paper feed direction.
You can change the rotation direction by going to the Maintenance tab, opening the Custom
Settings dialog box, and then using Rotate 90 degrees left when orientation is [Landscape]
check box.
To rotate the document 90 degrees to the left when printing, select the Rotate 90 degrees left
when orientation is [Landscape] check box.
Print Quality
Selects your desired printing quality.
Select one of the following to set the print quality level that is appropriate for the purpose.
To set the print quality level individually, click the Main tab, and for Print Quality, select Custom. The
Set... becomes enabled. Click Set... to open the Custom dialog box, and then specify the desired
settings.
High
Gives priority to print quality over printing speed.
Standard
Prints with average speed and quality.
Draft
This setting is appropriate for test printing.
Paper Source
Shows the source from which paper is supplied.
Cassette
Paper is always supplied from the cassette.
Copies
Specifies the number of copies you want to print. You can specify a value from 1 to 999.
Important
• When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function,
specify the settings on the printer driver. However, if the print results are not acceptable, specify
the function settings on the application software.
Defaults
Restores all the settings you have changed to their default values.
Click this button to return all settings on the Quick Setup, Main, and Page Setup tabs to their default
values (factory settings).
407
Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box
This dialog box allows you to save the information that you set on the Quick Setup, Main, and Page
Setup tabs and add the information to the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick Setup tab.
Name
Enter the name for the printing profile you wish to save.
Up to 255 characters can be entered.
The name appears, with its associated icon, in the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick
Setup tab.
Options...
Opens the Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box.
Changes the details of printing profile to be saved.
Icon
Select the icon for the printing profile you wish to save.
The selected icon appears, with its name, in the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick
Setup tab.
Units
Select the unit for entering a user-defined paper size.
Paper Size
Specifies the Width and the Height of the custom paper. Measurement is shown according to the
units specified in Units.
408
Related Topics
Printing with Easy Setup
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
Execute Borderless Printing
Duplex Printing
Setting Up Envelope Printing
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Adjusting Intensity/Contrast Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile
409
Main tab Description
The Main tab allows you to create a basic print setup in accordance with the media type. Unless special
printing is required, normal printing can be performed just by setting the items on this tab.
Settings Preview
The paper illustration shows how the original will be laid out on a sheet of paper.
You can check an overall image of the layout.
Media Type
Selects a type of printing paper.
Select a media type that matches the paper that is loaded in the printer. This ensures that printing is
carried out properly for the specified paper.
Paper Source
Shows the source from which paper is supplied.
Cassette
Paper is always supplied from the cassette.
Print Quality
Selects your desired printing quality.
Select one of the following to set the print quality level that is appropriate for the purpose.
Important
• Depending on the Media Type settings, the same print results may be produced even if the Print
Quality is changed.
High
Gives priority to print quality over printing speed.
Standard
Prints with average speed and quality.
Draft
This setting is appropriate for test printing.
Custom
Select this when you want to set the printing quality level individually.
410
Set...
Select Custom for Print Quality to enable this button.
Open the Custom dialog box. You can then individually set the print quality level.
Color/Intensity
Selects color adjustment method.
Auto
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast, and so on are adjusted
automatically.
Manual
Select when you set the individual settings such as Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Brightness,
Intensity, and Contrast, etc. and Color Correction method.
Set...
Select Manual for Color/Intensity to enable this button.
In the Manual Color Adjustment dialog box, you can adjust individual color settings such as
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast on the Color Adjustment tab, and
select the Color Correction method on the Matching tab.
Note
• If you want to use an ICC profile to adjust colors, use the Manual Color Adjustment dialog
box to set the profile.
Grayscale Printing
This function converts the data to monochrome data when printing your document.
Check this check box to print a color document in monochrome.
Defaults
Restores all the settings you have changed to their default values.
Clicking this button restores all the settings on the current screen to their default values (factory
settings).
Quality
You can use the slider bar to adjust the print quality level.
Important
• Certain print quality levels cannot be selected depending on the settings of Media Type.
Note
• The High, Standard, or Draft print quality modes are linked with the slider bar. Therefore when
the slider bar is moved, the corresponding quality and value are displayed on the left. This is the
same as when the corresponding radio button is selected for Print Quality on the Main tab.
411
Color Adjustment Tab
This tab allows you to adjust the color balance by changing the settings of the Cyan, Magenta, Yellow,
Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast options.
Preview
Shows the effect of color adjustment.
The color and brightness change when each item is adjusted. You can check the color adjustment
status easily by changing the preview image to one similar to the results to be printed with Sample
Type.
Note
• The graphic is in monochrome when the Grayscale Printing check box is checked.
Sample Type
Selects a preview image displayed on the Color Adjustment tab.
If necessary, select a preview image from Standard, Landscape, or Graphics, whichever is most
similar to the print results.
Brightness
Selects the brightness of your print.
You cannot change the levels of pure white and black. However, the brightness of the colors between
white and black can be changed.
Intensity
Adjusts the overall intensity of your print.
Moving the slider to the right increases the intensity, and moving the slider to the left decreases the
intensity.
You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50.
Contrast
Adjusts the contrast between light and dark in the image to be printed.
Moving the slider to the right increases the contrast, moving the slider to the left decreases the
contrast.
You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50.
412
Print a pattern for color adjustment
When the color balance or intensity/contrast is changed, the pattern printing function prints a list of
the adjustment results along with the adjustment values.
Select this function when printing a pattern for color adjustment.
Parameters to Adjust
Select the item to be checked by pattern printing.
Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
Prints a pattern that allows you to check the cyan/magenta/yellow balance.
Important
• When Grayscale Printing is checked on the Main tab, Cyan/Magenta/Yellow appear
grayed out and are unavailable.
Intensity/Contrast
Prints a pattern that allows you to check the intensity/contrast balance.
Note
• Depending on the paper size selected on the Page Setup tab, there may be sizes that cannot
be selected.
Largest
Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 37
Intensity/Contrast 49
Large
Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 19
Intensity/Contrast 25
Small
Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 7
Intensity/Contrast 9
413
Color Variation Between Instances
Sets the amount of color change between neighboring patterns.
Select from Large, Medium, and Small. Large produces a large amount of change, and Small
produces a small amount of change.
Note
• Large is about double the size of Medium, and Small is about half the size of Medium.
Matching Tab
Allows you to select the method for adjusting colors to match the type of document to be printed.
Color Correction
Allows you to select Driver Matching, ICM (ICC Profile Matching), or None to match the purpose of
the print operation.
Important
• When Grayscale Printing is checked on the Main tab, Color Correction appears grayed out
and is unavailable.
Driver Matching
With Canon Digital Photo Color, you can print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer.
Important
• If the application software is set so that ICM is disabled, ICM (ICC Profile Matching) is
unavailable for Color Correction and the printer may not be able to print the image data
properly.
None
Disables color adjustment with the printer driver.
Input Profile
Specifies the input profile to be used when you select ICM (ICC Profile Matching) for Color
Correction.
Standard
The standard printer profile (sRGB), which supports the color space of ICM, is used. This is the
default setting.
Note
• In the XPS printer driver, ICM has become ICC Profile Matching.
Related Topics
Setting the Print Quality Level (Custom)
Adjusting Color Balance
414
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)
Adjusting Intensity/Contrast Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Printing with ICC Profiles
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
415
Page Setup tab Description
The Page Setup tab allows you to determine how a document is to be arranged on the paper. Also, this tab
allows you to set the number of copies and the order of printing. If the application which created the
document has a similar function, set them with the application.
Settings Preview
The paper illustration shows how the original will be laid out on a sheet of paper.
You can check an overall image of the layout.
Page Size
Selects a page size.
Ensure that you select the same page size as you selected within the application.
If you select Custom..., the Custom Paper Size dialog box opens and allows you to specify any
vertical and horizontal dimensions for the paper size.
Orientation
Selects the printing orientation.
If the application used to create your document has a similar function, select the same orientation that
you selected in that application.
Portrait
Prints the document so that its top and bottom positions are unchanged relative to the paper feed
direction. This is the default setting.
Landscape
Prints the document by rotating it 90 degrees relative to the paper feed direction.
You can change the rotation direction by going to the Maintenance tab, opening the Custom
Settings dialog box, and then using Rotate 90 degrees left when orientation is [Landscape]
check box.
To rotate the document 90 degrees to the left when printing, select the Rotate 90 degrees left
when orientation is [Landscape] check box.
416
Rotate 180 degrees
Prints the document by rotating it 180 degrees against the paper feed direction.
The width of print area and the amount of extension that are configured in other application software will
be reversed vertically and horizontally.
Page Layout
Selects the size of the document you want to print and the type of printing.
Normal-size
This is the normal printing method. Select this when you do not specify any page layout.
Automatically reduce large document that the printer cannot output
If the printer cannot print the paper size of a document, the printer can automatically reduce
the size when it prints the document.
Check this check box to reduce the size when printing the document.
Borderless
Chooses whether you are printing on a full page without any page margins or printing with page
margins.
In borderless printing, originals are enlarged to extend slightly off the paper. Thus, printing can be
performed without any margins (border).
Use Amount of Extension to adjust how much of the document extends off the paper during
borderless printing.
Amount of Extension
Adjusts how much of the document extends off the paper during borderless printing.
Moving the slider to the right increases the amount of extension and allows you to perform
borderless printing with no problems.
Moving the slider to the left reduces the amount of extension and expands the range of the
document to print.
Fit-to-Page
This function enables you to automatically enlarge or reduce documents to fit to the paper size
loaded in the printer without changing the paper size you specified in your application software.
Scaled
Documents can be enlarged or reduced to be printed.
Specify the size in Printer Paper Size, or enter the scaling ratio in the Scaling box.
Scaling
Specifies an enlargement or reduction ratio for the document you want to print.
Page Layout
Multiple pages of document can be printed on one sheet of paper.
Specify...
Opens the Page Layout Printing dialog box.
Click this button to set details on page layout printing.
417
Tiling/Poster
This function enables you to enlarge the image data and divide the enlarged data into several
pages to be printed. You can also glue together these sheets of paper to create large printed
matter, such as a poster.
Specify...
Opens the Tiling/Poster Printing dialog box.
Click this button to set details on tiling/poster printing.
Booklet
The booklet printing function allows you to print data for a booklet. Data is printed on both sides of
the paper. This type of printing ensures that pages can be collated properly, in page number order,
when the printed sheets are folded and stapled at the center.
Specify...
Opens the Booklet Printing dialog box.
Click this button to set details on booklet printing.
Stapling Side
Selects the stapling margin position.
The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings, and automatically selects the best
stapling margin position. Check Stapling Side, and select from the list to change it.
Specify Margin...
Opens the Specify Margin dialog box.
You can specify the width of the margin.
Copies
Specifies the number of copies you want to print. You can specify a value from 1 to 999.
Important
• If the application used to create your document has a similar function, specify the number of copies
with the application without specifying it here.
Collate
Check this check box to group together the pages of each copy when you want to print multiple copies.
Uncheck this check box when you want to print with all pages of the same page number grouped
together.
Important
• When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function, give
priority to the printer driver settings. However, if the print results are not acceptable, specify the
function settings on the application software. When you specify the number of copies and the
printing order with both the application and this printer driver, the number of copies may be
multiplied numbers of the two settings or the specified printing order may not be enabled.
418
Print Options...
Opens the Print Options dialog box.
Changes detailed printer driver settings for print data that is sent from applications.
Stamp/Background... (Stamp...)
Opens the Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box.
The Stamp function allows you to print a stamp text or a bitmap over or behind document data. It also
allows you to print date, time and user name. The Background function allows you to print a light
illustration behind the document data.
Note
• With the XPS printer driver, the Stamp/Background... button has become the Stamp... button and
only the stamp function can be used.
Depending on the type of printer driver you are using and the environment, Stamp and Background
may not be available.
Units
Select the unit for entering a user-defined paper size.
Paper Size
Specifies the Width and the Height of the custom paper. Measurement is shown according to the
units specified in Units.
Preview Icon
Shows the settings made on the Page Layout Printing dialog box.
You can check what the print result will look like before you actually print the data.
Pages
Specifies the number of document pages to fit on one sheet.
Page Order
Specifies the document orientation to be printed on a sheet of paper.
Page Border
Prints a page border line around each document page.
Check this check box to print the page border line.
419
Preview Icon
Shows the settings of the Tiling/Poster Printing dialog box.
You can check what the print result will look like.
Image Divisions
Select the number of divisions (vertical x horizontal).
As the number of divisions increases, the number of sheets used for printing increases. If you are
pasting pages together to create a poster, increasing the number of divisions allows you to create a
larger poster.
Preview Icon
Shows the settings made on the Booklet Printing dialog box.
You can check what the document will look like when printed as a booklet.
Margin
Specifies the width of the stapling margin.
The specified width becomes the stapling margin from the center of the sheet.
420
Page Border
Prints a page border line around each document page.
Check this check box to print the page border line.
Margin
Specifies the width of the stapling margin.
The width of the side specified by Stapling Side becomes the stapling margin.
Depending on the type of printer driver you are using and the environment, this function may not be
available.
Note
• Disable ICM required from the application software tab cannot be used with the XPS printer
driver.
Ungroup Papers
Sets the display method of Media Type, Page Size, and Printer Paper Size.
To display the items separately, select the check box.
To display the items as a group, clear the check box.
421
Do not allow application software to compress print data
Compression of the application software print data is prohibited.
If the print result has missing image data or unintended colors, selecting this check box may improve
the condition.
Important
• Uncheck this check box under normal circumstances.
Note
• Do not allow application software to compress print data tab cannot be used with the XPS
printer driver.
Note
• Scale images using nearest-neighbor interpolation can be used only with the XPS printer
driver.
Note
• Unit of Print Data Processing tab cannot be used with the XPS printer driver.
422
Stamp/Background (Stamp...) dialog box
The Stamp/Background (Stamp...) dialog box allows you to print a stamp and/or background over or
behind the document pages. In addition to the pre-registered ones, you can register and use your original
stamp or background.
Note
• With the XPS printer driver, the Stamp/Background... button has become the Stamp... button and
only the stamp function can be used.
Stamp
Stamp printing is a function that prints a stamp over a document.
Check this check box and select a title from the list to print a stamp.
Define Stamp...
Opens the Stamp Settings dialog box.
You can check the details of a selected stamp or save a new stamp.
Background
Background printing is a function that allows you to print an illustration or a similar object (bitmap)
behind the document.
Check this check box to print a background and select a title from the list.
Select Background...
Opens the Background Settings dialog box.
You can register a bitmap as a background, and change layout method and intensity of the selected
background.
423
Background first page only
Selects whether to print the background on the first page only or print on all pages when the
document has two or more pages.
Check the Background check box to enable this.
Check this check box to print a background on the first page only.
Stamp Tab
The Stamp tab allows you to set the text and bitmap file (.bmp) to be used for a stamp.
Preview Window
Shows the status of the stamp configured in each tab.
Stamp Type
Specifies the stamp type.
Select Text to create a stamp with characters. Select Bitmap to create with a bitmap file. Select
Date/Time/User Name to display the creation date/time and user name of the printed document.
The setting items in the Stamp tab change depending on the selected type.
When Stamp Type is Text or Date/Time/User Name
Stamp Text
Specifies the stamp text string.
Up to 64 characters can be entered.
For Date/Time/User Name, the creation date/time and user name of the printed object are
displayed in Stamp Text.
Important
• Stamp Text appears grayed out and is unavailable if Date/Time/User Name is selected.
TrueType Font
Selects the font for the stamp text string.
Style
Selects the font style for the stamp text string.
Size
Selects the font size for the stamp text string.
Outline
Selects a frame that encloses the stamp text string.
If a large font size is selected for Size, characters may extend outside of the stamp border.
Color/Select Color...
Shows the current color for the stamp.
To select a different color, click Select Color... to open the Color dialog box, and select or create a
color you wish to use as a stamp.
File
Specifies the name of the bitmap file to be used as the stamp.
Select File...
Opens the dialog box to open a file.
Click this button to select a bitmap file to be used as a stamp.
424
Size
Adjusts the size of the bitmap file to be used as a stamp.
Moving the slider to the right increases the size, moving the slider to the left decreases the size.
Note
• Click Defaults to set Stamp Type to text, Stamp Text to blank, TrueType Font to Arial, Style to
Regular, Size to 36 points, Outline unchecked, and Color to gray with the RGB values (192, 192,
192).
Placement Tab
The Placement tab allows you to set the position where the stamp is to be printed.
Preview Window
Shows the status of the stamp configured in each tab.
Position
Specifies the stamp position on the page.
Selecting Custom from the list allows you to enter values for the X-Position and Y-Position
coordinates directly.
Orientation
Specifies the angle of rotation for the stamp. The angle can be set by entering the number of
degrees.
Negative values rotate the stamp clockwise.
Note
• Orientation is enabled only when Text or Date/Time/User Name is selected for Stamp Type
on the Stamp tab.
Note
• Click Defaults to set the stamp position to Center and the orientation to 0.
Title
Enter the title to save the stamp you created.
Up to 64 characters can be entered.
Note
• Spaces, tabs, and returns cannot be entered at the beginning or end of a title.
Stamps
Shows a list of saved stamp titles.
Specify a title to display the corresponding stamp in Title.
Save/Save overwrite
Saves the stamp.
Enter a title in Title, and then click this button.
425
Delete
Deletes an unnecessary stamp.
Specify the title of an unnecessary stamp from the Stamps list, and click this button.
Background Tab
The Background tab allows you to select a bitmap file (.bmp) to be used as a background or determine
how to print the selected background.
Preview Window
Shows the status of the bitmap set on the Background tab.
File
Specifies the name of the bitmap file to be used as the background.
Select File...
Opens the dialog box to open a file.
Click this button to select a bitmap file (.bmp) to be used as the background.
Layout Method
Specifies how the background image is to be placed on the paper.
When Custom is selected, you can set coordinates for X-Position and Y-Position.
Intensity
Adjusts the intensity of the bitmap to be used as a background.
Moving the slider to the right increases the intensity, and moving the slider to the left decreases the
intensity. To print the background at the original bitmap intensity, move the slider to the rightmost
position.
Note
• Depending on the type of printer driver you are using and the environment, this function may not be
available.
• Click Defaults to set File to blank, Layout Method to Fill page, and the Intensity slider to the
middle.
Title
Enter the title to save the background image you specified.
Up to 64 characters can be entered.
Note
• Spaces, tabs, and returns cannot be entered at the beginning or end of a title.
Backgrounds
Shows a list of registered background titles.
Specify a title to display the corresponding background in Title.
Save/Save overwrite
Saves the image data as a background.
After inserting the Title, click this button.
426
Delete
Deletes an unnecessary background.
Specify the title of an unnecessary background from the Backgrounds list, and then click this
button.
427
Maintenance tab Description
The Maintenance tab allows you to perform printer maintenance or change the settings of the printer.
Cleaning
Performs print head cleaning.
Print head cleaning removes any blockage in the print head nozzles.
Perform cleaning when printing becomes faint, or a specific color fails to print, even though all ink levels
are sufficiently high.
Deep Cleaning
Performs deep cleaning.
Perform deep cleaning when two cleaning attempts do not resolve the print head problem.
Note
• Deep Cleaning consumes a larger amount of ink than Cleaning.
Cleaning the print heads frequently will rapidly deplete your printer's ink supply. Therefore, perform
cleaning only when necessary.
Ink Group
When you click Cleaning or Deep Cleaning, the Ink Group window is displayed.
Selects the ink group that you want to clean the print head for.
Click Initial Check Items to display the items that you need to check before you execute cleaning
or deep cleaning.
428
Align the print head immediately after installing the print head.
When you click Print Head Alignment, the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box is displayed.
Nozzle Check
Prints a nozzle check pattern.
Perform this function if printing becomes faint or a specific color fails to print. Print a nozzle check
pattern, and check whether the print head is working properly.
If the print result for a specific color is fainted, or if there are any unprinted sections, click Cleaning to
clean the print head.
To display a list of items that you should check before printing the nozzle check pattern, click Initial
Check Items.
Print Check Pattern
This function prints a pattern that allows you to check whether the any of the ink nozzles are
clogged.
Click Print Check Pattern. When the confirmation message is displayed, click OK. The Pattern
Check dialog box is then displayed.
Left-side bitmap (good)
The print head nozzles are not clogged.
Exit
Closes the Pattern Check dialog box, and returns to the Maintenance tab.
Cleaning
Performs print head cleaning.
Print head cleaning removes any blockage in the print head nozzles.
Perform cleaning when printing becomes faint, or if a specific color fails to print, even though
all ink levels are sufficiently high.
Power Off
Turns off the printer from the printer driver.
Perform this function to turn off the printer when you cannot press the ON button (POWER button) on
the printer because the printer is out of your reach.
You must press the ON button (POWER button) on the printer to turn the printer on again after clicking
this button. When you use this function, you will not be able to turn the printer on from the printer driver.
Auto Power
Opens the Auto Power Settings dialog box.
Specify settings for operating the printer power automatically. Perform this function if you want to
change the auto power settings.
429
Note
• If the printer is off or if communication between the printer and the computer is disabled, an error
message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status.
If this happens, click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer.
Quiet Settings
Opens the Quiet Settings dialog box.
Quiet Settings dialog box allows you to specify a setting that reduces the operating noise of the printer.
This mode comes in handy when the operating noise of the printer becomes a concern, such when
printing at night. Perform this operation when you want to change the quiet mode setting.
Note
• If the printer is off or if communication between the printer and the computer is disabled, an error
message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status.
Custom Settings
Opens the Custom Settings dialog box.
Perform this function to change the settings of this printer.
Note
• If the printer is off or if communication between the printer and the computer is disabled, an error
message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status.
If this happens, click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer.
About
Opens the About dialog box.
The version of the printer driver, plus a copyright notice, can be checked.
In addition, the language to be used can be switched.
430
• Make sure that you push in the ink cartridge completely until you hear a clicking sound.
• If an orange tape is adhered to the ink cartridge, peel it off completely.
Any remaining tape will hinder ink output.
• Check that the ink cartridges are installed in their correct positions.
Preview Window
Displays the pattern of Print Head Alignment, and checks the position of the selected pattern.
You can also change the setting by clicking the pattern on the screen directly.
Note
• If you do not know how to analyze the printed pattern, see Aligning the Print Head Position from
Your Computer.
431
according to an intended use.
When one of the FINE cartridges becomes empty and cannot be replaced immediately by a new one, you
can specify the other FINE cartridge that still has ink and continue printing.
Ink Cartridge
Selects the FINE cartridge you use for printing.
Color Only
Uses the color FINE cartridge only.
Black Only
Uses the black FINE cartridge only.
Important
• When the following settings are specified, Black Only does not function because the printer
uses the color FINE cartridge to print documents.
• Other than Plain Paper, or Envelope is selected for Media Type on the Main tab
• Borderless is selected from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab
• Do not detach the FINE cartridge that is not in use. Printing cannot be performed while either
FINE cartridge is detached.
432
Use quiet mode during specified hours
Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer during a specified period
of time.
Set the Start time and the End time of the quiet mode you wish to be activated. If both are set to the
same time, the quiet mode will not function.
Important
• You can set the quiet mode from the operation panel of the printer, the printer driver, or ScanGear
(scanner driver).
No matter how you use to set the quiet mode, the mode is applied when you perform operations from
the operation panel of the printer or printing and scanning from the computer.
433
About dialog box
When you click About, the About dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box displays the version, copyright, and module list of the printer driver. You can select the
language to be used and switch the language displayed in the setup window.
Modules
Lists the printer driver modules.
Language
Specifies the language you wish to use in the printer driver setup window.
Important
• If the font for displaying the language of your choice is not installed in your system, the
characters will be garbled.
Related Topics
Cleaning the Print Heads from Your Computer
Aligning the Print Head Position from Your Computer
Use Your Computer to Print a Nozzle Check Pattern
Setting the Ink Cartridge to be Used
Managing the Printer Power
Reducing the Printer Noise
Changing the Printer Operation Mode
434
Canon IJ Preview Description
Canon IJ Preview is an application software that displays what the print result will look like before a
document is actually printed.
The preview reflects the information that is set within the printer driver and allows you to check the
document layout, print order, and number of pages. You can also change the media type and paper source
settings.
When you want to display a preview before printing, open the printer driver setup window, and check the
Preview before printing check box on the Main tab.
File Menu
Selects the print operation.
Start Printing
Ends the Canon IJ Preview and then starts printing the document that is displayed on the preview
screen.
This command has the same function as the Start Printing on the toolbar.
Cancel Printing
Ends the Canon IJ Preview and cancels the printing of the document that is displayed on the
preview screen.
This command has the same function as the Cancel Printing on the toolbar.
Exit
Ends the Canon IJ Preview.
Page Menu
This menu includes the following commands to select page to be displayed.
All of these commands except Page Selection... can also be selected from the toolbar.
Note
• If the pages are being spooled, the last spooled page becomes the last page.
• If the Page Layout setting on the Page Setup tab is specified to Page Layout, Tiling/Poster, or
Booklet, the number of pages is the number of sheets to be used for printing, and not the number
of pages in the original document created with the application software.
435
• If duplex printing manually has been set, the front pages which will be printed first are all displayed
together, and then the back pages are displayed.
First Page
Displays the first page of the document.
If the currently displayed page is the first page, this command is grayed out and cannot be
selected.
Previous Page
Displays the page located before the currently displayed page.
If the currently displayed page is the first page, this command is grayed out and cannot be
selected.
Next Page
Displays the page located after the currently displayed page.
If the currently displayed page is the last page, this command is grayed out and cannot be
selected.
Last Page
Displays the last page of the document.
If the currently displayed page is the last page, this command is grayed out and cannot be
selected.
Page Selection...
Displays the Page Selection dialog box.
This command allows you to specify the page number of the page to be displayed.
Zoom Menu
Selects the ratio of the actual size printed on the paper to the preview display size.
You can also select the ratio from the drop-down list box located on the toolbar.
Whole
Displays the entire page of data as one page.
50%
Reduces the displayed data to 50% of the actual size to be printed.
100%
Displays the data at the actual size to be printed.
200%
Enlarges the displayed data to 200% of the actual size to be printed.
400%
Enlarges the displayed data to 400% of the actual size to be printed.
Option Menu
This menu includes the following command:
Displays Print Page Information
Displays print setup information (including printer paper size, media type, and page layout) for each
page at the left side of the preview screen.
This screen also allows you to change the media type and paper source settings.
Help Menu
When you select this menu item, the Help window for Canon IJ Preview is displayed, and you can
check the version and copyright information.
436
Start Printing button
Prints the documents selected in the document list.
The printed documents are deleted from the list, and when all documents are printed, the Canon IJ XPS
Preview closes.
Media Type
You can select the media type of the document to be printed.
Paper Source
You can select the paper source of the document to be printed.
Page Layout
Displays the page layout of the document to be printed.
437
Canon IJ XPS Preview Description
Canon IJ XPS Preview is an application software that displays what the print result will look like before a
document is actually printed.
The preview reflects the information which is set within the printer driver and allows you to check the
document layout, print order, and number of pages. The preview also allows you to edit the print document,
edit the print pages, change the print settings, and perform other functions.
When you want to display a preview before printing, open the printer driver setup window, and check the
Preview before printing check box on the Main tab.
Important
• To use the Canon IJ XPS Preview, you must have Microsoft .NET Framework 4 Client Profile installed
on your computer.
File Menu
Selects print operation and print history settings:
Print
Prints the documents selected in the document list.
The printed documents are deleted from the list, and when all documents are printed, the Canon IJ
XPS Preview closes.
This command has the same function as (Print) on the toolbar and the Print in the print
settings area.
438
Important
• If the limit on the number of registration is exceeded, the print history registrations are deleted
starting from the oldest one.
Exit
Ends the Canon IJ XPS Preview. The documents remaining in the document list will be deleted
from the list.
This command has the same function as the Exit in the print settings area.
Edit Menu
Selects the method for editing multiple documents or pages.
Undo
Reverses the previous change.
If the change cannot be reversed, this function is grayed out and cannot be selected.
This command has the same function as the (Undo) on the toolbar.
Documents
Selects the method for editing print documents.
Combine Documents
Combines the documents selected in the document list into one document.
If only one document is selected, this command is grayed out and cannot be selected.
This command has the same function as the (Combine Documents) on the toolbar.
Reset Documents
Returns the document selected in the document list to their status before they were added to
the Canon IJ XPS Preview.
The combined documents are separated, and the original documents are restored.
This command has the same function as the (Reset Documents) on the toolbar.
Move Document
Use the following command to change the order of the documents selected in the document
list.
Move to First
Moves the selected print document to the beginning of the document list.
If the currently selected document is the first document, this command is grayed out and
cannot be selected.
Move Up One
Moves the selected print document one up from its current position.
If the currently selected document is the first document, this command is grayed out and
cannot be selected.
Move to Last
Moves the selected print document to the end of the document list.
If the currently selected document is the last document, this command is grayed out and
cannot be selected.
439
Delete Document
Deletes the selected document from the document list.
If the document list contains only one document, the document is grayed out and cannot be
selected.
This command has the same function as the (Delete Document) on the toolbar.
Grayscale Printing
Allows you to change the monochrome print settings.
This command has the same functionality as the Grayscale Printing check box in the print
settings area.
Copies...
Opens the Copies dialog box.
This dialog box allows you to set Copies, Collate, and Print from Last Page.
Pages
Selects the method for editing print pages.
Delete Page
Deletes the currently selected page.
If page layout printing is set, the pages enclosed with red frame will be deleted.
This command has the same function as the (Delete Page) on the toolbar.
Restore Page
Restores pages that were deleted with the Delete Page function.
To restore pages, you must select the View Deleted Pages check box on the Option menu
and display the deleted pages as thumbnails.
Move Page
Use the following command to change the order of the currently selected pages.
Move to First
Moves the currently selected page to the beginning of the document.
If the currently selected page is the first page, this command is grayed out and cannot be
selected.
440
Move to Last
Moves the currently selected page to the end of the document.
If the currently selected page is the last page, this command is grayed out and cannot be
selected.
View Menu
Selects the documents and pages to be displayed.
Documents
Use the following command to select the document to display.
First Document
Displays the first document in the document list.
If the currently selected document is the first document, this command is grayed out and
cannot be selected.
Previous Document
Displays the document located before the currently displayed document.
If the currently selected document is the first document, this command is grayed out and
cannot be selected.
Next Document
Displays the document located after the currently displayed document.
If the currently selected document is the last document, this command is grayed out and
cannot be selected.
Last Document
Displays the last document in the document list.
If the currently selected document is the last document, this command is grayed out and
cannot be selected.
Pages
Use the following command to select the page to be displayed.
Note
• If the Page Layout setting in the printer driver is specified to Tiling/Poster, or Booklet, the
number of pages is the number of sheets to be used for printing, and not the number of pages
in the original document created with the application software.
First Page
Displays the first page of the document.
If the currently displayed page is the first page, this command is grayed out and cannot be
selected.
Previous Page
Displays the page located before the currently displayed page.
If the currently displayed page is the first page, this command is grayed out and cannot be
selected.
Next Page
Displays the page located after the currently displayed page.
If the currently displayed page is the last page, this command is grayed out and cannot be
selected.
Last Page
Displays the last page of the document.
If the currently displayed page is the last page, this command is grayed out and cannot be
selected.
441
Page Selection...
Displays the Page Selection dialog box.
This command allows you to specify the page number of the page to be displayed.
Zoom Menu
Selects the ratio of the actual size printed on the paper to the preview display size.
You can also select the ratio from the drop-down list box located on the toolbar.
Whole
Displays the entire page of data as one page.
50%
Reduces the displayed data to 50% of the actual size to be printed.
100%
Displays the data at the actual size to be printed.
200%
Enlarges the displayed data to 200% of the actual size to be printed.
400%
Enlarges the displayed data to 400% of the actual size to be printed.
Option Menu
Toggles the show / hide status of the following information.
View Thumbnails
Reduces all pages in the document selected in the document list and displays them at the bottom
of the preview window.
This command has the same function as the (View Thumbnails) on the toolbar.
Help Menu
When you select this menu item, the Help window for Canon IJ XPS Preview is displayed, and you can
check the version and copyright information.
(Print)
Prints the documents selected in the document list.
The printed documents are deleted from the list, and when all documents are printed, the Canon IJ XPS
Preview closes.
442
(Combine Documents)
Combines the documents selected in the document list into one document.
If only one document is selected, this command is grayed out and cannot be selected.
(Delete Document)
Deletes the selected document from the document list.
If the document list contains only one document, the document is grayed out and cannot be selected.
(Reset Documents)
Returns the document selected in the document list to their status before they were added to the Canon
IJ XPS Preview.
The combined documents are separated, and the original documents are restored.
(View Thumbnails)
Reduces all pages in the document selected in the document list and displays them at the bottom of the
preview window.
To hide the print pages, click View Thumbnails again.
(Move to First)
Moves the selected print document to the beginning of the document list.
If the currently selected document is the first document, this command is grayed out and cannot be
selected.
(Move Up One)
Moves the selected print document one up from its current position.
If the currently selected document is the first document, this command is grayed out and cannot be
selected.
(Move to Last)
Moves the selected print document to the end of the document list.
If the currently selected document is the last document, this command is grayed out and cannot be
selected.
(Undo)
Reverses the previous change.
If the change cannot be reversed, this function is grayed out and cannot be selected.
(Delete Page)
Deletes the currently selected page.
If page layout printing is set, the pages enclosed with red frame will be deleted.
Document list
Displays the list of the print documents.
The document selected in the document list becomes the target for preview display and editing.
Document Name
Displays the name of the print document.
If you click the name of the selected print document, a text box is displayed, and you can rename
the document to any name.
443
Pages
Displays the number of pages in the print document.
Important
• The number displayed in Pages and the output page count are different.
• To check the output page count, check the status bar at the bottom of the preview window.
Status
Displays the status of the print documents.
Documents that are undergoing data processing are displayed as Processing data.
Important
• Documents showing Processing data cannot be printed or edited.
Wait until the data processing ends.
Media Type
Allows you to select the media type of the document to be printed.
Paper Source
Allows you to select the paper source of the document to be printed.
Page Layout
Displays the page layout of the document to be printed.
Layout tab
You can specify settings for page layout printing.
To apply the specified settings, click Apply.
If the page layout print settings cannot be changed for the print document, the individual items are
grayed out and cannot be selected.
444
Important
• When Grayscale Printing is checked, Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow appear grayed out
and are unavailable.
Brightness
Selects the brightness of your print.
Pure white and black will not change, but colors between white and black will change.
Intensity
Adjusts the overall intensity of your print.
Moving the slider to the right increases the intensity, and moving the slider to the left
decreases the intensity.
You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to
50.
Contrast
Adjusts the contrast between light and dark in the image to be printed.
Moving the slider to the right increases the contrast, moving the slider to the left decreases the
contrast.
You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to
50.
Defaults
Restores all the settings you have changed to their default values.
Clicking this button restores all the settings on this tab to their default values (factory settings).
Grayscale Printing
Allows you to change the monochrome print settings.
Copies
Specifies the number of copies you want to print. You can specify a value from 1 to 999.
If the numbers of copies cannot be changed for the print document, this item is grayed out and is
unavailable.
Exit
Ends the Canon IJ XPS Preview.
The documents remaining in the document list will be deleted from the list.
Print
Prints the documents selected in the document list.
The printed documents are deleted from the list, and when all documents are printed, the Canon IJ
XPS Preview closes.
445
Canon IJ Status Monitor Description
The Canon IJ Status Monitor displays the status of the printer and the printing progress. The monitor uses
graphics, icons, and messages to let you know the printer status.
Printer
Canon IJ Status Monitor shows an icon when a warning or error occurs to the printer.
: Indicates that a warning (operator call error) has occurred or the printer is working.
: There has been an error which requires a service.
FINE cartridge
Canon IJ Status Monitor shows an icon when a low ink warning or a no ink error occurs.
In addition, this function displays graphics showing the estimated ink levels of the FINE cartridge.
In this case, click the graphics to open the Ink Details dialog box. You can check the detail
information such as the remaining ink level and the FINE cartridge types for your printer.
Document Name
Shows the name of the document to be printed.
Owner
Shows the owner's name of the document to be printed.
Printing Page
Shows the number of printing page and total printing pages.
446
Display Print Queue
Shows the print window used to manage the print job that is being printed or being in the print
queue.
Cancel Printing
Cancels the current print job.
Important
• The Cancel Printing button is enabled only while print data is being sent to the printer.
Once the print data has been sent, the button is grayed out and becomes unavailable.
Option Menu
If you select Enable Status Monitor, when a printer related message is generated the Canon IJ
Status Monitor starts.
When Enable Status Monitor is selected, following commands are available.
Always Display Current Job
Displays the Canon IJ Status Monitor during printing.
Close
Closes the Ink Details dialog box to return to Canon IJ Status Monitor.
Help Menu
When you select this menu item, the Help window for Canon IJ Status Monitor is displayed, and
you can check the version and copyright information.
447
Updating the MP Drivers
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
Before Installing the MP Drivers
Installing the MP Drivers
448
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
The MP Drivers include a printer driver, ScanGear (scanner driver), and fax driver.
By updating the MP Drivers to the latest version of the MP Drivers, unresolved problems may be solved.
You can access our website and download the latest MP Drivers for your model.
Important
• You can download the MP Drivers for free, but any Internet access charges incurred are your
responsibility.
• Before installing the latest MP Drivers, delete the previously installed version.
Related Topics
Before Installing the MP Drivers
Installing the MP Drivers
449
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
The MP Drivers which you no longer use can be deleted.
When deleting the MP Drivers, first exit all programs that are running.
Important
• In Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box
may appear when starting, installing or uninstalling software.
This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.
When you are logged on to an administrator account, click Yes (or Continue, Allow) to continue.
Some applications require an administrator account to continue. In such cases, switch to an
administrator account, and restart the operation from the beginning.
Important
• Printer driver, XPS printer driver, ScanGear (scanner driver), and fax driver will be deleted when you
uninstall the MP Drivers.
450
Before Installing the MP Drivers
This section describes the items that you should check before installing the MP Drivers. You should also
refer to this section if the MP Drivers cannot be installed.
Important
• Before installing the latest MP Drivers, delete the previously installed version.
Related Topics
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
Installing the MP Drivers
451
Installing the MP Drivers
You can access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers and XPS printer driver
for your model.
Important
• In Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box
may appear when starting, installing or uninstalling software.
This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.
When you are logged on to an administrator account, click Yes (or Continue, Allow) to continue.
Some applications require an administrator account to continue. In such cases, switch to an
administrator account, and restart the operation from the beginning.
Depending on the environment you are using, a message prompting you to restart the computer may be
displayed. To complete the installation properly, restart the computer.
Important
• You can install the XPS printer driver with the same procedure for installing the MP Drivers. However,
when installing the XPS printer driver, first complete installation of the MP Drivers.
• You can download the MP Drivers and XPS printer driver for free, but any Internet access charges
incurred are your responsibility.
• Before installing the latest MP Drivers, delete the previously installed version.
Related Topics
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
Before Installing the MP Drivers
452
Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper
453
Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper
You can print a template form such as lined paper, graph paper, or checklist, etc. on A4, B5, or Letter-sized
plain paper.
• Notebook paper
Note
• You cannot print Notebook paper on B5 sized paper.
• Graph paper
Note
• You cannot print Graph paper on B5 sized paper.
• Checklist
Checklist
454
• Staff paper
• Handwriting paper
Handwriting paper
• Weekly schedule
Weekly schedule
• Monthly schedule
Monthly schedule
4. Use the button to select Template print, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select the template you want to print, then press the OK button.
Printable template forms
455
6. Use the button to specify the paper size, then press the OK button.
Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
7. Make sure that Plain paper is selected, then press the OK button.
8. Use the (-) (+) button or the Numeric buttons to specify the number of copies.
Note
• You can also press the Color button or Black button to start printing.
456
Paper setting for Printing
By registering the paper size and the media type loaded in the cassette, you can prevent the machine from
misprinting by displaying the message before printing starts when the paper size or the media type of the
loaded paper differs from the print settings.
Register the paper size and the media type according to the loaded paper.
Press the OK button, then register the paper size and the media type according to the loaded paper.
Important
• For details on the proper combination of paper settings you can specify by the printer driver or on
the LCD:
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
• For copying, specify the paper settings for copying so that they match the cassette paper
information.
Note
• Depending on the registered cassette paper information, the screen to confirm if you apply the
registered information to the paper settings for copying is displayed. If you select Yes, the
information is applied to the paper settings for copying.
• When the paper settings for printing or copying are different from the cassette paper information
registered to the machine:
Ex:
457
When you start printing or copying, a message is displayed.
Confirm the message, then press the OK button. When the screen to select the operation is displayed,
select one of the operations below.
Note
• Depending on the setting, the choices below may not be displayed.
For example, when the paper setting for printing or copying is B5 and the cassette paper
information registered to the machine is A4, the machine starts printing or copying with B5 on the
paper loaded in the cassette.
For example, when the paper setting for printing or copying is B5 and the cassette paper
information registered to the machine is A4, you load B5 sized paper in the cassette before you
start printing or copying.
The cassette paper information registration screen is displayed after replacing the paper and
inserting the cassette. Register the cassette paper information according to the paper you loaded in
the cassette.
Note
• If you do not know what paper information to register to the machine, press the Back button when
the screen to select the operation is displayed. When the previous screen is displayed, confirm the
paper size and the media type, then register them to the machine.
• For details on the proper combination of paper settings you can specify by the printer driver or on
the LCD:
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)
Cancel
Cancels printing.
458
Select when you change the paper settings specified for printing or copying. Change the paper
settings, then try printing again.
Important
• About the default setting for displaying the message which prevents misprinting:
The default setting is different between when you print or copy from the operation panel of the
machine and when you print using the printer driver.
• When you print or copy from the operation panel of the machine, the message which prevents
misprinting is enabled by default.
To change the setting for printing or copying using the operation panel of the machine:
Cassette settings
• When you print using the printer driver, the message which prevents misprinting is disabled by
default.
To change the setting for printing using the printer driver:
The machine starts printing or copying even though the paper settings for printing or copying and
the cassette paper information registered to the machine are different.
459
Copying
460
Making Copies
This section describes the basic procedure to perform standard copying.
2. Load paper.
1. Magnification
2. Page size
Note
• To change or confirm the page size, magnification, or other settings, press the Menu button, then
use the button to display the desired setting item.
6. Use the (-) (+) button or the Numeric buttons to specify the number of copies.
7. Press the Color button for color copying, or the Black button for black & white copying.
The machine starts copying.
Remove the original on the platen glass or from the document output slot after copying is complete.
Important
• If you load the original on the platen glass, do not open the document cover or remove the original
while Scanning... is displayed on the screen.
• If you load the original in the ADF, do not move the original until copying is complete.
Note
• To cancel copying, press the Stop button.
• If you load the original on the platen glass, you can add the copying job while printing.
461
Adding the Copying Job (Reserve copy)
Load the original on the platen glass and press the same button (the Color button or the Black button) as
the one which you previously pressed.
Important
• When you load the original on the platen glass, move the document cover gently.
Note
• When Print quality is set High, or you load the original in the ADF, you cannot add the copying job.
• When you add the copying job, the number of copies or the settings such as the page size or media
type cannot be changed.
• If you press the Stop button while reserve copying is in progress, the screen to select the method to
cancel copying is displayed. If you select Cancel all reserv. then press the OK button, you can
cancel copying all scanned data. If you select Cancel last reserv., then press the OK button, you
can cancel the last copying job.
• If you set a document of too many pages to reserve copy, Memory is full may appears on the LCD.
Press the OK button and wait a while, then try copying again.
• If Try again appears on the LCD when scanning, press the OK button, then press the Stop button to
cancel copying. After that, copy the documents that have not been finished copying.
462
Setting Items for Copying
You can change the copy settings such as the page size, media type, and intensity.
Press the Menu button, use the button to select a setting item, then press the OK button.
Use the button to adjust each setting item, then press the OK button. The next setting item is
displayed.
The LCD returns to the Copy standby screen when all the settings are complete.
Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
• Some settings cannot be specified in combination with the setting of other setting items or the copy
menu.
• The settings of the page size, media type, etc. are retained even if the machine is turned off.
• Enlarge/Reduce
Ex:
Note
• This setting item is displayed under the following conditions.
• Copy intensity
Ex:
Note
• If you select Auto adjust, load the original on the platen glass.
• If you select Manual adjust, use the button to decrease the intensity or the button to
increase it.
• Page size
Ex:
463
Note
• Some of setting items are not available depending on the country or region of purchase.
• Media type
Ex:
• Print quality
Select the print quality according to the original.
Ex:
Note
• If you use Draft with the media type set to Plain paper and the quality is not as good as expected,
select Standard or High and try copying again.
• Select High to copy in grayscale. Grayscale renders tones in a range of grays instead of black or
white.
• 4-on-1 layout
Select the layout when copying four original pages onto a single sheet of paper by reducing each image.
Four different layouts are available.
Ex:
Note
• This setting item is displayed only when 4-on-1 copy is selected for Special copy.
• Collate
Select whether to obtain sorted printouts when making multiple copies of a multi-paged original.
Ex:
Note
• This setting item is displayed when standard copying is selected.
464
Reducing or Enlarging a Copy
You can specify the magnification optionally or select the preset-ratio copying or fit-to-page copying.
In the copy mode, press the Menu button, use the button to select Enlarge/Reduce, then press the
OK button.
Use the button to select the reduction/enlargement method, then press the OK button.
Ex:
Note
• Some of the reduction/enlargement methods are not available depending on the copy menu.
• Preset ratio
You can select one of the preset ratios to reduce or enlarge copies.
Use the button to select a preset ratio to match the size of your original document and printing
paper, then press the OK button.
• Magnification
You can specify the copy ratio as a percentage to reduce or enlarge copies.
Use the (-) (+) button or the Numeric buttons to specify the reduction or enlargement ratio (25 -
400%), then press the OK button.
Note
• Press and hold the (-) (+) button to quickly advance through the ratios. For details, see Key
repeat.
• Fit to page
The machine automatically reduces or enlarges the image to fit the page size.
Note
• When you select Fit to page, the size of your original document may not be detected correctly
depending on the original. In this case, select Preset ratio or Magnification.
• When Fit to page is selected, load the original on the platen glass.
465
About Special copy Menu
The following menus are selectable in the Special copy menu.
When copying thick originals such as books, you can make a copy without black margins around the
image and gutter shadows.
• Borderless copy
You can copy images so that they fill the entire page without borders.
• 2-on-1 copy
You can copy two original pages onto a single sheet of paper by reducing each image.
• 4-on-1 copy
You can copy four original pages onto a single sheet of paper by reducing each image.
Note
• In addition to the copying method in the Special copy menu, the methods below are available.
• You can specify the magnification optionally or select the preset-ratio copying or fit-to-page
copying.
Collated Copying
466
Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page
You can copy two original pages or a two sided page onto a single sheet of paper by reducing each image.
2. Load paper.
5. Use the button to select Special copy, then press the OK button.
6. Use the button to select 2-on-1 copy, then press the OK button.
If a page size setting or a media type setting that cannot be used in 2-on-1 copying is selected, the LCD
displays the following message.
1. Use the button to select the page size, then press the OK button.
2. Use the button to select the media type, then press the OK button.
8. Use the (-) (+) button or the Numeric buttons to specify the number of copies.
Change the print settings as necessary.
9. Press the Color button for color copying, or the Black button for black & white copying.
• When the document has been loaded on the platen glass:
When the machine finishes scanning the first page, the message below is displayed.
If you have the next page to scan, load it on the platen glass and press the OK button. The
machine starts copying.
467
If you do not need more scanning, press the Tone button to start copying. The machine starts
copying.
Note
• You can add the copying job while printing.
The machine starts scanning the next sheet of document automatically after one sheet of
document finishes being scanned.
Note
• If Memory is full appears on the LCD when scanning, set the print quality to Standard or reduce the
number of sheets of documents, then try copying again. If the problem is not resolved, set the print
quality to Draft and try copying again.
468
Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page
You can copy four original pages onto a single sheet of paper by reducing each image. Four different
layouts are available.
2. Load paper.
5. Use the button to select Special copy, then press the OK button.
6. Use the button to select 4-on-1 copy, then press the OK button.
If a page size setting or a media type setting that cannot be used in 4-on-1 copying is selected, the LCD
displays the following message.
469
1. Use the button to select the page size, then press the OK button.
2. Use the button to select the media type, then press the OK button.
Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
9. Use the (-) (+) button or the Numeric buttons to specify the number of copies.
10. Press the Color button for color copying, or the Black button for black & white copying.
• When the document has been loaded on the platen glass:
When the machine finishes scanning the first to the third page, the message below is displayed.
If you have the next page to scan, load it on the platen glass and press the OK button. The
machine starts copying.
If you do not need more scanning, press the Tone button to start copying. The machine starts
copying.
Note
• You can add the copying job while printing.
The machine starts scanning the next page automatically after a page finishes being scanned.
Note
• If Memory is full appears on the LCD when scanning, set the print quality to Standard or reduce the
number of sheets of documents, then try copying again. If the problem is not resolved, set the print
quality to Draft and try copying again.
470
Copying Thick Originals Such as Books
When copying thick originals such as books, you can make a copy without black margins around the image
and gutter shadows. Using this function, you can reduce unnecessary ink consumption.
2. Load paper.
5. Use the button to select Special copy, then press the OK button.
6. Use the button to select Frame erase copy, then press the OK button.
Note
• When you use this function, load the original on the platen glass.
8. Use the (-) (+) button or the Numeric buttons to specify the number of copies.
Change the print settings as necessary.
9. Press the Color button for color copying, or the Black button for black & white copying.
The machine starts copying.
Note
• Close the document cover.
• There may be a narrow black margin that appears around the image. This function removes the dark
margins only. If a scanned book is too thin or when the machine is used near a window or in a bright
environment, a faint black frame may remain. Also, if the color of an original is dark, the machine cannot
distinguish the document color from the shadow and this may cause slight cropping or a shadow on the
crease.
471
Copying without Borders
You can copy images so that they fill the entire page without borders.
5. Use the button to select Special copy, then press the OK button.
6. Use the button to select Borderless copy, then press the OK button.
If a page size setting or a media type setting that cannot be used in borderless copying is selected, the
LCD displays the following message.
1. Use the button to select the page size, then press the OK button.
2. Use the button to select the media type, then press the OK button.
Note
• When you use this function, load the original on the platen glass.
8. Use the (-) (+) button or the Numeric buttons to specify the number of copies.
Change the print settings as necessary.
9. Press the Color button for color copying, or the Black button for black & white copying.
The machine starts borderless copying.
472
Note
• Slight cropping may occur at the edges since the copied image is enlarged to fill the whole page. You
can change the width to be cropped from the borders of the original image as needed. However, the
cropped area will be larger if the extension amount is large.
For details:
• For details on the paper size and the media type available for borderless copying:
Printing Area
473
Collated Copying
When you select ON for Collate on Copy menu, you can obtain sorted printouts when making multiple
copies of a multi-paged original. In addition, you can copy originals on both sides of paper.
• When ON is selected:
Note
• When you use this function, load the original in the ADF.
• The number of pages the machine can read varies with the original. If Memory is full appears on the
LCD when scanning, reduce the number of original pages to scan and try copying again.
474
Scanning
475
Scanning from a Computer
Scanning with IJ Scan Utility
Scanning with Application Software that You are Using (ScanGear)
Useful Information on Scanning
IJ Network Scanner Selector EX Menu and Setting Screen
Other Scanning Methods
Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)
476
Scanning with IJ Scan Utility
What Is IJ Scan Utility (Scanner Software)?
Starting IJ Scan Utility
Easy Scanning with Auto Scan Basic
Scanning Documents
Scanning Photos
Scanning with Favorite Settings
Scanning Items Larger than the Platen (Image Stitch)
Scanning Multiple Items at One Time
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time from the ADF (Auto Document
Feeder)
Saving after Checking Scan Results
Sending Scanned Images via E-mail
Extracting Text from Scanned Images (OCR)
IJ Scan Utility Screens
477
What Is IJ Scan Utility (Scanner Software)?
IJ Scan Utility is an application that allows you to easily scan documents, photos, etc.
You can complete from scanning to saving at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon in the IJ
Scan Utility main screen.
Note
• Refer to "IJ Scan Utility Main Screen" for details on the IJ Scan Utility main screen.
Note
• The default save folders are as follows.
478
Important
• Some functions are available only when My Image Garden is installed.
Note
• Refer to "Settings Dialog Box" for how to set the applications to integrate with.
479
Starting IJ Scan Utility
Note
• If you have more than one scanner or have changed the connection from USB connection to network
connection, set up the network environment from IJ Scan Utility.
Windows 8.1/Windows 8:
If IJ Scan Utility is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for "IJ Scan
Utility".
From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Scan Utility > IJ Scan Utility to start IJ
Scan Utility.
480
Easy Scanning with Auto Scan
You can scan easily by automatically detecting the item type.
Important
• The following types of items may not be scanned correctly. In that case, adjust the cropping frames
(scan areas) in whole image view of ScanGear (scanner driver) and scan again.
• When scanning two or more documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), place documents of
the same size.
4. Click Auto.
Scanning starts.
Note
• Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
• To apply suitable corrections based on the item type, click Settings..., then select the Apply
recommended image correction checkbox in the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog box.
• Scanned images are saved in the folder set for Save in in the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog box
displayed by clicking Settings.... In the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog box, you can also make advanced
scan settings.
• Refer to the following pages to scan by specifying the item type.
Scanning Photos
Scanning Documents
Scanning with Favorite Settings
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder)
481
Scanning Documents
You can scan items placed on the platen with settings suitable for documents.
3. Click Settings..., then set the paper size, resolution, etc. in the Settings (Document Scan)
dialog box as required.
When setting is completed, click OK.
4. Click Document.
Scanning starts.
Note
• Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
• Scanned images are saved in the folder set for Save in in the Settings (Document Scan) dialog box
displayed by clicking Settings.... In the Settings (Document Scan) dialog box, you can also make
advanced scan settings.
482
Scanning Photos
You can scan photos placed on the platen with settings suitable for photos.
3. Click Settings..., then set the paper size, resolution, etc. in the Settings (Photo Scan)
dialog box as required.
When setting is completed, click OK.
4. Click Photo.
Scanning starts.
Note
• Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
• Scanned images are saved in the folder set for Save in in the Settings (Photo Scan) dialog box
displayed by clicking Settings.... In the Settings (Photo Scan) dialog box, you can also make
advanced scan settings.
483
Scanning with Favorite Settings
You can scan items placed on the platen with your favorite settings saved beforehand.
This is convenient for saving frequently used settings or when specifying scan settings in detail.
2. Click Settings..., then set the item type, resolution, etc. in the Settings (Custom Scan)
dialog box as required.
When setting is completed, click OK.
Note
• Once the settings are made, you can scan with the same settings from the next time.
4. Click Custom.
Scanning starts.
Note
• Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
• Scanned images are saved in the folder set for Save in in the Settings (Custom Scan) dialog box
displayed by clicking Settings.... In the Settings (Custom Scan) dialog box, you can also make
advanced scan settings.
484
Scanning Items Larger than the Platen (Image Stitch)
You can scan the left and right halves of an item larger than the platen and combine them back into one
image. Items up to approximately twice as large as the platen are supported.
Note
• The following explains how to scan from the item to be placed on the left side.
2. Click Settings..., then set the item type, resolution, etc. in the Settings (Scan and Stitch)
dialog box as required.
When setting is completed, click OK.
3. Click Stitch.
4. In Select Output Size, select an output size according to the paper size.
485
6. Place the item that is to be displayed on the left side of the screen face-down on the platen.
Note
• Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
8. Place the item that is to be displayed on the right side of the screen face-down on the
platen.
486
9. Click Start Scanning Image 2.
Note
• Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
Note
• Select the Adjust cropping frames checkbox to specify the area to be saved.
487
Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window
• To scan an item again, select the image in the Preview area or the thumbnail at the top of the
screen, then click (Delete). The selected image is deleted, allowing you to scan the item
again.
Note
• Refer to "Image Stitch Window" for details on the Image Stitch window.
• You can make advanced scan settings in the Settings (Scan and Stitch) dialog box displayed by
clicking Settings....
488
Scanning Multiple Items at One Time
You can scan two or more photos (small items) placed on the platen at one time and save each image
individually.
Important
• The following types of items may not be scanned correctly. In that case, adjust the cropping frames
(scan areas) in whole image view of ScanGear (scanner driver) and scan again.
Refer to "Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)" for your model
from Home of the Online Manual for details.
Note
• The screens for scanning with favorite settings are used as examples in the following descriptions.
3. Click Settings....
489
5. Select Select Source according to the items to be scanned.
490
The IJ Scan Utility main screen appears.
Note
• Refer to the following pages for details on the setting items in the Settings dialog box.
7. Click Custom.
Note
• Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
• Scanned images are saved in the folder set for Save in in the corresponding Settings dialog box
displayed by clicking Settings.... In each Settings dialog box, you can also make advanced scan
settings.
491
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time from the ADF (Auto
Document Feeder)
Place multiple documents on the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) and scan at one time.
Note
• You can scan multiple documents at one time from the ADF when scanning via Auto, Document,
Custom, or ScanGear.
Refer to "Scanning with Application Software that You are Using (ScanGear)" for your model from
Home of the Online Manual for how to scan using ScanGear (scanner driver).
Note
• The screens for scanning documents are used as examples in the following descriptions.
3. Click Settings....
492
5. Select Select Source according to the documents to be scanned.
To scan only the front side of each document, select Document (ADF/Platen) or Document (ADF
Simplex).
To scan the front side then the back side of each document, select Document (ADF Manual Duplex).
6. Set the color mode, document size, and scanning resolution as required.
Click Document Scan Orientation Settings... to specify the orientation of the documents to be
scanned. In the displayed dialog box, you can specify the Orientation and Binding Side. How to place
the documents when scanning the back sides depends on the Binding Side.
493
The IJ Scan Utility main screen appears.
Note
• Refer to the following pages for details on the setting items in the Settings dialog box.
7. Click Document.
Scanning starts.
Note
• Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
When Document (ADF Manual Duplex) is selected for Select Source, proceed to Step 8.
Note
• The screens for scanning with Orientation set to Portrait are used as examples in the following
descriptions.
494
When Long edge is Selected for Binding Side in Document Scan Orientation Settings...:
Place the documents after rotating the output documents 180 degrees.
When Short edge is Selected for Binding Side in Document Scan Orientation Settings...:
Place the documents without changing the orientation of the output documents.
9. Click OK.
Scanning starts.
Note
• Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
• Scanned images are saved in the folder set for Save in in the corresponding Settings dialog box
displayed by clicking Settings.... In each Settings dialog box, you can also make advanced scan
settings.
495
Saving after Checking Scan Results
You can check the scan results, then save the images to a computer.
Important
• You cannot check the scan results before saving when scanned using Auto scan or the operation
panel.
Note
• The screens for scanning photos are used as examples in the following descriptions.
2. Click Settings....
496
The IJ Scan Utility main screen appears.
Note
• Refer to the following pages for details on the setting items in the Settings dialog box.
5. Click Photo.
Scanning starts.
Note
• Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
497
Note
• The default save folders are as follows.
• Windows 8.1: Documents folder
• Windows 8: My Documents folder
• Windows 7: My Documents folder
• Windows Vista: Documents folder
• Windows XP: My Documents folder
7. Click OK.
Scanned images are saved according to the settings.
498
Sending Scanned Images via E-mail
You can send scanned images via e-mail.
Note
• The screens for scanning photos are used as examples in the following descriptions.
2. Click Settings....
499
Note
• You can add e-mail clients to use for attachments from the pull-down menu.
• If None (Attach Manually) is selected, manually attach scanned and saved images to e-mail.
5. Click OK.
Note
• Refer to the following pages for details on the setting items in the Settings dialog box.
500
Settings (Photo Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (ScanGear) Dialog Box
6. Click Photo.
Scanning starts.
When scanning is completed, the specified e-mail client starts and the images will be attached to a new
message.
Note
• Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
• The scanned images are saved according to the settings made in the Settings dialog box.
• When the Check scan results checkbox is selected in the Settings dialog box, the Save Settings
dialog box appears. After you set the save options and click OK, the scanned images are saved
and automatically attached to a new message of the specified e-mail client.
7. Specify the recipient, enter the subject and message, then send e-mail.
Refer to the manual of your e-mail client for e-mail settings.
501
Extracting Text from Scanned Images (OCR)
Scan text in scanned magazines and newspapers and display it in your text editor.
Note
• You can extract text when scanning via Document, Custom, or ScanGear.
• The screens for scanning documents are used as examples in the following descriptions.
2. Click Settings....
Note
• For Resolution, only 300 dpi or 400 dpi can be set when Start OCR is selected in Application
Settings.
4. Select Start OCR for Application Settings, then select the application in which you want
to display the result.
502
Note
• If a compatible application is not installed, the text in the image is extracted and appears in your
text editor.
Text to be displayed is based on Document Language in the Settings (General Settings) dialog
box. Select the language you want to extract in Document Language and scan.
• You can add the application from the pull-down menu.
5. Click OK.
503
Note
• Refer to the following pages for details on the setting items in the Settings dialog box.
6. Click Document.
Scanning starts.
When scanning is completed, the scanned images are saved according to the settings, and the extracted
text appears in the specified application.
Note
• Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
• Text displayed in your text editor is for guidance only. Text in the image of the following types of
documents may not be detected correctly.
• Documents containing text with font size outside the range of 8 points to 40 points (at 300 dpi)
• Slanted documents
• Documents placed upside down or documents with text in the wrong orientation (rotated
characters)
• Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
• Documents with narrow line spacing
• Documents with colors in the background of text
• Documents containing multiple languages
504
IJ Scan Utility Screens
IJ Scan Utility Main Screen
Settings Dialog Box
Settings (Auto Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Photo Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Scan and Stitch) Dialog Box
Settings (ScanGear) Dialog Box
Settings (Save to PC (Auto)) Dialog Box
Settings (Save to PC (Photo)) Dialog Box
Settings (Save to PC (Document)) Dialog Box
Settings (General Settings) Dialog Box
505
IJ Scan Utility Main Screen
Follow the steps below to start IJ Scan Utility.
Windows 8.1/Windows 8:
If IJ Scan Utility is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for "IJ Scan
Utility".
From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Scan Utility > IJ Scan Utility to start IJ
Scan Utility.
You can complete from scanning to saving at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
Product Name
Displays the name of the product that IJ Scan Utility is currently set to use.
If the displayed product is not the one you want to use, select the desired product from the list.
In addition, for network connection, select one with "Network" after the product name.
Note
• Refer to "Network Scan Settings" for how to set up a network environment.
Auto
Detects the item type automatically and saves them to a computer. The data format for saving will also
be set automatically.
Save settings and the response after scanning can be specified in the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog
box.
Document
Scans items as documents and saves them to a computer.
Scan/save settings and the response after scanning can be specified in the Settings (Document Scan)
dialog box.
Photo
Scans items as photos and saves them to a computer.
Scan/save settings and the response after scanning can be specified in the Settings (Photo Scan)
dialog box.
Custom
Scans items with your favorite settings and saves the images to a computer. The item type can be
automatically detected.
Scan/save settings and the response after scanning can be specified in the Settings (Custom Scan)
dialog box.
506
Stitch
Displays the Image Stitch window in which you can scan the left and right halves of an item larger than
the platen and combine the scanned images back into one image.
Scan/save settings and the response after scanning can be specified in the Settings (Scan and Stitch)
dialog box.
ScanGear
Starts ScanGear (scanner driver) in which you can make image corrections and color adjustments
when scanning.
Scan/save settings and applications can be specified in the Settings (ScanGear) dialog box.
Instructions
Opens this guide.
Settings...
Displays the Settings dialog box in which you can specify the scan/save settings and the response after
scanning.
507
Settings Dialog Box
There are three tabs in the Settings dialog box: (Scanning from a Computer), (Scanning from the
Operation Panel), and (General Settings). When you click a tab, the view in the red frame switches and
you can make advanced settings to functions on each tab.
508
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, the (Scanning from the
Operation Panel) tab does not appear.
509
Settings (Auto Scan) Dialog Box
Click Auto Scan on the (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog
box.
In the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings to scan by automatically
detecting the item type.
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, the setting items for Application
Settings do not appear.
Supported Items
Important
• To scan the following types of items, specify the item type and size in the Settings (Document Scan)
dialog box, Settings (Photo Scan) dialog box, or Settings (Custom Scan) dialog box, then click
Photo, Document, or Custom in the IJ Scan Utility main screen. You cannot scan correctly with Auto.
• A4 size photos
• Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as paperback
pages with the spine cut off
• Items printed on thin white paper
• Long narrow items such as panoramic photos
510
• Place items to be scanned on the platen correctly. Otherwise, items may not be scanned correctly.
Refer to "Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)" for how to place items.
• When scanning two or more documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), place documents of
the same size.
Note
• To reduce moire in scans, set Select Source to Magazine in the Settings (Document Scan) dialog
box or Settings (Custom Scan) dialog box, then click Document or Custom in the IJ Scan Utility main
screen.
Important
• The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect the
checkbox and scan.
Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.
Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.
Data Format
Auto is selected. The following data formats are automatically applied according to the item type
when saving.
511
• Photos, postcards, BD/DVD/CD, and business cards: JPEG
• Magazines, newspapers, and documents: PDF
Important
• The save format may differ depending on how you place the item.
PDF Compression
Select the compression type for saving PDF files.
Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.
Note
• PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the
(General Settings) tab of the Settings dialog box are created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.
Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.
Attach to e-mail
Select this when you want to send e-mails with the scanned images attached.
You can specify the e-mail client you want to start from the pull-down menu.
512
Do not start any application
Saves to the folder specified in Save in.
Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.
Instructions
Opens this guide.
Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.
513
Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box
Click Document Scan on the (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Document
Scan) dialog box.
In the Settings (Document Scan) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings to scan items as
documents.
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from the Scan screen of My Image Garden, the setting items
for Application Settings do not appear.
514
Note
• When Document (ADF/Platen) is selected and documents are placed both on the platen and
ADF, those placed on the ADF will be scanned.
Color Mode
Select the color mode in which to scan the item.
Paper Size
Select the size of the item to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the paper size appears. Select a Unit,
then enter the Width and Height, and then click OK.
Note
• Click Defaults to restore the specified settings to the default settings.
Resolution
Select the resolution of the item to be scanned.
The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image.
Resolution
Note
• Only 300 dpi or 400 dpi can be set when Start OCR is selected in Application Settings.
Click to display the Document Scan Orientation Settings dialog box in which you can set the
orientation and binding side of the documents to be scanned from the ADF.
515
Important
• Binding Side cannot be specified when scanning only the front side of each document.
Note
• The displayed items vary by Select Source and Color Mode.
Important
• The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect
the checkbox and scan.
Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.
Sharpen outline
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.
Reduce show-through
Sharpens text in an item or reduces show-through in newspapers, etc.
Reduce moire
Reduces moire patterns.
Printed materials are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where
uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots
are scanned.
Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Reduce moire.
Important
• This function is available only when scanning from the platen.
Note
• Use ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when
scanning non-standard size items or specified areas.
Refer to "Gutter Shadow Correction" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for
details.
• When you enable this function, scanning may take longer than usual with network
connection.
516
Important
• The following types of documents may not be corrected properly since the text cannot be
detected correctly.
• Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary
by line
• Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text
• Documents with extremely large or small fonts
• Documents with small amount of text
• Documents containing figures/images
• Hand-written text
• Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables)
Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted text document.
Important
• Only text documents written in the language selected from Document Language in the
Settings (General Settings) dialog box are supported.
• The orientation may not be detected for the following types of settings or documents since
the text cannot be detected correctly.
• Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi
• Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points
• Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
• Documents with patterned backgrounds
In that case, select the Check scan results checkbox and rotate the image in the Save
Settings dialog box.
Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.
517
• Windows 7: My Documents folder
• Windows Vista: Documents folder
• Windows XP: My Documents folder
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.
Data Format
Select the data format in which to save the scanned images.
You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, PNG, PDF, or PDF (Multiple Pages).
Important
• You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
• When Start OCR is selected in Application Settings, you cannot select PDF or PDF (Multiple
Pages).
Note
• With network connection, scanning may take longer than usual when you set TIFF or PNG in
Data Format.
PDF Compression
Select the compression type for saving PDF files.
Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.
Important
• This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format.
• When Black and White is selected in Color Mode, this option does not appear.
Important
• This appears only when JPEG/Exif is selected in Data Format.
Important
• This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format.
Note
• PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the
(General Settings) tab of the Settings dialog box are created.
518
Save to a subfolder with current date
Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save
scanned images in it. The folder will be created with a name such as "20XX_01_01"
(Year_Month_Date).
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.
Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.
Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.
Attach to e-mail
Select this when you want to send e-mails with the scanned images attached.
You can specify the e-mail client you want to start from the pull-down menu.
Start OCR
Select this when you want to convert text in the scanned image into text data.
Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.
Instructions
Opens this guide.
Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.
519
Settings (Photo Scan) Dialog Box
Click Photo Scan on the (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Photo Scan)
dialog box.
In the Settings (Photo Scan) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings to scan items as photos.
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, the setting items for Application
Settings do not appear.
Color Mode
Select the color mode in which to scan the item.
Paper Size
Select the size of the item to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the paper size appears. Select a Unit,
then enter the Width and Height, and then click OK.
520
Note
• Click Defaults to restore the specified settings to the default settings.
Resolution
Select the resolution of the item to be scanned.
The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image.
Resolution
Important
• When Color Mode is Black and White, Image Processing Settings is not available.
Sharpen outline
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.
Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.
Data Format
Select the data format in which to save the scanned images.
521
You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, or PNG.
Important
• You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
Note
• With network connection, scanning may take longer than usual when you set TIFF or PNG in
Data Format.
Important
• This appears only when JPEG/Exif is selected in Data Format.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.
Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.
You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.
Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.
Attach to e-mail
Select this when you want to send e-mails with the scanned images attached.
You can specify the e-mail client you want to start from the pull-down menu.
522
Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.
Instructions
Opens this guide.
Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.
523
Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box
Click Custom Scan on the (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Custom Scan)
dialog box.
In the Settings (Custom Scan) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings to scan according to your
preference.
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from the Scan screen of My Image Garden, the setting items
for Application Settings do not appear.
524
Important
• Item types supported by Auto are photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers,
documents, and BD/DVD/CD.
• To scan the following types of items, specify the item type or size. You cannot scan correctly with
Auto.
• A4 size photos
• Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as
paperback pages with the spine cut off
• Items printed on thin white paper
• Long narrow items such as panoramic photos
• When scanning two or more documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), place
documents of the same size even if Auto is set.
Note
• To convert text in the image into text data after scanning, specify Select Source instead of
selecting Auto.
• To reduce moire, set Select Source to Magazine or select the Reduce moire checkbox in
Image Processing Settings.
Color Mode
Select the color mode in which to scan the item.
Note
• Only Color is available when Select Source is Auto.
Paper Size
Select the size of the item to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the paper size appears. Select a Unit,
then enter the Width and Height, and then click OK.
Note
• Only Auto is available when Select Source is Auto.
• Click Defaults in the screen in which you can specify the paper size to restore the specified
settings to the default settings.
Resolution
Select the resolution of the item to be scanned.
525
The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image.
Resolution
Note
• Only Auto is available when Select Source is Auto.
• Only 300 dpi or 400 dpi can be set when Start OCR is selected in Application Settings.
Important
• Binding Side cannot be specified when scanning only the front side of each document.
Click (Plus) to set the following. Available setting items vary by Select Source.
Important
• The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections. In that case,
deselect the checkbox and scan.
Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.
Important
• When Color Mode is Black and White, Image Processing Settings is not available.
Sharpen outline
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.
526
• When Select Source is Magazine or Document:
Note
• The displayed items vary by Select Source and Color Mode.
Important
• The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections. In that case,
deselect the checkbox and scan.
Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.
Sharpen outline
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.
Reduce show-through
Sharpens text in an item or reduces show-through in newspapers, etc.
Reduce moire
Reduces moire patterns.
Printed materials are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where
uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine
dots are scanned.
Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Reduce moire.
Important
• This function is available only when scanning from the platen.
Note
• Use ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when
scanning non-standard size items or specified areas.
Refer to "Gutter Shadow Correction" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for
details.
• When you enable this function, scanning may take longer than usual with network
connection.
Important
• The following types of documents may not be corrected properly since the text cannot
be detected correctly.
527
• Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles
vary by line
• Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text
• Documents with extremely large or small fonts
• Documents with small amount of text
• Documents containing figures/images
• Hand-written text
• Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables)
Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted text document.
Important
• Only text documents written in languages that can be selected from Document
Language in the Settings (General Settings) dialog box are supported.
• The orientation may not be detected for the following types of settings or documents
since the text cannot be detected correctly.
• Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi
• Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points
• Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
• Documents with patterned backgrounds
In that case, select the Check scan results checkbox and rotate the image in the Save
Settings dialog box.
Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.
528
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.
Data Format
Select the data format in which to save the scanned images.
You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, PNG, PDF, PDF (Multiple Pages), or Auto.
Important
• When Auto is selected, the save format may differ depending on how you place the item.
Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)
• You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
• When Start OCR is selected in Application Settings, you cannot select PDF, PDF (Multiple
Pages), or Auto.
Note
• Auto appears only when Auto is selected for Select Source.
• With network connection, scanning may take longer than usual when you set TIFF or PNG in
Data Format.
Important
• This appears only when JPEG/Exif or Auto is selected in Data Format.
PDF Compression
Select the compression type for saving PDF files.
Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.
Important
• This appears only when PDF, PDF (Multiple Pages), or Auto is selected in Data Format.
• When Black and White is selected in Color Mode, this option does not appear.
Important
• This appears only when PDF, PDF (Multiple Pages), or Auto is selected in Data Format.
Note
• PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the
(General Settings) tab of the Settings dialog box are created.
529
Save to a subfolder with current date
Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save
scanned images in it. The folder will be created with a name such as "20XX_01_01"
(Year_Month_Date).
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Important
• This does not appear when Select Source is Auto.
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.
Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.
Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.
Attach to e-mail
Select this when you want to send e-mails with the scanned images attached.
You can specify the e-mail client you want to start from the pull-down menu.
Start OCR
Select this when you want to convert text in the scanned image into text data.
Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.
Instructions
Opens this guide.
Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.
530
Settings (Scan and Stitch) Dialog Box
Click Scan and Stitch on the (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Scan and
Stitch) dialog box.
In the Settings (Scan and Stitch) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings for scanning items
larger than the platen.
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from the Scan screen of My Image Garden, the setting items
for Application Settings do not appear.
Note
• To reduce moire, set Select Source to Magazine or select the Reduce moire checkbox in
Image Processing Settings.
531
Color Mode
Select the color mode in which to scan the item.
Resolution
Select the resolution of the item to be scanned.
The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image.
Resolution
Click (Plus) to set the following. Available setting items vary by Select Source.
Important
• When Color Mode is Black and White, Image Processing Settings is not available.
Sharpen outline
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.
Reduce show-through
Sharpens text in an item or reduces show-through in newspapers, etc.
Reduce moire
Reduces moire patterns.
Printed materials are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where
uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine
dots are scanned.
Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Reduce moire.
Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.
532
• Windows 7: My Documents folder
• Windows Vista: Documents folder
• Windows XP: My Documents folder
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.
Data Format
Select the data format in which to save the scanned images.
You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, PNG, PDF, or PDF (Multiple Pages).
Important
• You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
Note
• With network connection, scanning may take longer than usual when you set TIFF or PNG in
Data Format.
PDF Compression
Select the compression type for saving PDF files.
Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.
Important
• This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format.
• When Black and White is selected in Color Mode, this option does not appear.
Important
• This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format.
Note
• PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the
(General Settings) tab of the Settings dialog box are created.
Important
• This appears only when JPEG/Exif is selected in Data Format.
533
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.
Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.
Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.
Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.
Instructions
Opens this guide.
Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.
534
Settings (ScanGear) Dialog Box
Click ScanGear on the (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (ScanGear) dialog
box.
In the Settings (ScanGear) dialog box, you can specify how to save images when scanning items by
starting ScanGear (scanner driver) and how to respond after saving them.
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, the setting items for Application
Settings do not appear.
Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.
535
• Windows 8.1: Documents folder
• Windows 8: My Documents folder
• Windows 7: My Documents folder
• Windows Vista: Documents folder
• Windows XP: My Documents folder
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.
Data Format
Select the data format in which to save the scanned images.
You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, PNG, PDF, or PDF (Multiple Pages).
Note
• When PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected, images up to 9600 pixels x 9600 pixels can be
scanned.
• When the Enable large image scans checkbox is selected in Save Settings, or when Start
OCR is selected in Application Settings, you can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, or PNG.
• With network connection, scanning may take longer than usual when you set TIFF or PNG in
Data Format.
Important
• This appears only when JPEG/Exif is selected in Data Format.
PDF Compression
Select the compression type for saving PDF files.
Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.
Important
• This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format.
Important
• This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format.
Note
• PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the
(General Settings) tab of the Settings dialog box are created.
536
Save to a subfolder with current date
Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save
scanned images in it. The folder will be created with a name such as "20XX_01_01"
(Year_Month_Date).
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Important
• When this checkbox is selected, you cannot select Send to an application, Send to a folder,
Attach to e-mail, or Start OCR.
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.
Note
• When this checkbox is not selected, images up to 10208 pixels x 14032 pixels can be scanned.
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.
Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.
Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.
Attach to e-mail
Select this when you want to send e-mails with the scanned images attached.
You can specify the e-mail client you want to start from the pull-down menu.
Start OCR
Select this when you want to convert text in the scanned image into text data.
537
Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.
Instructions
Opens this guide.
Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.
538
Settings (Save to PC (Auto)) Dialog Box
Click Save to PC (Auto) on the (Scanning from the Operation Panel) tab to display the Settings (Save
to PC (Auto)) dialog box.
In the Settings (Save to PC (Auto)) dialog box, you can specify how to respond when saving images to a
computer after scanning them from the operation panel by automatically detecting the item type.
Resolution
Auto is selected.
539
Image Processing Settings
Important
• The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect
the checkbox and scan.
Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.
Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.
Data Format
Auto is selected. The following data formats are automatically applied according to the item type
when saving.
Important
• The save format may differ depending on how you place the item.
540
Refer to "Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)" for how to place items.
PDF Compression
Select the compression type for saving PDF files.
Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.
Note
• PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the
(General Settings) tab of the Settings dialog box are created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.
Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.
Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.
541
Instructions
Opens this guide.
Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.
542
Settings (Save to PC (Photo)) Dialog Box
Click Save to PC (Photo) on the (Scanning from the Operation Panel) tab to display the Settings
(Save to PC (Photo)) dialog box.
In the Settings (Save to PC (Photo)) dialog box, you can specify how to respond when saving images to a
computer as photos after scanning them from the operation panel.
Resolution
Set from the operation panel.
Sharpen outline
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.
543
Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.
Data Format
Set from the operation panel.
JPEG Image Quality
You can specify the image quality of JPEG files.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.
Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.
Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.
544
Instructions
Opens this guide.
Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.
545
Settings (Save to PC (Document)) Dialog Box
Click Save to PC (Document) on the (Scanning from the Operation Panel) tab to display the Settings
(Save to PC (Document)) dialog box.
In the Settings (Save to PC (Document)) dialog box, you can specify how to respond when saving images
to a computer as documents after scanning them from the operation panel.
Resolution
Set from the operation panel.
546
Image Processing Settings
Important
• The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect
the checkbox and scan.
Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.
Sharpen outline
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.
Reduce show-through
Sharpens text in an item or reduces show-through in newspapers, etc.
Reduce moire
Reduces moire patterns.
Printed materials are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where
uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots
are scanned.
Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Reduce moire.
Important
• This function is available only when scanning from the platen.
Note
• When you enable this function, scanning may take longer than usual with network
connection.
547
Important
• The following types of documents may not be corrected properly since the text cannot be
detected correctly.
• Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary
by line
• Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text
• Documents with extremely large or small fonts
• Documents with small amount of text
• Documents containing figures/images
• Hand-written text
• Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables)
Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted text document.
Important
• Only text documents written in languages that can be selected from Document Language
in the Settings (General Settings) dialog box are supported.
• The orientation may not be detected for the following types of settings or documents since
the text cannot be detected correctly.
• Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi
• Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points
• Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
• Documents with patterned backgrounds
Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.
548
• Windows XP: My Documents folder
Data Format
Set from the operation panel.
Note
• PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the
(General Settings) tab of the Settings dialog box are created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.
Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.
You can specify the folder from the pull-down menu.
Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.
Instructions
Opens this guide.
Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.
549
Settings (General Settings) Dialog Box
Click the (General Settings) tab to display the Settings (General Settings) dialog box.
In the Settings (General Settings) dialog box, you can set the product to use, file size restriction on e-mail
attachment, language to detect text in images, and folder in which to save images temporarily.
Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, some options may not appear.
Product Name
Displays the name of the product that IJ Scan Utility is currently set to use.
If the displayed product is not the one you want to use, select the desired product from the list.
In addition, for network connection, select one with "Network" after the product name.
Note
• With network connection, Select appears on the right side of the product name. Click Select to
display IJ Network Scanner Selector EX from which you can change the scanner to use. Refer to
"Network Scan Settings" for the setting procedure.
Document Language
You can select the language for detecting text in images and for use with search when a PDF file that
supports keyword search is created.
550
Instructions
Opens this guide.
Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.
551
Save Settings Dialog Box
Select the Check scan results checkbox in Save Settings of the Settings dialog box to display the Save
Settings dialog box after scanning.
You can specify the data format and destination while viewing the thumbnails of scan results.
Important
• After scanning from My Image Garden or the operation panel, the Save Settings dialog box does not
appear.
Select the image you want to rotate, then click (Rotate Left 90°) or (Rotate Right 90°).
Important
• The preview operation buttons do not appear when the Enable large image scans checkbox is
selected in the Settings (ScanGear) dialog box.
552
(3) Save Settings Area
File Name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved. When you save a file, the date and four digits are
appended to the set file name in the "_20XX0101_0001" format.
Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.
Data Format
Select the data format in which to save the scanned images.
You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, PNG, PDF, or PDF (Multiple Pages).
Important
• You cannot select PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) in the following cases.
• You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
Note
• With network connection, scanning may take longer than usual when you set TIFF or PNG in
Data Format.
Important
• This appears only when JPEG/Exif is selected in Data Format.
PDF Compression
Select the compression type for saving PDF files.
Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.
553
Important
• This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format.
• When Black and White is selected in Color Mode, this option does not appear.
Important
• This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format.
Note
• PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the
(General Settings) tab of the Settings dialog box are created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
554
Image Stitch Window
Click Stitch in the IJ Scan Utility main screen to display the Image Stitch window.
You can scan the left and right halves of an item larger than the platen and combine them back into one
image. You can scan items up to approximately twice as large as the platen.
Note
• The displayed items vary depending on the select source and view.
A3 (A4 x 2)
Scans the left and right halves of an A3 size item separately.
11 x 17 (Letter x 2)
Scans the left and right halves of an item twice as large as Letter size separately.
Full Platen x 2
Scans the left and right halves of an item twice as large as the platen separately.
Scan Direction
Scan from Left
Displays the first scanned image on the left side.
555
Scan Image 1
Start Scanning Image 1
Scans the first item.
Scan Image 2
Start Scanning Image 2
Scans the second item.
If no area is specified, the image of the size selected in Select Output Size will be saved. If an area
is specified, only the image in the cropping frame will be scanned and saved.
556
Save
Save
Saves the two scanned images as one image.
Cancel
Cancels Stitch scan.
(2) Toolbar
You can delete the scanned images or adjust the previewed images.
(Delete)
Deletes the image selected in the Thumbnail View area.
(Enlarge/Reduce)
Allows you to enlarge or reduce the preview image.
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
(Rotate 180°)
Rotates the preview image 180 degrees.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise.
(Open Guide)
Opens this page.
557
When no image has been scanned:
The image is scanned in the direction specified in Scan Direction, and 2 appears next to it.
Related Topic
Scanning Items Larger than the Platen (Image Stitch)
558
Scanning with Application Software that You are Using (ScanGear)
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Scanning in Basic Mode
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in
Advanced Mode
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens
Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)
Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)
General Notes (Scanner Driver)
Important
• Available functions and settings vary depending on your scanner or printer.
559
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
ScanGear (scanner driver) is software required for scanning documents. It enables you to specify the output
size and make image corrections when scanning.
ScanGear can be started from IJ Scan Utility or applications that are compatible with a standard interface
called TWAIN. (ScanGear is a TWAIN-compatible driver.)
Screens
There are two modes: Basic Mode and Advanced Mode.
Note
• ScanGear starts in the last used mode.
• Settings are not retained when you switch modes.
Basic Mode
Use the Basic Mode tab to scan easily by following three simple on-screen steps ( , , and
).
Advanced Mode
Use the Advanced Mode tab to specify the color mode, output resolution, image brightness, color tone,
etc. when scanning.
560
561
Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner
Driver)
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Scanning in Basic Mode
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in
Advanced Mode
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
562
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Use ScanGear (scanner driver) to make image corrections and color adjustments when scanning. ScanGear
can be started from IJ Scan Utility or other applications.
Note
• Set up the network environment if you have more than one scanner or have a network compatible
model and changed the connection from USB connection to network connection.
The procedure varies depending on the application. For details, refer to the application's manual.
Note
• When you want to use a network compatible model by connecting to a network, select one with
"Network" displayed after the product name.
563
Scanning in Basic Mode
Use the Basic Mode tab to scan easily by following the on-screen steps.
Refer to "Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)" to scan multiple
documents at one time from the Platen.
When scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), documents are scanned without preview.
Important
• The following types of documents may not be scanned correctly. In that case, click (Thumbnail)
on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan.
Note
• When using a model supporting ADF duplex scanning, you can scan both sides of the documents
automatically from the ADF.
1. Place the document on the Platen or ADF, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
2. Set Select Source according to the document placed on the Platen or ADF.
564
Important
• Some applications do not support continuous scanning from the ADF. For details, refer to the
application's manual.
Note
• To scan magazines containing many color photos, select Magazine (Color).
3. Click Preview.
Preview image appears in the Preview area.
Important
• Preview is not displayed when an ADF type is selected for Select Source.
Note
• Colors are adjusted based on the document type selected in Select Source.
4. Set Destination.
Note
• Skip ahead to Step 7 when an ADF type is selected for Select Source.
565
8. Click Scan.
Scanning starts.
Note
• Click (Information) to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings
(document type, etc.).
• A response of ScanGear after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Related Topic
Basic Mode Tab
566
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Use the Advanced Mode tab to specify the color mode, output resolution, image brightness, color tone, etc.
when scanning.
Refer to "Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)" to scan multiple
documents at one time.
Refer to "Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in Advanced Mode" to scan
multiple documents placed on the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
Important
• The following types of documents may not be scanned correctly. In that case, click (Thumbnail)
on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan.
1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Note
• Settings are not retained when you switch modes.
567
3. Set Input Settings according to the document or purpose.
4. Click Preview.
Preview images appear in the Preview area.
6. Adjust the cropping frame (scan area), correct image, and adjust colors as required.
Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Buttons
7. Click Scan.
Scanning starts.
Note
• Click (Information) to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings
(document type, etc.).
• A response of ScanGear after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Related Topic
Advanced Mode Tab
568
Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document
Feeder) in Advanced Mode
Use the Advanced Mode tab to specify the image brightness, color tone, etc. and scan multiple documents
placed on the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) at one time. When using a model supporting ADF duplex
scanning, you can scan both sides of the documents automatically from the ADF.
When scanning from the ADF, documents are scanned without preview.
1. Place the documents on the ADF of the machine, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Placing Documents (ADF (Auto Document Feeder))
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
2. Click the Advanced Mode tab and select Document (ADF Simplex) or Document (ADF
Duplex) for Select Source.
Note
• Settings are not retained when you switch modes.
• You can select Document (ADF Duplex) when using a model supporting ADF duplex scanning.
6. Click Scan.
Scanning starts.
569
Note
• Click (Information) to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings
(document type, etc.).
• A response of ScanGear after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Related Topic
Advanced Mode Tab
570
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear
(Scanner Driver)
You can scan two or more photos (small documents) on the Platen at one time on the Basic Mode tab and
Advanced Mode tab.
This section explains how to scan multiple documents from the Basic Mode tab.
Important
• To scan multiple documents as a single image, scan in whole image view.
• The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly. In that case, adjust the cropping
frames (scan areas) in whole image view and scan.
Note
• You can also scan multiple documents at one time from the Advanced Mode tab. Use the Advanced
Mode tab to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode, output resolution, image brightness,
and color tone.
• Refer to the corresponding sections below for details on the Basic Mode tab and Advanced Mode tab.
1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
571
3. Click Preview.
Thumbnails of the preview images appear in the Preview area. Cropping frames are specified
automatically according to the document size.
4. Set Destination.
Note
• You can correct each image separately. Select the frame you want to correct.
• In thumbnail view, you can only create one cropping frame per image. To create multiple cropping
frames in an image, scan in whole image view.
572
7. Select the images you want to scan.
Select the checkboxes of the images you want to scan.
8. Click Scan.
Note
• Positions of slanted documents are not corrected in whole image view.
Note
• When the whole image is displayed, the icon changes to (Whole Image).
2. Set Destination.
573
Adjust the size and position of the cropping frames on the preview image. You can also create two or
more cropping frames.
If an area is not specified, the document will be scanned at the document size (Auto Crop). If an area
is specified, only the portion in the specified area will be scanned.
6. Click Scan.
Areas framed by broken lines are scanned.
Note
• A response of ScanGear after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
574
Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner
Driver)
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading
Correction, etc.)
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
Adjusting Histogram
Adjusting Tone Curve
Setting Threshold
575
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches,
Fading Correction, etc.)
The Image Settings functions on the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver) allow you to
enhance the outline of the subjects, reduce dust/scratches, and correct faded colors when scanning images.
Setting Items
Click (Arrow) of a function and select an item from the pull-down menu.
Important
• Do not apply these functions to images without moire, dust/scratches, or faded colors. The color tone
may be adversely affected.
• Refer to "Image Settings" for details and precautions on each function.
Note
• Refer to "Scanning in Advanced Mode" to start the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear and scan.
None Auto
576
Reducing show-through in text documents or lightening the base color in
recycled paper, newspapers, etc. when scanning documents
Set Reduce Show-through to ON.
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
577
Note
• Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon
where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine
dots are scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect.
None Medium
None Medium
Reducing graininess
Set Grain Correction to Low, Medium, or High according to the degree of graininess.
None Medium
Correcting shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets
Set Gutter Shadow Correction to Low, Medium, or High according to the degree of shadows.
None Medium
578
579
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
You can preview color changes and reproduce natural colors by using the color pattern function in
ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Basic Mode tab.
Color Adjustment
Correct colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast. "Colorcast" is a phenomenon where a
specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.
Cyan & red, magenta & green, and yellow & blue are complementary color pairs (each pair produces a
shade of gray when mixed). You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color
and increasing the complementary color.
It is recommended that you find a portion in the image where it should be white, and adjust the colors so
that the portion turns white.
Preview image appears in the center. Preview image colors change as you adjust them.
580
Below is an example of correcting a bluish image.
Since Blue and Green are too strong, click the Yellow and Magenta arrows to correct.
Before After
Note
• Color adjustments are applied only to the cropping frames (scan areas) or the frame selected in
thumbnail view.
• You can select multiple frames or cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key.
• You can also select a color tone from the color pattern displayed on the left of the Color Pattern
screen.
• You can also use this function to add a specific tint to an image. Increase the magenta to add a warm
tint, and increase the blue to add a cool tint.
581
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
You can brighten colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast by using (Saturation/Color
Balance) in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab.
Note
• Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.
Saturation
Adjust the image's saturation (vividness). You can brighten colors that have faded with time, etc.
Move (Slider) under Saturation to the left to decrease the saturation (darken the image), and to the
right to increase the saturation (brighten the image). You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Note
• The natural color tone of the original image may be lost if you increase saturation too much.
Color Balance
Adjust images that have a colorcast. "Colorcast" is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire
picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.
582
Move (Slider) under Color Balance to the left or right to emphasize the corresponding color.
These are complementary color pairs (each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed). You can
reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and increasing the complementary
color.
It is usually difficult to correct the image completely by adjusting only one color pair. It is recommended
that you find a portion in the image where it should be white, and adjust all three color pairs so that the
portion turns white.
Below is an example of an image in which the "Cyan & Red" pair has been adjusted.
583
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
You can adjust images that are too dark or bright, or too flat due to lack of contrast by using
(Brightness/Contrast) in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab.
Note
• Click (Down arrow) to switch to detailed view. Click (Up arrow) to return to the previous view.
• Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.
Channel
Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green, and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These
colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel."
Master
Adjust the Red, Green, and Blue combined.
Red
Adjust the Red channel.
Green
Adjust the Green channel.
Blue
Adjust the Blue channel.
Note
• Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale.
584
Brightness
Adjust the image brightness.
Move (Slider) under Brightness to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. You can also
enter a value (-127 to 127).
Note
• Highlights may be lost if you brighten the image too much, and shadows may be lost if you darken
the image too much.
Contrast
"Contrast" is the degree of difference between the brighter and darker parts of an image. Increasing
contrast will increase the difference, thus sharpening the image. Decreasing contrast will decrease the
difference, thus softening the image.
Move (Slider) under Contrast to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image.
You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Note
• Increasing the contrast is effective in adding a three-dimensional feel to soft images. However,
shadows and highlights may be lost if you increase the contrast too much.
585
Adjusting Histogram
You can adjust the image color tone by using a graph (histogram) showing brightness distribution, via
(Histogram) in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab.
Note
• Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.
Channel
Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green, and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These
colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel."
Master
Adjust the Red, Green, and Blue combined.
Red
Adjust the Red channel.
Green
Adjust the Green channel.
Blue
Adjust the Blue channel.
Note
• Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale.
Reading Histograms
You can see the histogram of a specified area for each Channel. The higher the histogram peak, the
more data is distributed to that level.
586
(1) Bright area (2) Dark area (3) Whole image
More data is distributed to the More data is distributed to the Data is widely distributed between the
highlight side. shadow side. highlight and shadow.
• All parts to the left of (Black-point Slider) will be black (level 0).
• The parts at (Mid-point Slider) will turn to the color exactly between the black-point and white-
point.
• All parts to the right of (White-point Slider) will turn white (level 255).
When Image Adjustment is set to anything but None, the adjustments shown below are performed
automatically.
Move the Black-point Slider toward the highlight side, and White-point Slider toward the shadow side.
587
Moving the Mid-point Slider
Move the Mid-point Slider to specify the level to be set as the middle of the tonal range.
• The point clicked with (Black-point Dropper) will be the darkest point. You can also enter a value
(0 to 245).
• The point clicked with (Mid-point Dropper) will be the middle of the tonal range. You can also
enter a value (5 to 250).
588
• The point clicked with (White-point Dropper) will be the brightest point. You can also enter a
value (10 to 255).
• Click (Dropper) for Gray Balance and click the area you want to adjust the color in the preview
image.
The clicked point will be set as the achromatic color reference, and the rest of the image is adjusted
accordingly. For instance, if snow in a photo appears bluish, click the bluish part to adjust the whole image
and reproduce natural colors.
589
Adjusting Tone Curve
You can adjust the brightness of an image by selecting the type of graph (tone curve) showing the balance
of tone input and output, via (Tone Curve Settings) in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode
tab.
Note
• Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.
Channel
Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green, and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These
colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel."
Master
Adjust the Red, Green, and Blue combined.
Red
Adjust the Red channel.
Green
Adjust the Green channel.
Blue
Adjust the Blue channel.
Note
• Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale.
590
Adjusting Tone Curve
In Select Tone Curve, select a tone curve from No correction, Overexposure, Underexposure, High
contrast, Reverse the negative/positive image, and Edit custom curve.
The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the highlight of the output side, resulting in a bright-
toned image when viewed on a monitor.
The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the shadow of the output side, resulting in a dark-
toned image when viewed on a monitor.
The highlight and shadow of the input side are enhanced, resulting in a high-contrast image.
The input and output sides are reversed, resulting in a negative-positive inverted image.
591
Edit custom curve
You can drag specific points on the Tone Curve to freely adjust the brightness of the corresponding areas.
592
Setting Threshold
You can sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers by adjusting the threshold level
Note
• This function is available when Color Mode is Black and White.
• Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.
Adjusting Threshold
The brightness of color and grayscale images is expressed in a value between 0 and 255. However, in
creating black and white images, all colors are mapped to either black (0) or white (255). "Threshold" is
the borderline value that determines a color as black or white.
Move (Slider) to the right to increase the threshold value and thus increase the black areas. Move the
slider to the left to decrease the value and thus increase the white areas. You can also enter a value (0 to
255).
593
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens
Basic Mode Tab
Advanced Mode Tab
Input Settings
Output Settings
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Buttons
594
Basic Mode Tab
This mode allows you to scan easily by following the on-screen steps.
This section describes the settings and functions available on the Basic Mode tab.
Note
• The displayed items vary by document type and view.
• The preview function is not available when scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
Magazine (Color)
Scan color magazines.
Document (Color)
Scan documents in color.
Document (Grayscale)
Scan documents in black and white.
Document (Color) ADF Duplex (only for models supporting ADF duplex scanning)
Scan both sides of documents from the ADF in color.
Document (Grayscale) ADF Duplex (only for models supporting ADF duplex scanning)
Scan both sides of documents from the ADF in black and white.
595
Important
• Some applications do not support continuous scanning from the ADF. For details, refer to the
application's manual.
Note
• When you select a document type, the unsharp mask function will be active.
• When you select an option other than the ADF types, the image adjustment function which
adjusts images based on the document type will also be active.
• If you select Magazine (Color), the descreen function will be active.
Note
• When using the machine for the first time, scanner calibration starts automatically. Wait a
while until the preview image appears.
Destination
Select what you want to do with the scanned image.
Print
Select this to print the scanned image on a printer.
Image display
Select this to view the scanned image on a monitor.
OCR
Select this to use the scanned image with OCR software.
"OCR software" is software that converts text scanned as an image into text data that can be
edited in word processors and other programs.
Output Size
Select an output size.
596
Flexible
Allows you to freely adjust the cropping frames (scan areas).
In thumbnail view:
Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame. When a cropping frame is
displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. When no cropping frame is
displayed, each frame is scanned individually.
When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a cropping
frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned.
Add/Delete...
Opens the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, in which you can specify custom output
sizes. You can select this option when Destination is Print or Image display.
In the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, you can specify multiple output sizes and save
them at one time. Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected,
along with the predefined items.
Adding:
Enter Output Size Name, Width, and Height, then click Add. For Unit, you can select inches or
mm when Destination is Print but you can only select pixels when Destination is Image
display. The name of the added size appears in Output Size List. Click Save to save the items
listed in Output Size List.
Deleting:
Select the output size you want to delete in Output Size List, then click Delete. Click Save to
save the items listed in Output Size List.
Important
• You cannot delete predefined output sizes such as A4 and 1024 x 768 pixels.
597
Note
• Save up to 10 items.
• An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range. Enter a value
within the setting range.
Note
• For details on whether or how the cropping frame is initially displayed on a preview image, refer
to Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in "Preview Tab" (Preferences dialog box).
Click this button to rotate the cropping frame. Click again to return it to the original orientation.
If an area is not specified, the document will be scanned at the document size (Auto Crop). If an area
is specified, only the portion in the cropping frame will be scanned.
Image corrections
Allows you to apply corrections to images.
Important
• Apply Auto Document Fix and Correct fading are available when Recommended is selected
on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Note
• Available functions vary by the document type selected in Select Source.
Important
• Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected.
• The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect
the checkbox and scan.
• Correction may not be applied properly if the scan area is too small.
Correct fading
Corrects and scans photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast.
Important
• For precautions on using this function, refer to "Gutter Shadow Correction."
Color Pattern...
Allows you to adjust the image's overall color. You can correct colors that have faded due to
colorcast, etc. and reproduce natural colors while previewing color changes.
598
Important
• This setting is not available when you select Color Matching on the Color Settings tab of
the Preferences dialog box.
Perform Scan
Scan
Starts scanning.
Note
• When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
Preferences...
Opens the Preferences dialog box in which you can make scan/preview settings.
Close
Closes ScanGear (scanner driver).
(2) Toolbar
You can adjust or rotate preview images. The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view.
In thumbnail view:
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
• The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
• The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise.
(Auto Crop)
Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in the
Preview area. The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are croppable areas
within the cropping frame.
599
(Check All Frames)
Available when two or more frames are displayed.
Turns the cropping frames into thick broken lines and applies the settings to all of them.
(Information)
Displays the version of ScanGear and the current scan settings (document type, etc.).
(Open Guide)
Opens this page.
600
Note
• When multiple images are previewed, different outlines indicate different selection status.
• Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied.
• Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and Selected
Frames simultaneously. You can select multiple images by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl
key.
• Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied.
• Double-click a frame to zoom in on the image. Click (Frame Advance) at the bottom of the
screen to display the previous or next frame. Double-click the frame again to return the display to its
non-magnified state.
Note
• You can specify the cropping frame on the displayed image. In thumbnail view, you can only create
one cropping frame per image. In whole image view, you can create multiple cropping frames.
Related Topic
Scanning in Basic Mode
601
Advanced Mode Tab
This mode allows you to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode, output resolution, image
brightness, and color tone.
This section describes the settings and functions available on the Advanced Mode tab.
Note
• The displayed items vary by document type and view.
• The preview function is not available when scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
Select Add/Delete... from the pull-down menu to open the Add/Delete Favorite Settings dialog box.
602
Enter Setting Name and click Add; the name appears in Favorite Settings List.
When you click Save, the item appears in the Favorite Settings list and can be selected, along with
the predefined items.
To delete an item, select it in Favorite Settings List and click Delete. Click Save to save the settings
displayed in Favorite Settings List.
Note
• You can set Add/Delete... in Favorite Settings after preview.
• Save up to 10 items.
Input Settings
Specify the input settings such as the document type and size.
Output Settings
Specify the output settings such as the output resolution and size.
Image Settings
Enable/disable various image correction functions.
Zoom
Zooms in on a frame, or zooms in on the image in the area specified with a cropping frame (scan
area). When zoomed in, Zoom changes to Undo. Click Undo to return the display to its non-
magnified state.
In thumbnail view:
When multiple images are displayed in thumbnail view, clicking this button zooms in on the selected
frame. Click (Frame Advance) at the bottom of the screen to display the previous or next
frame.
Note
• You can also zoom in on an image by double-clicking the frame. Double-click the frame again to
return the display to its non-magnified state.
Rescans the image in the area specified with a cropping frame at higher magnification.
Note
• Zoom rescans the document and displays high-resolution image in Preview.
• (Enlarge/Reduce) on the Toolbar zooms in on the preview image quickly. However, the
resolution of the displayed image will be low.
Preview
Performs a trial scan.
603
Scan
Starts scanning.
Note
• When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
• When scanning is completed, a dialog box prompting you to select the next action may appear.
Follow the prompt to complete. For details, refer to Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
in Scan Tab (Preferences dialog box).
• It will take time to process the images if the total size of the scanned images exceeds a certain
size. In that case, a warning message appears; it is recommended that you reduce the total size.
To continue, scan in whole image view.
Preferences...
Opens the Preferences dialog box in which you can make scan/preview settings.
Close
Closes ScanGear (scanner driver).
(2) Toolbar
You can adjust or rotate preview images. The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view.
In thumbnail view:
604
(3) Preview Area
(Clear)
Deletes the preview image from the Preview area.
(Crop)
Allows you to specify the scan area by dragging the mouse.
(Move Image)
Allows you to drag the image until the part you want to see is displayed when an image enlarged in
the Preview area does not fit in the screen. You can also move the image using the scroll bars.
(Enlarge/Reduce)
Allows you to zoom in on the Preview area by clicking the image. Right-click the image to zoom out.
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise.
(Auto Crop)
Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in the
Preview area. The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are croppable areas
within the cropping frame.
Turns the cropping frames into thick broken lines and applies the settings to all of them.
605
(Remove Cropping Frame)
Removes the selected cropping frame.
(Information)
Displays the version of ScanGear and the current scan settings (document type, etc.).
(Open Guide)
Opens this page.
Cropping frames are specified according to the document size, and thumbnails of scanned images are
displayed. Only the images with the checkbox selected will be scanned.
Note
• When multiple images are previewed, different outlines indicate different selection status.
• Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied.
• Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and Selected
Frames simultaneously. You can select multiple images by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl
key.
• Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied.
Items on the Platen are scanned and displayed as a single image. All portions in the cropping frames will
be scanned.
606
Note
• You can specify the cropping frame on the displayed image. In thumbnail view, you can only create
one cropping frame per image. In whole image view, you can create multiple cropping frames.
Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)
Related Topic
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in Advanced Mode
607
Input Settings
Select Source
The type of document to be scanned is displayed. To scan from the Platen, select Platen; to scan from
the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), select Document (ADF Simplex) or Document (ADF Duplex).
Important
• Some applications do not support continuous scanning from the ADF. For details, refer to the
application's manual.
Note
• You can select Document (ADF Duplex) when using a model supporting ADF duplex scanning.
Paper Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned. This setting is available in whole image view only.
When scanning both sides of the documents automatically from the ADF, select A4 or Letter.
When you select a size, the Preview area size changes accordingly.
Important
• Some applications have a limit to the amount of scan data they can receive. Available scan range
is as follows.
• If you change Paper Size after previewing, the preview image will be deleted.
Note
• If you are not sure which size you should select for Paper Size, set Paper Size to Full Platen, then
measure the size of the document and enter the values into (Width) and (Height).
Original Orientation
Set the orientation and stapling side of the documents to scan from the ADF.
608
Click Settings... to open the Orientation dialog box.
Important
• The Orientation dialog box can only be opened when Select Source is Document (ADF
Simplex) or Document (ADF Duplex).
• Binding Location is displayed when using a model supporting ADF duplex scanning.
• Binding Location cannot be specified when Select Source is Document (ADF Simplex).
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Color
Select this mode to scan color documents or to create color images. This mode renders the image
in 256 levels (8 bit) of R(ed), G(reen), and B(lue).
Grayscale
Select this mode to scan black and white photos or to create black and white images. This mode
renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of black and white.
and white and is rendered in two colors. The threshold level can be set with (Threshold).
Input Size
In thumbnail view, the cropped document size is displayed after preview.
In whole image view, the Paper Size is displayed before preview, and the cropping frame (scan area)
size is displayed after preview.
You can adjust the cropping frame size by entering the values into (Width) and (Height).
Click (Change Aspect Ratio) and change it to (Keep Aspect Ratio) to maintain the aspect ratio
when you specify the cropping frame size.
Important
• Input size settings are available only when Output Size in Output Settings is Flexible. If you
select a size other than Flexible, a cropping frame calculated from Output Size and Output
Resolution is displayed, and its aspect ratio is fixed.
609
Note
• The values you can enter will be within the range of the selected document size. The minimum size
is 96 pixels x 96 pixels when Output Resolution is 600 dpi, scaled at 100 %.
• When Auto Crop is performed in whole image view, the aspect ratio will not be maintained since
the size will be prioritized.
• Refer to "Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)" for details on cropping frames.
610
Output Settings
Output Resolution
Select the resolution to scan at.
The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image.
Select a resolution from the options displayed by clicking the button, or enter a value in 1 dpi
increments.
Refer to "Resolution" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.
You can enter a value within the range of 25 dpi to 19200 dpi.
You can enter a value within the range of 25 dpi to 600 dpi.
Output Size
Select an output size.
Select Flexible to set custom sizes or select a size for printing or displaying. Select Add/Delete... to set
custom size and save it as a new output size option.
Flexible
You can specify the output resolution and scale, and adjust the cropping frames (scan areas).
In thumbnail view:
Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame. When a cropping frame is displayed,
the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. When no cropping frame is displayed, each
frame is scanned individually.
611
In whole image view:
When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a cropping
frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned.
Note
• To enlarge/reduce the scanned image, enter values into (Width) and (Height) in
Output Settings or specify a value (by 1 %) for %. Although the maximum value available for
% depends on the Output Resolution, it can be specified for up to 19200 dpi (the maximum
available output resolution).
Paper Size (L, A4, etc.) & Monitor Size (1024 x 768 pixels, etc.)
(Width), (Height), and scale cannot be specified. The preview image will be cropped
according to the selected output size and resolution. The portion within the cropping frame will be
scanned at the size of the selected paper/monitor size. You can drag the cropping frame to
enlarge, reduce, or move it while maintaining the aspect ratio.
Add/Delete...
Opens the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, in which you can specify custom output sizes.
In the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, you can specify multiple output sizes and save
them at one time. Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected, along
with the predefined items.
Adding:
Select Print or Image display for Destination, then enter Output Size Name, Width, and Height,
then click Add. For Unit, you can select inches or mm when Destination is Print but you can only
select pixels when Destination is Image display. The name of the added size appears in Output
Size List. Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List.
Deleting:
Select the output size you want to delete in Output Size List, then click Delete. Click Save to save
the items listed in Output Size List.
Important
• You cannot delete predefined output sizes such as A4 and 1024 x 768 pixels.
Note
• Save up to 10 items for each destination.
• An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range. Enter a value
within the range displayed in the message.
612
Note
• Refer to "Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)" for details on cropping frames.
• For details on whether or how the cropping frame is initially displayed on a preview image, refer to
Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in "Preview Tab" (Preferences dialog box).
Click this button to rotate the cropping frame. Click again to return it to the original orientation.
Data Size
The data size when scanned with the current settings is displayed.
Note
• When the data size exceeds a certain size, the value appears in red. In that case, a warning
message appears when you click Scan. It is recommended that you adjust the settings to reduce
Data Size. To continue, scan in whole image view.
613
Image Settings
Important
• Do not apply these functions to images without moire, dust/scratches, or faded colors. The color tone
may be adversely affected.
• Image correction results may not be reflected in the preview image.
Note
• Selectable settings depend on Color Mode settings.
• Scanning may take longer than usual when you use Image Settings.
Image Adjustment
When Image Adjustment is set, the brightness of the specified portion of the image is optimized. Images
can be adjusted according to the automatically detected document type or the specified document type.
The result of the adjustment will be reflected in the entire image.
None
Image Adjustment will not be applied.
Auto
Applies Image Adjustment by automatically detecting the document type. It is recommended that
you normally select this setting.
Photo
Applies Image Adjustment suitable for photos.
Magazine
Applies Image Adjustment suitable for magazines.
Document
Applies Image Adjustment suitable for text documents.
Important
• You can set Image Adjustment after preview.
614
• You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
Note
• If the image is not adjusted properly with Auto, specify the document type.
• The color tone may change from the source image due to the Image Adjustment. In that case, set
Image Adjustment to None.
Reduce Show-through
Use this function to reduce show-through in duplex documents or lighten the base color in recycled
paper and other colored paper when scanning documents.
OFF
Show-through will not be reduced.
ON
Select this to reduce show-through in duplex documents or lighten the base color. It is
recommended that you normally select this setting.
Important
• Reduce Show-through can be set when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of
the Preferences dialog box and Document or Magazine is selected for Image Adjustment.
Unsharp Mask
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image when scanning photos.
OFF
Unsharp Mask will not be applied.
ON
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image. It is recommended that you normally
select this setting.
Descreen
Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where
uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are
scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect.
OFF
Moire will not be reduced.
ON
Reduces moire. It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
Note
• Even if Descreen is set to ON, some moire effects may remain if Unsharp Mask is set to ON. In
that case, set Unsharp Mask to OFF.
None
Dust and scratches will not be reduced.
Low
Select this to reduce small dust particles and scratches. Large ones may remain.
615
Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Select this to reduce large dust particles and scratches; however, evidence of the reduction
process may remain or delicate parts of the image may be removed.
Important
• This function may not be effective for some types of photos.
Note
• It is recommended that you select None when scanning printed materials.
Fading Correction
Use this function to correct photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast. "Colorcast" is a
phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong
colors.
None
Fading Correction will not be applied.
Low
Select this to correct a small amount of fading and colorcast.
Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Select this to correct a large amount of fading and colorcast. This can affect the tone of the image.
Important
• You can set Fading Correction after preview.
• You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
• Correction may not be applied properly if the scan area is too small.
Grain Correction
Use this function to reduce graininess (roughness) in photos taken with high-speed or sensitized film.
None
Graininess will not be reduced.
Low
Select this when the photo is slightly grainy.
Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Select this when the photo is very grainy. This can affect the gradation and sharpness of the
image.
Important
• Correction may not be applied properly if the scan area is too small.
616
When you set the Gutter Shadow Correction setting in the preview image, the result will be reflected.
Preview the effects before scanning, as results vary depending on the type of document and how it is
pressed.
None
Gutter shadow will not be corrected.
Low
Select this when the effect level is too strong with the medium setting.
Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Select this when the effect level is too weak with the medium setting.
Important
• You can set Gutter Shadow Correction after preview.
• Do not place objects that weigh 4.4 lbs (2.0 kg) or more on the platen. Also, do not press on the
document with a force exceeding 4.4 lbs (2.0 kg). If you press heavily, the scanner may not work
correctly or you might break the glass.
• Align the document with the edge of the Platen. If not, the shadow will not be corrected properly.
• Shadows may not be corrected properly depending on the document. If the page background is not
white, shadows may not be detected correctly or may not be detected at all.
• While scanning, press down on the spine with the same amount of pressure you used to preview
the scan. If the binding part is not even, the shadow will not be corrected properly.
• How to place the document depends on your model and the document to be scanned.
Note
• Cover the document with black cloth if white spots, streaks, or colored patterns appear in scan
results due to ambient light entering between the document and the Platen.
• If the shadow is not corrected properly, adjust the cropping frame (scan area) on the preview
image.
617
Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)
618
Color Adjustment Buttons
The Color Adjustment Buttons allow you to make fine corrections to the image brightness and color tones
including adjustments to the image's overall brightness or contrast and adjustments to its highlight and
shadow values (histogram) or balance (tone curve).
Important
• The Color Adjustment Buttons are not available when you select Color Matching on the Color
Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Note
• Selectable settings depend on Color Mode settings.
• When you adjust the image via the Color Adjustment Buttons, the results will be reflected in the preview
image.
(Saturation/Color Balance)
Adjust the saturation (vividness) and color tone of the image. Use this function to brighten colors that
have faded with time or due to colorcast. "Colorcast" is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the
entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.
(Brightness/Contrast)
Adjust the brightness and contrast of the image. If the image is too dark or too bright, or if the image
quality is flat due to lack of contrast, you can adjust the levels of brightness and contrast.
619
(Histogram)
A histogram allows you to see the data concentration at each brightness level of an image. You can
specify the brightest level (highlight) and darkest level (shadow) within an image, cut the levels and
expand the middle of the tonal range of the image.
Adjusting Histogram
(Final Review)
Make a final check of color adjustments. The final synthesized tone curve and the histogram derived
from the subsequent image processing will be displayed. There are no settings to make in this screen.
• For a color image, select a color in Channel to check either Red, Green, or Blue, or select Master
to check three colors together.
• If you place the cursor on the preview image, the portion will be enlarged and its RGB values (only
L when Color Mode is Grayscale) before and after the adjustments will be displayed.
(Threshold)
Set the boundary (threshold) at which black and white are divided. By adjusting the threshold level, you
can sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers.
Setting Threshold
Custom
You can name and save a set of tone curve and threshold settings of the Color Adjustment Buttons.
Select Add/Delete... from the pull-down menu; when Color Mode is set to anything but Black and
White, the Add/Delete Tone Curve Settings dialog box opens; when Color Mode is Black and
White, the Add/Delete Threshold Settings dialog box opens.
620
Enter Setting Name and click Add; the name appears in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold
Settings List. Click Save to save.
To delete an item, select it in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List and click Delete.
Click Save to save the settings displayed in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List.
You can load and apply the saved tone curve/threshold settings to a preview image. To load the
settings, select the saved item from the pull-down menu.
Note
• Save up to 20 items.
Defaults
Reset all adjustments (saturation/color balance, brightness/contrast, histogram, and tone curve).
621
Preferences Dialog Box
In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to ScanGear (scanner driver) functions via
the Scanner, Preview, Scan, and Color Settings tabs.
Click Preferences... in the ScanGear screen to open the Preferences dialog box.
Scanner Tab
Allows you to set the quiet mode, specify the folder in which to save images temporarily, and set the
music file to play during or at the end of a scan.
Preview Tab
Allows you to select what to do with Preview when ScanGear is started, how to display cropping frames
after previewing images, and the cropping size for thumbnails of scanned documents.
Scan Tab
Allows you to select what to do with ScanGear after scanning image.
622
Scanner Tab
On the Scanner tab, you can specify the following settings.
Important
• Available functions and settings vary depending on your scanner or printer.
Note
• If the machine is off or bi-directional communication is disabled, a message may appear because
the computer cannot collect the machine status. In that case, click OK to exit ScanGear (scanner
driver).
Auto Power On
Select Enable to turn on the machine automatically when data is received.
Important
• When using a network compatible model by connecting to a network, the power does not turn
off automatically even if Auto Power Off is set.
623
Quiet Settings
The silent function allows you to reduce the operating noise of this machine. Use this when you wish to
reduce the operating noise such as when scanning or printing at night.
Note
• You can set the quiet mode from the operation panel of the machine, the printer driver, or
ScanGear.
No matter how the setting is made, it applies to operations from the operation panel of the machine
or when printing/scanning from a computer, etc.
• Scanning or printing may take longer than usual when this function is used.
Set the Start time and End time during which quiet mode is to be activated.
Important
• The time specified in Start time and in End time must be different.
• If your scanner or printer does not support fax functions, quiet mode is not applied to
operations (copy, direct print, etc.) performed directly from the machine even if the hours are
specified.
Sound Settings
You can set the machine to play music during/at the end of a scan.
Select the Play Music During Scanning or Play Sound When Scanning is Completed checkbox,
then click Browse... and specify a sound file.
624
Calibration Settings
When you set Execute at Every Scan to ON, the scanner will be calibrated every time before
previewing and scanning, to reproduce correct color tones in scanned images.
Note
• Even when Execute at Every Scan is set to OFF, the scanner may be calibrated automatically in
some cases (such as immediately after you turn the machine on).
• Calibration may take time depending on your computer.
625
Preview Tab
On the Preview tab, you can specify the following settings.
The Color Adjustment Button settings, the Toolbar settings, and the Advanced Mode tab settings
are also saved.
None
No preview image will be displayed at startup.
Note
• Select None if you do not want to save the preview image.
None
No cropping frame will be displayed after previewing.
626
Larger
Displays 105 % (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard size.
Standard
The standard size.
Smaller
Displays 95 % (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard size.
Note
• When you change the Cropping Size for Thumbnail View setting, the preview images will be
refreshed and cropped to the new size. As the preview images are refreshed, the color
adjustments and other settings applied to them are reset.
627
Scan Tab
On the Scan tab, you can specify the following settings.
Note
• Even if Do not close ScanGear automatically or Display the dialog to select next action is set,
some applications may not support it.
628
Color Settings Tab
On the Color Settings tab, you can specify the following settings.
Color Adjustment
Recommended
Select this to vividly reproduce the tone of a document on the screen. It is recommended that you
normally select this setting.
Color Matching
Select this to automatically match the scanner, monitor, and color printer colors, thus reducing time and
trouble to manually match the monitor and printer colors.
Source(Scanner)
Select scanner profile.
Target
Select target profile.
Monitor
Select this checkbox to display preview image with optimum correction for monitor.
Defaults
Returns to the default Color Matching settings.
Note
• The Color Adjustment Buttons on the Advanced Mode tab are not available when you select
Color Matching.
• This function is available when Color Mode is Color.
None
Select this to disable color correction provided by ScanGear (scanner driver).
629
Note
• Depending on your scanner or printer, this setting may not be available when scanning from the ADF
(Auto Document Feeder).
• You can select one when Color Mode is Color or Grayscale.
• Color Matching is available when ScanGear, monitor, color management-compliant application (such as
Adobe Photoshop), and printer are set up correctly.
Refer to the corresponding manual for the monitor, printer, and application settings.
Monitor Gamma
By setting the gamma value of a monitor, you can adjust the input data to the brightness characteristics
of the monitor. Adjust the value if your monitor's gamma value does not match the default value set in
ScanGear, and the colors of the original image are not accurately reflected in the monitor.
Note
• Refer to the manual of your monitor to check its gamma value. If it is not written in the manual,
contact the manufacturer.
630
Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)
Learn how to place items on the platen or ADF (Auto Document Feeder) of your scanner or printer. Place
items correctly according to the type of item to be scanned. Otherwise, items may not be scanned correctly.
Important
• Do not place objects on the document cover. When you open the document cover, the objects may fall
into your scanner or printer, resulting in malfunction.
• Close the document cover when scanning.
• Do not touch the operation panel buttons or LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) when opening/closing the
document cover. May result in unintended operation.
Important
• When scanning by specifying the paper size in IJ Scan Utility or ScanGear (scanner driver), align an
upper corner of the item with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the platen.
• Photos that have been cut to various shapes and items smaller than 1.2 inches (3 cm) square cannot
be cropped accurately when scanning.
• Reflective disc labels may not be scanned as expected.
For Photos, Postcards, Business Cards, or BD/DVD/CD For Magazines, Newspapers, or Documents
Important
• Refer to "Loading Originals" for your model from
Important
Home of the Online Manual for details on the
• Large items (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be portions in which items cannot be scanned.
placed away from the edges/arrow (alignment mark) of
631
the platen may be saved as PDF files. To save in a
format other than PDF, scan by specifying the data
format.
Note
• You can place up to 12 items.
• You can place up to four items when the Compress
scanned images upon transfer checkbox is selected
in the Settings dialog box of IJ Scan Utility.
• With network connection, items may not be scanned
correctly when five or more items are placed. In that
case, reduce the number of items placed on the platen
to four or less, then scan again.
• Positions of slanted items (10 degrees or less) are
corrected automatically.
632
2. Place the documents on the ADF, then adjust the document guides to the width of the
documents.
Insert the documents face-up until a beep sounds.
Note
• When scanning duplex documents, place the front sides facing up. They will not be scanned in
the correct page order if placed the other way around.
633
Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)
"Cropping" is the act of selecting the area you want to keep in an image and discarding the rest when
scanning it.
On the Basic Mode tab and Advanced Mode tab, you can specify cropping frames (scan areas) on the
image(s) displayed in the Preview area of the screen.
When you perform a scan, each area specified with a cropping frame will be scanned as a separate image.
Note
• In whole image view, you can specify multiple cropping frames on the preview image.
• Refer to "Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window" for your model from Home of the
Online Manual for how to adjust cropping frames with IJ Scan Utility.
No cropping frame is specified. You can drag the mouse over a thumbnail to specify a cropping frame.
An active cropping frame is automatically specified around the preview image. You can drag the cropping
frame in the Preview area to specify the area.
Note
• You can change the auto crop setting in the Preferences dialog box. Refer to Cropping Frame on
Previewed Images in "Preview Tab" for details.
In thumbnail view:
Output size, image corrections, and other settings on the Basic Mode tab or Advanced Mode tab
will be applied.
634
In whole image view:
Represents an unselected cropping frame. The settings on the Basic Mode tab or Advanced Mode
tab will not be applied.
The cursor will change into (Arrow) when it is positioned over a cropping frame. If you
click and drag the mouse in the direction of the arrow, the cropping frame will expand or contract
accordingly.
The cursor will change into (Crosshair Arrow) when it is positioned within a cropping frame. Click and
drag the mouse to move the entire cropping frame.
Note
• On the Advanced Mode tab, you can specify the cropping frame size by entering the values into
635
In whole image view:
Click and drag the mouse in a space outside the existing cropping frame to create a new cropping frame
in the Preview area. The new cropping frame will be the active cropping frame, and the old cropping frame
will be the unselected cropping frame.
You can create multiple cropping frames and apply different scan settings to each cropping frame.
You can also select multiple cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key.
If you select multiple cropping frames and change the settings on a tab at the right of ScanGear, the
settings will be applied to all the selected cropping frames.
When you create a new cropping frame, it retains the settings of the latest cropping frame.
Note
• Create up to 12 cropping frames.
• Scanning takes longer than usual when multiple cropping frames are selected.
To delete a cropping frame, click an area outside the cropping frame on an image.
636
In whole image view:
To delete a cropping frame, select it and click (Remove Cropping Frame) on the Toolbar.
Alternatively, press the Delete key.
When there are multiple cropping frames, all the selected cropping frames (active cropping frame and
selected cropping frames) are deleted simultaneously.
637
General Notes (Scanner Driver)
ScanGear (scanner driver) is subject to the following restrictions. Keep these points in mind when using it.
• ScanGear cannot be opened in multiple applications at the same time. Within an application,
ScanGear cannot be opened for the second time when it is already open.
• Be sure to close the ScanGear window before closing the application.
• When using a network compatible model by connecting to a network, the machine cannot be
accessed from multiple computers at the same time.
• When using a network compatible model by connecting to a network, scanning takes longer than
usual.
• Make sure that you have adequate disk space available when scanning large images at high
resolutions. For example, at least 300 MB of free space is required to scan an A4 document at 600
dpi in full-color.
• ScanGear and WIA driver cannot be used at the same time.
• Do not enter the computer into sleep or hibernate state during scanning.
638
• Images may not be scanned correctly in some applications. In that case, increase the operating
system's virtual memory and retry.
• When image size is too large (such as when scanning large images at high resolution), your computer
may not respond or the progress bar may remain at 0 % depending on the application. In that case,
cancel the action (for example by clicking Cancel on the progress bar), then increase the operating
system's virtual memory or reduce the image size/resolution and retry. Alternatively, scan the image
via IJ Scan Utility first, then save and import it into the application.
639
Useful Information on Scanning
Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window
Resolution
Data Formats
Color Matching
640
Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window
"Cropping" is the act of selecting the area you want to keep in an image and discarding the rest when
scanning it.
In the Image Stitch window, you can specify a cropping frame on the image displayed in the Preview area.
Note
• Refer to "Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for
how to adjust cropping frames with ScanGear (scanner driver).
When you perform a scan, the image in the area specified with the cropping frame will be scanned.
The cursor will change into (Arrow) when it is positioned over a cropping frame. Click and
drag the mouse to expand or contract the cropping frame.
The cursor will change into (Crosshair Arrow) when it is positioned within a cropping frame. Click and
drag the mouse to move the entire cropping frame.
641
Resolution
The data in the image you have scanned is a collection of dots carrying information about brightness and
color. The density of these dots is called "resolution," and resolution will determine the amount of detail your
image contains. The unit of resolution is dots per inch (dpi). Dpi is the number of dots per inch (2.5 cm).
The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image; the lower the resolution (value), the less
detail.
IJ Scan Utility:
Resolution on the (Scanning from a Computer) tab of the Settings dialog box
Appropriate
Item Type Use Color Mode
Resolution
Copying
Color 300 dpi
(Printing)
Color, Grayscale, or
Copying 300 dpi
Black and White
Text document (document or
Color, Grayscale, or
magazine) Attaching to e-mail 150 dpi
Black and White
642
Important
• If you double the resolution, the data size of the scanned image quadruples. If the file is too large, the
processing speed will slow down significantly, and you will experience inconvenience such as lack of
memory. Set the minimum required resolution according to the use of the image.
Note
• When you will be printing the scanned image by enlarging it, scan by setting a higher resolution than
the recommended one above.
643
Data Formats
You can select a data format when saving scanned images. You should specify the most suitable data
format according to how you want to use the image on which application.
Available data formats vary by application and operating system (Windows or Mac OS).
A data format often used on websites and for digital camera images.
JPEG features high compression rates. JPEG images slightly degrade every time they are saved, and
cannot be returned to their original state.
JPEG is not available for black and white images.
A data format featuring a relatively high compatibility between various computers and applications.
Note
• Some TIFF files are incompatible.
• IJ Scan Utility supports the following TIFF file formats.
It can be used on various computers and operating systems, and fonts can be embedded as well; therefore,
people in different environments can exchange the files without being aware of the differences.
644
Color Matching
"Color Matching" is the act of making adjustments so that the color tones match between the original item,
the monitor display, and the color printout. On your scanner or printer, the color tones are adjusted as
shown below.
The image's color space is converted from the scanner's color space to sRGB by ScanGear.
When displaying on a monitor, the image's color space is converted from sRGB to the monitor's color space
based on the operating system's monitor settings and the application's working space settings.
When printing, the image's color space is converted from sRGB to the printer's color space based on the
application's print settings and the printer driver's settings.
645
IJ Network Scanner Selector EX Menu and Setting Screen
IJ Network Scanner Selector EX allows you to select the scanners or printers to be used for scanning or
printing over a network from your computer or the operation panel.
After installation, IJ Network Scanner Selector EX appears in the notification area on the desktop.
Important
• If you cannot scan over a network, download and upgrade to the latest MP Drivers from our website.
• While IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is enabled, it periodically transmits packets to check whether it
can communicate with your scanner or printer over the network. When using the computer in a network
environment other than the one used to set up your scanner or printer, disable IJ Network Scanner
Selector EX.
Note
• If the icon is not displayed in the notification area on the desktop, follow the procedure below to start.
• Windows 8.1/Windows 8:
If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm,
then search for "IJ Network Scanner Selector EX".
From the Start menu, click All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Network Scanner Selector EX >
IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.
Menu
Displays a menu when you right-click (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX) in the notification area on the
desktop.
Disable Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX / Enable Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX
Enables or disables IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.
When you select Disable Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX, you will not be able to scan over
a network from the operation panel.
Enabled: , Disabled:
Important
• When using a model with which you cannot scan over a network from the operation panel, you
cannot scan using the operation panel even if this setting is enabled.
Settings...
The Scan-from-PC Settings screen appears. You can select the model you want to use.
About
Displays the version information.
In the displayed dialog box, you can change the language to be used in the application. The change
will be reflected after restarting the computer.
646
Exit
Exits IJ Network Scanner Selector EX; (Enabled) or (Disabled) disappears from the
notification area on the desktop.
Your scanner or printer must be selected with IJ Network Scanner Selector EX before scanning over a
network.
Scanners
MAC addresses of the scanners or printers that can be used over the network are displayed.
You can select one scanner or printer per model. Selecting a scanner or printer automatically enables
scanning from the operation panel.
Instructions
Opens this guide.
Scan-from-Operation-Panel Settings
The Scan-from-Operation-Panel Settings screen appears. You can select up to three scanners and
printers in total for scanning from the operation panel. You can scan items using the operation panel
of the selected scanner or printer, and send the scanned images to your computer over a network.
Important
• When using a model with which you cannot scan over a network from the operation panel, that
model does not appear in Scanners and the setting is not available.
Scanners
MAC addresses of the scanners or printers that can be used over the network are displayed.
You can select up to three scanners and printers in total at the same time. Selecting a scanner or
printer automatically enables scanning from the operation panel.
Instructions
Opens this guide.
Important
• When using a model with which you cannot scan over a network from the operation panel, Scan-
from-Operation-Panel Settings may appear in the Scan-from-PC Settings screen; however, the
setting is not available.
Note
• If your scanner or printer does not appear, check the following, click OK to close the screen, then
reopen it and try selecting again.
• MP Drivers is installed
• Network settings of your scanner or printer is completed after installing the MP Drivers
647
• Network communication between your scanner or printer and computer is enabled
If your scanner or printer still does not appear, refer to "Problems with Network Communication" for
your model from Home of the Online Manual.
• You do not need to use this software when scanning via USB. Refer to "Uninstalling IJ Network
Scanner Selector EX" to delete it. You can scan via USB even if it is not deleted.
648
Uninstalling IJ Network Scanner Selector EX
Follow the procedure below to uninstall IJ Network Scanner Selector EX from your computer.
Important
• You cannot scan over a network after uninstalling IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.
• Log into a user account with administrator privilege.
• Windows 8.1/Windows 8:
1. Click the Settings charm > Control Panel > Programs > Programs and
Features.
Note
• If the User Account Control screen appears, click Continue.
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Programs > Programs and
Features.
Note
• If the User Account Control screen appears, click Continue.
• Windows XP:
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
Note
• When the message prompting you to restart your computer appears, click OK to restart your
computer.
649
Other Scanning Methods
Scanning with WIA Driver
Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only)
650
Scanning with WIA Driver
You can scan an item from a WIA (Windows Image Acquisition)-compliant application.
WIA is a driver model implemented in Windows XP or later. It allows you to scan items without using an
application.
The procedure varies depending on the application. The following procedures are examples only.
Important
• In Windows XP, you cannot scan using the WIA driver via a network connection.
• Some applications do not support continuous scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder). Refer to
the application's manual for details.
• Follow these steps to enable scanning over a network.
The setting may have been completed already depending on your environment. In that case, Uninstall
appears.
• Windows 8.1/Windows 8: Select the Search charm, then click Network displayed by searching
for "Network".
• Windows 7: From the Start menu, select Computer > Network.
• Windows Vista: From the Start menu, select Network.
2. Right-click XXX_MAC address (where "XXX" is the model name) in the displayed screen, then
select Install.
2. Select New on the File menu of "Windows Fax and Scan," then click Scan....
The scan setting screen appears.
Note
• If you have more than one scanner or printer, a scanner selection screen may appear. Double-
click the scanner you want to use.
• For USB connection: Canon XXX series (where "XXX" is the model name)
• For network connection: XXX series_MAC address (where "XXX" is the model name)
651
Profile
Select Photo (Default) or Documents according to the type of item to be scanned. To save a
new Profile, select Add profile.... You can specify the details in the Add New Profile dialog box.
Source
Select a scanner type. To scan from the platen, select Flatbed. To scan from the ADF, select
Feeder (Scan one side).
Paper size
Select the paper size. Paper size can be set only when Source is Feeder (Scan one side).
Color format
Select the color mode in which to scan the item.
File type
Select a data format from JPEG, BMP, PNG, and TIFF.
Resolution (DPI)
Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi.
Resolution
Note
• When using the scanner or printer with network connection, the following resolutions can be
specified.
150 dpi / 300 dpi / 600 dpi
Brightness
Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the
image. You can also enter a value (-100 to 100).
Contrast
Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image,
thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus
sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-100 to 100).
Important
• When using the scanner or printer with network connection, you cannot specify Brightness,
Contrast, and Preview or scan images as separate files.
Important
• With network connection, scan without preview when scanning documents from the ADF. If you
preview, place the document again and scan.
If there is document left in the ADF after previewing, press the OK button on the operation
panel and remove the document.
5. Click Scan.
Scanning starts, then the scanned image appears in the application.
652
Scanning with WIA Driver 1.0
The following is an example of scanning using "Paint."
2. Click From scanner or camera from the File menu of Paint. (Select the command to
scan an item in the application.)
Note
• If you have more than one scanner or printer, a scanner selection screen may appear. Double-
click the scanner you want to use.
• For USB connection: Canon XXX series (where "XXX" is the model name)
• For network connection: XXX series_MAC address (where "XXX" is the model name)
3. Select the paper source and type of picture according to the item to be scanned.
To scan from the platen, select Flatbed for Paper source. To scan from the ADF, select Document
Feeder.
Select the type of picture from Color picture, Grayscale picture, Black and white picture or text,
and Custom Settings.
Note
• When using the scanner or printer with network connection, the options for the type of picture
may differ from those displayed with USB connection.
• To scan with the values previously set in Adjust the quality of the scanned picture, select
Custom Settings.
• Selecting Document Feeder for Paper source enables you to select Page size.
4. Click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture and set the preferences as required.
Brightness
Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the
image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Contrast
Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image,
thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus
sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Resolution (DPI)
Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi.
Resolution
Note
• When using the scanner or printer with network connection, the following resolutions can be
specified.
150 dpi / 300 dpi / 600 dpi
653
Picture type
Select the type of scan you want for your item.
Reset
Click to restore the original settings.
Important
• When using the scanner or printer with network connection, you cannot specify Brightness and
Contrast.
Important
• With network connection, scan without preview when scanning documents from the ADF. If you
preview, place the document again and scan.
If there is document left in the ADF after previewing, press the OK button on the operation
panel and remove the document.
6. Click Scan.
Scanning starts, then the scanned image appears in the application.
654
Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only)
You can scan images via the Control Panel of Windows XP using the WIA driver.
Important
• When using the scanner or printer with network connection, you cannot scan using the WIA driver.
2. Click Printers and Other Hardware > Scanners and Cameras, then double-click Canon
XXX series (where "XXX" is the model name).
The Scanner and Camera Wizard dialog box appears.
3. Click Next.
Note
• To scan with the values previously set in Custom settings, select Custom.
• Selecting Document Feeder for Paper source enables you to select Page size.
655
Brightness
Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the image.
You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Contrast
Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image,
thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus
sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Resolution (DPI)
Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi.
Resolution
Picture type
Select the type of scan you want for your item.
Reset
Click to restore the original settings.
656
Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)
Learn how to place items on the platen or ADF (Auto Document Feeder) of your scanner or printer. Place
items correctly according to the type of item to be scanned. Otherwise, items may not be scanned correctly.
Important
• Do not place objects on the document cover. When you open the document cover, the objects may fall
into your scanner or printer, resulting in malfunction.
• Close the document cover when scanning.
• Do not touch the operation panel buttons or LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) monitor when opening/closing
the document cover. May result in unintended operation.
Important
• When scanning by specifying the paper size in IJ Scan Utility or ScanGear (scanner driver), align an
upper corner of the item with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the platen.
• Photos that have been cut to various shapes and items smaller than 1.2 inches (3 cm) square cannot
be cropped accurately when scanning.
• Reflective disc labels may not be scanned as expected.
For Photos, Postcards, Business Cards, or BD/DVD/CD For Magazines, Newspapers, or Documents
Important
• Refer to "Loading Originals" for your model from
Important
Home of the Online Manual for details on the
• Large items (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be portions in which items cannot be scanned.
placed away from the edges/arrow (alignment mark) of
657
the platen may be saved as PDF files. To save in a
format other than PDF, scan by specifying the data
format.
Note
• You can place up to 12 items.
• Positions of slanted items (10 degrees or less) are
corrected automatically.
2. Place the documents on the ADF, then adjust the document guides to the width of the
documents.
Insert the documents face-up until a beep sounds.
658
659
Scanning from the Operation Panel of the Machine
Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation Panel of the
Machine Basic
Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Network Scan Settings
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using IJ Scan
Utility
660
Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation
Panel of the Machine
Before forwarding scanned data to the computer, confirm the following:
If MP Drivers are not yet installed, install MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our
website.
Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable while the machine is in operation, or when the computer is in the
sleep or standby mode.
If you perform scanning via a network connection, make sure that all the required settings have been
specified.
• The destination and the file name are specified in Canon IJ Scan Utility.
You can specify the destination and the file name in Canon IJ Scan Utility. For details on settings of
Canon IJ Scan Utility:
If you have forwarded the scanned data to a computer, the Scan standby screen is displayed.
If you change the destination or scan settings, press the Menu button, then go to step 3.
3. Use the button to select Save to, then press the OK button.
4. Use the button to select the computer to forward the scanned data, then press the OK
button.
If you forward the data to the USB-connected computer, select Local (USB).
661
If you forward the data to the LAN-connected computer, select a name of the computer to forward the
scanned data.
Note
• If you select Search again and press the OK button, the machine starts searching for the
connected computers again.
• When you forward the scanned data to the computer using WSD (one of the network protocols
supported in Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, and Windows Vista), select Active for WSD
scan from dev. on WSD setting on Other settings in LAN settings under Device settings.
5. Make sure that Document type is selected, then press the OK button.
6. Use the button to select the document type, then press the OK button.
Note
• When you forward the scanned data to the computer searched using WSD, you cannot select the
document type.
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
Auto scan
The machine detects the type of the originals automatically and the image is forwarded in the
optimized size, resolution and data format.
Important
• Load originals properly according to their type; otherwise, some originals may not be scanned
properly.
Loading Originals
• Documents smaller than 5 inches x 7 inches (127 mm x 178 mm) such as a paperback with its
backbone cut off
• Originals on thin white paper
• When you scan originals from the ADF, it may take longer to scan the first page.
Document
Scans the original on the platen glass or in the ADF applying the optimized settings for scanning a
document.
Photo
Scans the original on the platen glass as a photo data applying the optimized settings for scanning a
photo.
662
7. Specify the scan settings.
Specify each scan setting in order.
Use the button to select a setting item, then press the OK button.
Use the button to adjust each setting item, then press the OK button. The next setting item is
displayed.
Note
• For details on each setting item:
Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
The Scan standby screen is displayed after all the settings have been specified.
9. Press the Color button for color scanning, or the Black button for black & white scanning.
Note
• When you forward the scanned data to the computer using WSD, press the Color button.
• If the original is not loaded properly, a message is displayed on the LCD. Load the original on the
platen glass or in the ADF according to the scan settings.
The machine starts scanning and scanned data is forwarded to the computer.
◦ When you select JPEG or TIFF for Data format, the machine starts scanning and scanned
data is forwarded to the computer.
◦ When you select PDF or Compact PDF for Data format, the confirmation screen asking you if
you continue scanning is displayed after scanning is complete.
Selecting Yes and pressing the OK button allow you to scan the originals continuously. Load
the next document on the platen glass and start scanning.
By selecting No and pressing the OK button, scanning is complete and the data is forwarded
to the computer in one PDF file.
Scanned data is forwarded to the computer according to the settings specified in Canon IJ Scan Utility.
Remove the original on the platen glass or from the document output slot after scanning is complete.
Important
• If the scanning result with Auto scan is not satisfactory, select Document or Photo according to
the original in step 6, then specify the scan size or other setting items in step 7.
663
When the program selection screen is displayed:
• If you are using Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista:
The program selection screen may be displayed after pressing the Color or Black button. In this
case, select Canon IJ Scan Utility and click OK.
The program selection screen may be displayed after pressing the Color or Black button for the first
time. In this case, specify Canon IJ Scan Utility as the application software to use, select Always
use this program for this action, then click OK. From the next time, Canon IJ Scan Utility is
automatically started.
If you want to scan originals with advanced settings, or if you want to edit
or print the scanned images:
If you scan originals from a computer using My Image Garden, My Image Garden enables you to edit the
scanned images, such as optimizing or trimming.
In addition, you can edit or print the scanned images using the compatible application software to make
better use of them.
Scanning Photos and Documents
Note
• You can use a WIA-compliant application software and the Control Panel (Windows XP only) to scan
originals with this machine.
For details:
664
Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the
Machine
You can change the scan settings such as the scan size, resolution, or data format.
Use the button to select a setting item, then press the OK button.
Use the button to adjust each setting item, then press the OK button. The next setting item is
displayed.
Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
• When Auto scan is selected for Document type to forward the scanned data to the computer
• When you forward the scanned data to the computer using WSD (one of the network protocols
supported in Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, and Windows Vista)
• Some setting items cannot be specified in combination with other setting items, the document type, or
the destination to save the data.
• The settings of the scan size, resolution, and data format are retained even if the machine is turned off.
• When you forward the scanned data to the computer, you can specify the destination and file name
using Canon IJ Scan Utility.
• Scan size
Ex:
If you select Auto scan(A) -Singl, the machine detects the page size automatically and starts scanning.
If you select Auto scan(A) -Multi to save to the computer, you can scan several originals at a time.
Note
• When Legal is selected, load the original in the ADF.
• When 4"x6", 10x15, 5"x7", 13x18, or Auto scan(A) -Singl is selected, load the original on the
platen glass.
• Some of setting items are not available depending on the country or region of purchase.
• Data format
Ex:
665
• Scan resolution
Ex:
666
Network Scan Settings
You can connect your scanner or printer to a network to share it among multiple computers or scan images
into a specified computer.
Important
• Multiple users cannot scan at the same time.
Note
• Complete the network settings of your scanner or printer beforehand from the Setup CD-ROM or by
following the instructions on the web page.
• With network connection, scanning takes longer than USB connection.
Important
• If the product you want to use is changed with IJ Network Scanner Selector EX, the product used for
scanning with IJ Scan Utility changes as well. The product for scanning from the operation panel also
changes.
If your scanner or printer is not selected in IJ Scan Utility, check that it is selected with IJ Network
Scanner Selector EX.
Refer to "IJ Network Scanner Selector EX Menu and Setting Screen" for your model from Home of
the Online Manual for details.
• To scan from the operation panel, specify your scanner or printer with IJ Network Scanner Selector
EX beforehand.
If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is running, (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX) appears in the
notification area on the desktop. Click to check the hidden icons as well.
Note
• If the icon is not displayed in the notification area on the desktop, follow the procedure below to
start.
• Windows 8.1/Windows 8:
If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search
charm, then search for "IJ Network Scanner Selector EX".
From the Start menu, click All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Network Scanner
Selector EX > IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.
667
The icon appears in the notification area on the desktop, and the Scan-from-PC Settings screen
appears. In that case, skip ahead to Step 3.
2. In the notification area on the desktop, right-click (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX),
then select Settings....
The Scan-from-PC Settings screen appears.
Important
• If multiple scanners exist on the network, multiple model names appear. In that case, you can
select one scanner per model.
4. Click OK.
Note
• The scanner selected in the Scan-from-PC Settings screen will be automatically selected in the Scan-
from-Operation-Panel Settings screen as well.
2. Select "Canon XXX series Network" (where "XXX" is the model name) for Product
Name.
668
Important
• Set IJ Scan Utility to use your scanner or printer via a network connection beforehand.
If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is running, (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX) appears in the
notification area on the desktop. Click to check the hidden icons as well.
Note
• If the icon is not displayed in the notification area on the desktop, follow the procedure below to
start.
• Windows 8.1/Windows 8:
Click IJ Network Scanner Selector EX on the Start screen.
If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search
charm, then search for "IJ Network Scanner Selector EX".
From the Start menu, click All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Network Scanner
Selector EX > IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.
The icon appears in the notification area on the desktop, and the Scan-from-PC Settings screen
appears. In that case, skip ahead to Step 3.
2. In the notification area on the desktop, right-click (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX),
then select Settings....
The Scan-from-PC Settings screen appears.
Note
• When multiple scanners are connected via a network, you can select up to three scanners.
Note
• If your scanner or printer does not appear, check the following, click OK to close the screen, then
reopen it and try selecting again.
• MP Drivers is installed
• Network settings of your scanner or printer is completed after installing the MP Drivers
• Network communication between your scanner or printer and computer is enabled
669
If your scanner or printer still does not appear, refer to "Problems with Network Communication" for
your model from Home of the Online Manual.
670
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel
Using IJ Scan Utility
IJ Scan Utility allows you to specify how to respond when scanning from the operation panel.
Note
• The screens for scanning with Auto Scan from the operation panel are used as examples in the
following descriptions.
2. Click Settings....
3. Select a scan mode on the (Scanning from the Operation Panel) tab.
671
Note
• Refer to the following for details.
672
6. Select the application you want to start after scanning in Application Settings.
673
7. Click OK.
The responses will be executed according to the specified settings when you start scanning from the
operation panel.
674
Faxing
675
Preparing for Faxing
Connect the machine to the telephone line and set up the machine before using the faxing functions. Then
specify the basic setting such as sender information, date/time, and daylight saving time.
Important
• If the Power Disconnects Unexpectedly:
If there is a power failure or if you accidentally unplug the power cord, the date/time settings will be
reset.
• All faxes stored in the machine's memory, such as unsent and received faxes, will be lost.
If the power disconnects, the following will apply:
• You will not be able to send or receive faxes, make copies, or scan originals.
• When you are connecting the telephone, whether or not you can use it depends upon your
telephone line or telephone.
Note
• You can set the fax setting according to the instruction on the LCD.
Easy setup
If you set up according to the instruction on the LCD, the receive mode is set to TEL priority mode
or Fax only mode. To receive faxes with DRPD or Network switch, change the receive mode.
676
Connecting the Telephone Line
The connection method differs depending on your telephone line.
• If you connect the machine to wall telephone line directly/If you connect the machine with the xDSL
splitter:
Basic Connection
If the connection is incorrect, the machine cannot send/receive faxes. Connect the machine correctly.
Important
• Do not connect fax machines and/or telephones in parallel (US and Canada only).
If two or more fax machines and/or telephones are connected in parallel, the following problems may
occur and the machine may not operate properly.
• If you pick up the handset of the telephone that is connected in parallel during fax transmission or
reception, the fax image may be corrupted or a communication error may occur.
• Such services as Caller ID, etc. may not operate properly on the telephone.
If you cannot avoid parallel connections, set the receive mode to TEL priority mode, understanding
that the above problems may occur. You will only be able to receive faxes manually.
Basic Connection
Make sure that the machine is turned off, connect one end of supplied telephone line cable to the
telephone line jack near the "LINE" mark of the machine, then connect the other end to the telephone line
jack on the wall or to the telephone line jack of the xDSL splitter.
When you connect the telephone to the machine, make sure that the machine is turned off, connect one
end of the modular cable to the external device jack near the "EXT." mark of the machine, then connect
the other end to the telephone line jack of the telephone.
677
Important
• Be sure to connect the telephone line before the machine is turned on.
If you connect the telephone line when the machine is turned on, turn the machine off and unplug the
power cord. Wait for 1 minute then connect the telephone line and power plug.
Note
• Refer to Rear View for the position of the telephone line jack and the external device jack.
• Before connecting a telephone or answering machine, remove the Telephone connector cap.
These are examples and could not be guaranteed to suit every connecting condition. For details, refer to
the instruction manual supplied with the network device (control devices such as an xDSL (Digital
Subscriber Line) modem or terminal adapter) you are connecting to this machine.
Note
• xDSL is the generic term for the high speed digital communication technology with telephone line
such as ADSL/HDSL/SDSL/VDSL.
D. Computer
H. TEL port
I. LINE port
678
Note
• When connecting to the xDSL line, select the same line type as you are subscribing to in
Telephone line type.
Setting the Telephone Line Type
• Connecting to an xDSL
C. Computer
Important
• When the splitter is not built-in to the modem, do not branch the telephone line before the splitter
(wall side). And also, do not connect splitters in parallel. The machine may not be able to operate
properly.
Note
• When connecting to the xDSL line, select the same line type as you are subscribing to in
Telephone line type.
For details on ISDN (Integrated Service Digital Network) connection and settings, refer to the manuals
supplied with your terminal adapter or dial-up router.
679
Setting the Telephone Line Type
Before using your machine, make sure you set the correct telephone line type for your telephone line. If you
are unsure of your telephone line type, contact your telephone company. For xDSL or ISDN connections,
contact the telephone company or service provider to confirm your line type.
Important
• For users in China
After plugging the power cord and turning on the machine, the telephone line type is selected
automatically. However, if the machine is connected to the control device such as an xDSL modem or
terminal adapter, the telephone line type may not be selected correctly.
For details on how to set the Telephone line type manually in China:
Setting the Telephone Line Type Manually in China
Note
• Telephone line type will not appear in countries or regions where Rotary pulse is not supported.
• You can print USER'S DATA LIST to check the current setting.
3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.
4. Use the button to select FAX user settings, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select Telephone line type, then press the OK button.
6. Use the button to select a telephone line type, then press the OK button.
Rotary pulse
Select when your telephone line type is pulse dialing.
Touch tone
Select when your telephone line type is tone dialing.
Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
680
Setting the Telephone Line Type Manually in China
This section describes the procedure to set the telephone line type manually in China.
3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.
4. Use the button to select FAX user settings, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select TEL line auto select, then press the OK button.
The current telephone line type is displayed.
Note
• If you do not need to change the telephone line type, press the FAX button to return to the Fax
standby screen.
7. Use the button to select a telephone line type, then press the OK button.
Rotary pulse
Select when your telephone line type is pulse dialing.
Touch tone
Select when your telephone line type is tone dialing.
Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
681
Setting the Receive Mode
Set the receiving operation (receiving mode).
Note
• The receiving operation procedure varies depending on the selected receive mode.
For details on receiving method depending on each receive mode:
Receiving Faxes
• If you want to use a single telephone line for faxes and voice calls, you need to connect a telephone or
an answering machine to the external device jack of this machine.
For details on how to connect the telephone or the answering machine to the machine:
Basic Connection
4. Use the button to select Receive mode set., then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select the receive mode, then press the OK button.
The confirmation screen asking whether to make advanced settings is displayed.
If you select Yes and press the OK button, you can specify the advanced settings of each receive
mode.
Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
682
About the Receive Mode
• Network switch may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase.
• Refer to Receiving Faxes for information on receiving faxes or the procedure for each receive
mode.
TEL priority When mainly receiving voice When a call incomes, the telephone will ring.
mode calls (with a telephone or Pick up the handset.
answering machine
If the call is a voice call, talk on the telephone.
connected to the machine):
If the call is a fax, hang up the handset after the machine starts
receiving the fax.
Note
• The telephone may not ring when a call incomes even if it is
connected to the machine, depending on the type or settings of
the telephone.
DRPD or When receiving voice calls When a call incomes, the telephone will ring. The machine detects a
Network (with a telephone or fax call by the fax ring pattern.
switch answering machine If the call is a fax, the machine will receive the fax automatically.
connected to the machine)
If the machine does not detect the fax ring pattern, the telephone will
and subscribing to a ring
continue ringing.
pattern detection service
provided by your telephone Note
company:
• The telephone may not ring when a call incomes even if it is
connected to the machine, depending on the type or settings of
the telephone.
Fax only When not receiving voice When a fax incomes, the machine will receive the fax automatically.
mode calls:
Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
◦ Manual/auto switch
683
If you select ON, the machine automatically receives faxes after the external device rang a
specified length of time.
You can specify the length of time until automatic reception is started.
◦ User-friendly RX
If you select ON, the machine automatically switches from telephone calling to fax reception by
detecting the fax signal (CNG signal) when you lift the handset of the telephone or the answering
machine answers. When you have an answering machine connected to the machine, select ON to
switch to fax reception automatically after the answering machine answers.
If you select OFF, the machine does not switch from telephone calling to fax reception
automatically even if the machine detects the fax signal (CNG signal). Select OFF if you want the
machine not to switch automatically during a call.
Note
• If you subscribe to Duplex Ringing service in Hong Kong, the number of times the external device
rings specified with Incoming ring in Fax only mode is available in TEL priority mode.
If you want to specify the number of times the external device rings in TEL priority mode, select
Fax only mode for Receive mode set. under FAX menu, specify the number of times the
external device rings with Incoming ring, then switch to TEL priority mode for Receive mode
set..
• If you subscribe to Duplex Ringing service in Hong Kong, we recommend that Manual/auto
switch be set to OFF.
You can specify the number of times the external device rings when incoming.
Sets the distinctive ring pattern of a call that the machine assumes is a fax call.
If you subscribe to a DRPD service, set the ring pattern to match the pattern assigned by your
telephone company.
◦ Incoming ring
You can specify the number of times the external device rings when incoming.
◦ Incoming ring
You can specify the number of times the external device rings when incoming.
684
Setting the DRPD Ring Pattern (US and Canada only)
If you have subscribed to a Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) service provided by your telephone
company, your telephone company will assign two or more telephone numbers with distinctive ring
patterns to your single telephone line, allowing you to have different numbers for fax calls and voice calls
using only one telephone line. Your machine will automatically monitor the ring pattern, and will
automatically receive the fax if the ring pattern is a fax call.
To use DRPD, follow the procedure below to set the fax ring pattern that matches the pattern assigned by
your telephone company.
Note
• Contact your local telephone company for detailed information on this service.
4. Use the button to select Receive mode set., then press the OK button.
7. Use the button to select DRPD: FAX ring pat., then press the OK button.
The DRPD: FAX ring pat. screen is displayed.
8. Use the button to select the ring pattern that your telephone company assigned to
your fax number, then press the OK button.
Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
685
Setting the Sender Information
You can set the sender information such as date/time, unit name, and unit fax/telephone number.
About the Sender Information
C. Unit name
E. Page number
Note
• You can print USER'S DATA LIST to confirm the sender information you have registered.
Summary of Reports and Lists
• When sending faxes in black & white, you can select whether to print the sender information inside or
outside the image area.
Specify the setting on TTI position in Adv. FAX settings under Fax settings.
Select the date print format on Date display format under Dev. user settings.
686
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.
3. Use the button to select Device settings, then press the OK button.
4. Use the button to select Dev. user settings, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select Date/time setting, then press the OK button.
You can set your machine to automatically change the time by registering the date and time that daylight
saving time (summer time) begins and ends.
Important
• Not all the latest information of all countries or regions is applied for DST setting by default. You
need to change the default setting according to the latest information of your country or region.
Note
• This setting may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase.
3. Use the button to select Device settings, then press the OK button.
687
4. Use the button to select Dev. user settings, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select DST setting, then press the OK button.
4. Make sure that Set week is selected, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select the week when summer time starts, then press the OK button.
6. Make sure that Set day of week is selected, then press the OK button.
7. Use the button to select the day of the week when summer time starts, then press the OK
button.
8. Make sure that Set shift time is selected, then press the OK button.
9. Use the button to move the cursor under the desired position, use the Numeric buttons to
enter the time (in 24-hour format) when summer time starts, then press the OK button.
2. Make sure that Set month is selected, then press the OK button.
3. Use the button to select the month when summer time ends, then press the OK button.
4. Make sure that Set week is selected, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select the week when summer time ends, then press the OK button.
6. Make sure that Set day of week is selected, then press the OK button.
7. Use the button to select the day of the week when summer time ends, then press the OK
button.
8. Make sure that Set shift time is selected, then press the OK button.
9. Use the button to move the cursor under the desired position, use the Numeric buttons to
enter the time (in 24-hour format) when summer time ends, then press the OK button.
688
Registering User Information
This section describes the procedure to register the user information.
Note
• Before sending a fax, be sure to enter your name and fax/telephone number in Unit TEL no. registr.
and Unit name registr. on the FAX user settings screen (for US only).
3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.
4. Use the button to select FAX user settings, then press the OK button.
Note
• You can enter the fax/telephone number up to 20 digits, including spaces.
Note
• You can enter the name up to 24 characters, including spaces.
689
Sending Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number Basic
Resending Faxes (Redialing a Busy Number)
Setting Items for Sending Faxes
Sending Faxes Using Useful Functions
690
Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number
This section describes dialing and sending faxes directly by entering the fax/telephone numbers.
Important
• It may be possible that faxes will reach unintended recipients due to the misdialing or incorrect
registration of fax/telephone numbers. When you send important documents, we recommend that you
send them after speaking on the telephone.
Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone
Important
• When sending a double-sided document, load the document on the platen glass. Double-sided
documents cannot be automatically scanned and sent from the ADF.
Note
• For details on the types, conditions of document, and how to load the document:
Loading Originals
Numeric buttons:
Enters the number.
button:
Enters a space.
button:
Deletes the last character you entered.
button:
By pressing this button once, "#" is entered. By pressing this button one more time, "P" is entered.
691
6. Press the Color button for color transmission, or the Black button for black & white
transmission.
The machine starts scanning the document.
Important
• Color transmission is available only when the recipient's fax machine supports color faxing.
• Do not open the document cover until scanning is completed.
7. Start sending.
Note
• To cancel a fax transmission, press the Stop button. To cancel a fax transmission while it is in
progress, press the Stop button, then follow the instructions on the LCD.
• If documents remain in the ADF after the Stop button is pressed while scanning is in progress,
Close the feeder cover [OK]Eject the document is displayed on the LCD. By pressing the
OK button, the remaining documents are automatically ejected.
After scanning the document, the confirmation screen asking you if you load the next document is
displayed.
To send the scanned document, press the OK button to start sending it.
Note
• To send two or more pages, follow the message to load the next page, and press the Color or
Black button. After scanning all pages, press the OK button to start sending.
Note
• When your machine is connected to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange) system, refer to the operating
instructions of the system for details on dialing the recipient's fax/telephone number.
• In case the machine was not able to send a fax, such as when the recipient's line was busy, it has the
function to automatically redial the number after a specified interval. Automatic redialing is enabled by
default.
Automatic Redialing
• Unsent documents, such as those pending redial, are stored in the machine's memory. They are not
stored in the case of a sending error.
• Do not unplug the power cord until all documents are sent. If you unplug the power cord, all unsent
documents stored in the machine's memory are lost.
692
Resending Faxes (Redialing a Busy Number)
There are two methods of redialing: Automatic redialing and Manual redialing.
• Automatic Redialing
If you send a document and the recipient's line is busy, the machine will redial the number after a
specified interval.
Automatic Redialing
• Manual Redialing
You can redial to the recipients dialed using the Numeric buttons.
Manual Redialing
Important
• It may be possible that faxes will reach unintended recipients due to the misdialing or incorrect
registration of fax/telephone numbers. When you send important documents, we recommend that you
send them after speaking on the telephone.
Note
• Automatic redialing is enabled by default.
Automatic Redialing
You can enable or disable automatic redialing. If you enable automatic redialing, you can specify the
maximum number of redial attempts and the length of time the machine waits between redial attempts.
Enable and specify the automatic redialing setting on Auto redial in Adv. FAX settings under Fax
settings.
Adv. FAX settings
Important
• While automatic redialing, the unsent fax is stored in the machine's memory temporarily until the
sending fax is complete. If a power failure occurs or you unplug the power cord before automatic
redialing is complete, all faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted and not sent.
Note
• To cancel automatic redialing, wait until the machine starts redialing, then press the Stop button.
• To cancel automatic redialing, delete the unsent fax from the machine's memory while the machine is
on-standby for a redial operation. For details, see Deleting a Document in Machine's Memory.
Manual Redialing
Follow the procedure below for manual redialing.
693
2. Press the FAX button.
The Fax standby screen is displayed.
7. Use the button to select the recipient's number to redial, then press the OK button.
8. Press the Color button for color transmission, or the Black button for black & white
transmission.
Important
• Color transmission is available only when the recipient's fax machine supports color faxing.
Note
• For manual redialing, the machine memorizes up to 10 recent recipients dialed by entering the fax/
telephone numbers. Note that the machine does not memorize any recipients dialed using the redial
function or selecting from the directory.
• To cancel manual redialing, press the Stop button. To cancel a fax transmission while it is in
progress, press the Stop button, then follow the instructions on the LCD.
• If documents remain in the ADF after the Stop button is pressed while scanning is in progress, Close
the feeder cover [OK]Eject the document is displayed on the LCD. By pressing the OK button, the
remaining documents are automatically ejected.
694
Setting Items for Sending Faxes
If you select FAX TX settings after pressing the Menu button on the Fax standby screen, you can specify
the settings of the scan contrast and the scan resolution.
Adjust the scan contrast and resolution following the procedure below.
2. Use the button to select FAX TX settings, then press the OK button.
3. Use the button to select Scan contrast, then press the OK button.
The Scan contrast screen is displayed.
4. Use the button to select the scan contrast, then press the OK button.
The button decreases the scan contrast, and the button increases the scan contrast.
By pressing the OK button, the LCD returns to the FAX TX settings screen.
5. Use the button to select Scan resolution, then press the OK button.
The Scan resolution screen is displayed.
Standard
Suitable for text-only documents.
Fine
Suitable for fine-print documents.
Extra fine
Suitable for detailed illustration or fine-print quality documents.
If the recipient's fax machine is not compatible with Extra fine (300 x 300 dpi), the fax will be sent in
the Standard or Fine resolution.
Photo
Suitable for photographs.
Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
695
• When sending a color fax, documents are always scanned in the same resolution (200 x 200 dpi).
The image quality (compression rate) is determined by which scan resolution is selected, except
that Extra fine and Photo provide the same image quality.
696
Sending Faxes Using Useful Functions
Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone
Sending a Fax to the Registered Recipient
Sending the Same Document to Several Recipients (Sequential Broadcasting)
Preventing Mistransmission of Faxes
Using the On Hook Dial Function
697
Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone
If you want to speak to the recipient before sending a fax, or if the recipient does not have a fax machine
that can receive faxes automatically, send a fax manually after speaking to the recipient on the telephone to
check whether the recipient can receive faxes.
Important
• It may be possible that faxes will reach unintended recipients due to the misdialing or incorrect
registration of fax/telephone numbers. When you send important documents, we recommend that you
send them after speaking on the telephone. See below for the procedure to send a fax manually.
• With manual transmission, you cannot use the platen glass to load documents. Load the documents in
the ADF.
When loading document on the platen glass, send a fax with automatic transmission.
Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number
• To speak to the recipient before sending a fax, you need to connect a telephone to the machine.
Basic Connection
Note
• For details on the basic sending operations:
8. Ask the recipient to set the recipient's fax machine to receive faxes.
9. When you hear a high-pitched signal, press the Color button or the Black button.
698
Press the Color button for color transmission, or the Black button for black & white transmission.
Important
• Color transmission is available only when the recipient's fax machine supports color faxing.
Note
• To cancel a fax transmission, press the Stop button. To cancel a fax transmission while it is in
progress, press the Stop button, then follow the instructions on the LCD.
• If documents remain in the ADF after the Stop button is pressed while scanning is in progress,
Close the feeder cover [OK]Eject the document is displayed on the LCD. By pressing the OK
button, the remaining documents are automatically ejected.
699
Sending a Fax to the Registered Recipient
Registering recipient's fax/telephone number and name in the machine's directory enables you to send
faxes easily.
Important
• It may be possible that faxes will reach unintended recipients due to the misdialing or incorrect
registration of fax/telephone numbers. When you send important documents, we recommend that you
send them after speaking on the telephone.
Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone
Note
• For details on the basic sending operations:
Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number
You can choose a recipient with the two methods. The method can be switched by pressing the
button.
• When the following screen is displayed on the LCD:
700
After you use the Numeric buttons to enter the first letter of the recipient's name you want to
search, the registered recipients are displayed in alphabetical order.
8. Press the Color button for color transmission, or the Black button for black & white
transmission.
Important
• Color transmission is available only when the recipient's fax machine supports color faxing.
Note
• To cancel a fax transmission, press the Stop button. To cancel a fax transmission while it is in
progress, press the Stop button, then follow the instructions on the LCD.
• If documents remain in the ADF after the Stop button is pressed while scanning is in progress, Close
the feeder cover [OK]Eject the document is displayed on the LCD. By pressing the OK button, the
remaining documents are automatically ejected.
• In case the machine was not able to send a fax, such as when the recipient's line was busy, it has the
function to automatically redial the number after a specified interval. Automatic redialing is enabled by
default.
Automatic Redialing
To cancel automatic redialing, wait until the machine starts redialing, then press the Stop button.
701
Sending the Same Document to Several Recipients (Sequential
Broadcasting)
This machine allows you to prepare for sending the same document to a maximum of 21 recipients in one
operation. The recipients can be specified by entering the fax/telephone numbers and selecting the
registered recipients (the particular recipient's number and the group dial) in combination.
Important
• It may be possible that faxes will reach unintended recipients due to the misdialing or incorrect
registration of fax/telephone numbers. When you send important documents, we recommend that you
send them one by one after speaking on the telephone.
Note
• If you frequently send documents to the same group of recipients, you can group these numbers for
group dialing. This will allow you to send documents to all the recipients in the group by simply
operation.
Press the Menu button, use the button to select Directory, then press the OK button. Next,
use the button to select a recipient, then press the OK button.
702
• By entering the fax/telephone numbers:
Use the Numeric buttons to enter the recipient's fax/telephone number, then press the OK button.
Note
• If FAX no. re-entry in Security control under Fax settings is set to ON, use the Numeric
buttons again to enter the number, then press the OK button.
Security control
• By redialing:
Press the Menu button, use the button to select Redial, then press the OK button. Next, use
the button to select the number you want to dial, then press the OK button.
Manual Redialing
If you want to add the recipient further, repeat the same procedure.
Note
• When Broadcasting is displayed, you can review the numbers you have entered by pressing the
button.
• Pressing the Back button allows you to delete the recipient's number you entered last.
7. Press the Color button for color transmission, or the Black button for black & white
transmission.
Important
• Color transmission is available only when the recipient's fax machine supports color faxing.
Note
• To cancel a fax transmission, press the Stop button. To cancel a fax transmission while it is in
progress, press the Stop button, then follow the instructions on the LCD.
• If documents remain in the ADF after the Stop button is pressed while scanning is in progress, Close
the feeder cover [OK]Eject the document is displayed on the LCD. By pressing the OK button, the
remaining documents are automatically ejected.
• When you press the Stop button, fax transmission to all the recipients specified will be canceled. You
cannot cancel a fax transmission to only one recipient.
703
Preventing Mistransmission of Faxes
This machine has two functions for preventing the mistransmission of faxes.
• Sending faxes after the machine checks the recipient's fax machine information
Before sending a fax, the machine checks whether the recipient's fax machine information matches the
dialed number.
3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.
4. Use the button to select Security control, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select FAX no. re-entry, then press the OK button.
Note
• If the number is not identical with the number entered first, the Fax standby screen is displayed.
Important
• This function is not available when you send a fax manually.
704
2. Press the Setup button.
The Setup menu screen is displayed.
3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.
4. Use the button to select Security control, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select Check RX FAX info, then press the OK button.
Important
• Transmission will be canceled if the machine fails to receive the recipient's fax information or if
the received information does not match the fax/telephone number.
705
Using the On Hook Dial Function
Follow the procedure below to send faxes with the on hook dial function.
Important
• It may be possible that faxes will reach unintended recipients due to the misdialing or incorrect
registration of fax/telephone numbers. When you send important documents, we recommend that you
send them after speaking on the telephone.
Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone
• With manual transmission, you cannot use the platen glass to load documents. Load the documents in
the ADF.
When loading document on the platen glass, send a fax with automatic transmission.
Note
• You can use the on hook dial function only when Hook setting in Security control under Fax settings
is set to Enable.
Security control
• For details on the basic sending operations:
Press the Menu button, use the button to select Directory, then press the OK button. Next,
use the button to select a recipient, then press the OK button.
706
• Manual redialing:
Press the Menu button, use the button to select Redial, then press the OK button. Next, use
the button to select the number you want to dial, then press the OK button.
Manual Redialing
7. When you hear a high-pitched signal, press the Color button or the Black button.
Press the Color button for color transmission, or the Black button for black & white transmission.
Important
• Color transmission is available only when the recipient's fax machine supports color faxing.
Note
• To cancel a fax transmission, press the Stop button. To cancel a fax transmission while it is in
progress, press the Stop button, then follow the instructions on the LCD.
• If documents remain in the ADF after the Stop button is pressed while scanning is in progress, Close
the feeder cover [OK]Eject the document is displayed on the LCD. By pressing the OK button, the
remaining documents are automatically ejected.
707
Registering Recipients
Registering Recipients Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Registering Recipients Using Speed Dial Utility
708
Registering Recipients Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Registering recipients in the machine's directory in advance allows you to dial fax/telephone numbers
simply.
• Recipient registration
Registering the recipient's fax/telephone number and name allows you to send a fax by selecting a
registered recipient in the machine directory.
You can combine two or more recipients registered in advance into a group. You can send the same
document to all the registered recipients in the group.
You can register up to 100 recipients in total of individual recipients and group dials.
Note
• To change the registered information of the recipient or the group dial, see Changing Registered
Information.
• To delete the registered information of the recipient or the group dial, see Deleting Registered
Information.
• To print a list of the recipient's fax/telephone numbers and names registered, see Printing a List of the
Registered Destinations.
• You can register, change, or delete the registered information of the recipient or the group dial using
Speed Dial Utility on the computer.
709
Registering the Fax/Telephone Number of Recipients
Before you can use the machine's directory, you need to register the recipients' fax/telephone numbers.
Follow the procedure below to register the recipients' fax/telephone numbers.
3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.
4. Use the button to select TEL no. registration, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select Add directory entry, then press the OK button.
7. Use the button or the Numeric buttons to select an unregistered ID number, then press
the OK button.
Note
• If you already registered the recipient, the fax/telephone number is displayed next to the ID
number. If you already registered the group dial, (Not available) is displayed.
8. Use the button to select a registration method, then press the OK button.
When you select this registration method, the screen to select the fax/telephone number from the
outgoing call logs is displayed.
1. Use the button to select a fax/telephone number, then press the OK button.
The fax/telephone number selected from the outgoing call logs is displayed.
2. Check the fax/telephone number, then press the OK button.
The fax/telephone number is registered to the machine and the screen to enter the recipient's
name is displayed. Go to next step.
• From call log (IN)
710
When you select this registration method, the screen to select the fax/telephone number or the
name from the incoming call logs is displayed.
1. Use the button to select a fax/telephone number or a name, then press the OK button.
The fax/telephone number selected from the incoming call logs is displayed.
2. Check the fax/telephone number, then press the OK button.
The fax/telephone number is registered to the machine and the screen to enter the recipient's
name is displayed. Go to next step.
Note
• This registration method may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase.
• Direct entry
When you select this registration method, the screen to enter the fax/telephone number is
displayed.
1. Use the Numeric buttons to enter the fax/telephone number you want to register.
The fax/telephone number is registered to the machine and the screen to enter the recipient's
name is displayed. Go to next step.
Note
• You can enter the fax/telephone number up to 60 digits (40 digits for the US, Canada,
Korea and some regions of Latin America), including spaces.
If you select a name on From call log (IN) in step 8, the name may be already entered. If you do not
change the name, go to step 10.
Note
• You can enter the name up to 16 characters, including spaces.
711
11. Press the OK button to finalize registration.
Note
• To register another recipient's number and name, select an unregistered ID number and operate
in the same procedure.
712
Registering Recipients in Group Dial
If you register two or more registered recipients to a group dial, you can send the same document
successively to all recipients registered to the group dial.
3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.
4. Use the button to select TEL no. registration, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select Add directory entry, then press the OK button.
6. Use the button to select Group dial, then press the OK button.
The screen to select an ID number is displayed.
7. Use the button or the Numeric buttons to select an unregistered ID number, then press
the OK button.
Note
• If you already registered the recipient, (Not available) is displayed next to the ID number. If you
already registered the group dial, the registered group name is displayed.
You can choose a recipient with the two methods. The method can be switched by pressing the
button.
• When Add to group is displayed on the LCD:
Use the button to select a recipient's ID number to register to the group dial.
• When Enter first letter is displayed on the LCD:
713
After you use the Numeric buttons to enter the first letter of the recipient's name you want to
search, the registered recipients are displayed in alphabetical order.
Use the button to select a recipient's ID number to register to the group dial.
3. Press the OK button.
The selected recipient is registered as a member of the group dial.
4. Press the Menu button to display the screen to select an ID number, then add another member.
Repeat this step to register the other recipient to the same group dial.
Note
• You can check the recipient's ID number and name registered to the group dial by using the
button.
9. Press the OK button after finishing registering the member you want to register to the group
dial.
The screen to enter the group name is displayed.
Note
• You can enter the name up to 16 characters, including spaces.
Note
• To register another group, select an unregistered ID number and operate in the same procedure.
• You can check the recipients you have registered to the group dial by printing GROUP DIAL
TELEPHONE NO. LIST.
714
Changing Registered Information
To change information registered for recipient and group dial, follow the procedure below.
3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.
4. Use the button to select TEL no. registration, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select Add directory entry, then press the OK button.
2. Use the button or the Numeric buttons to select a recipient's ID number, then press the
OK button.
The screen to select a registration method is displayed as well as when you register the
recipient.
4. Use the button to select a registration method, then press the OK button.
The screen to select the fax/telephone number from the outgoing call logs is displayed.
After you use the button to select a fax/telephone number and press the OK button,
the editing screen is displayed. Change the recipient's fax/telephone number, then press
the OK button.
◦ From call log (IN) is selected as the registration method:
The screen to select the fax/telephone number or the name from the incoming call logs is
displayed. After you use the button to select a fax/telephone number or a name and
press the OK button, the editing screen is displayed. Change the recipient's fax/telephone
number, then press the OK button.
Note
• This registration method may not be available depending on the country or region of
purchase.
the editing screen is displayed. Change the recipient's fax/telephone number, then press
the OK button.
After editing the recipient's fax/telephone number is complete, the screen to edit the recipient's
name is displayed.
715
Note
• You can enter the fax/telephone number up to 60 digits (40 digits for the US, Canada,
Korea and some regions of Latin America), including spaces.
Note
• You can enter the name up to 16 characters, including spaces.
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols
2. Use the button or the Numeric buttons to select an ID number of group dial to change,
then press the OK button.
To add a member, press the Menu button to display the screen to select an ID number and
then add another member.
To delete a member, select a member to delete and then press the Tone button.
5. Change the group name, then press the OK button.
Note
• You can enter the name up to 16 characters, including spaces.
Note
• To return to the Fax standby screen, press the FAX button.
716
Deleting Registered Information
To delete information registered for recipient and group dial, follow the procedure below.
3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.
4. Use the button to select TEL no. registration, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select Add directory entry, then press the OK button.
2. Use the button or the Numeric buttons to select an ID number of group dial to delete,
then press the OK button.
1. Use the button to select Group dial, then press the OK button.
2. Use the button or the Numeric buttons to select an ID number of group dial to delete,
then press the OK button.
Note
• To return to the Fax standby screen, press the FAX button.
717
Printing a List of the Registered Destinations
You can print a list of the fax/telephone numbers and can keep it near the machine to refer to when dialing.
2. Load paper.
5. Use the button to select Print reports/lists, then press the OK button.
6. Use the button to select Directory list, then press the OK button.
7. Use the button to select an item to print, then press the OK button.
• If you selected Recipient:
Use the button to select whether to print the list in alphabetical order, then press the OK
button.
If you select Yes, RECIPIENT TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST is printed in alphabetical order.
If you select No, RECIPIENT TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST is printed in the order of the ID
number.
718
Registering Recipients Using Speed Dial Utility
For safety reasons, it is recommended that you backup the registered data on the computer using Speed
Dial Utility.
Calling the Registered Information Up from Your Computer and Registering the Information to the
Machine
719
Starting Up Speed Dial Utility
Before starting up Speed Dial Utility, confirm the following:
• The necessary application software (MP Drivers and Speed Dial Utility) is installed.
If MP Drivers or Speed Dial Utility is not yet installed, install them with the Setup CD-ROM or install
them from our website.
Do not plug in or unplug any cables while the machine is in operation, or when the computer is in sleep
or standby mode.
If your machine is compatible with LAN connection, make sure that the machine is connected to the
computer with LAN connection to use Speed Dial Utility via LAN connection.
• In Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP, click Start and select All programs, Canon
Utilities, Speed Dial Utility, and then Speed Dial Utility.
Note
• You can also start up Speed Dial Utility from Quick Menu or Quick Toolbox.
720
Speed Dial Utility Dialog box
The following items are on the Speed Dial Utility dialog box.
1. Printer Name:
Selects the machine for editing the registered information using Speed Dial Utility.
5. Edit.../Select All/Delete
Edits/deletes the registered information or selects all the registered information selected for Setting Item
List:.
When multiple items on the registered information list are selected, you cannot use the Edit... button.
721
7. Instructions
Displays this guide.
8. Exit
Quits Speed Dial Utility. Information registered or edited using Speed Dial Utility is neither saved on the
computer nor registered on the machine.
9. Save to PC...
Saves information edited using Speed Dial Utility on the computer.
722
Saving Registered Information on the Machine to Your Computer
Follow the procedure below to save the recipients' name, recipients' fax/telephone number, group dial,
user's name, user's fax/telephone number, or rejected numbers that registered on the machine to the
computer.
2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings.
4. Enter the file name on the displayed screen, then click Save.
723
Registering a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility
Follow the procedure below to register fax/telephone numbers.
Note
• Before you register fax/telephone numbers using Speed Dial Utility, make sure that no fax operations
are in progress.
2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings.
5. Click Register individual TEL number or Register group dial, then click Next....
• If Register individual TEL number is selected:
724
1. Enter the group name.
2. Select the code you want to add to the group dial, then click Add >>.
Note
• You can only enter numbers that have already been registered.
6. Click OK.
To continue registering fax/telephone numbers or a group dial, repeat steps 4 to 6.
725
Changing a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility
Follow the procedure below to change fax/telephone numbers.
Note
• Before you change fax/telephone numbers using Speed Dial Utility, make sure that no fax operations
are in progress.
2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings.
726
To add a member:
Select the code to add to the group dial, then click Add >>.
To delete a member:
Select the code to delete from the group dial, then click << Delete.
5. Click OK.
To continue changing fax/telephone numbers or group dials, repeat steps 4 and 5.
727
Deleting a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility
Follow the procedure below to delete fax/telephone numbers.
Note
• Before you delete fax/telephone numbers using Speed Dial Utility, make sure that no fax operations are
in progress.
2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings.
Note
• To delete all fax/telephone numbers on the list, click Select All, then Delete.
2. Enter the file name on the displayed screen, then click Save.
• To register the edited information to the machine:
728
Changing Sender Information Using Speed Dial Utility
Follow the procedure below to change the user's name or fax/telephone number.
2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings.
5. Enter the new user's name on User Name and new fax/telephone number in TEL Number,
then click OK.
• To save the edited information on the computer:
2. Enter the file name on the displayed screen, then click Save.
729
Registering/Changing Rejected Number Using Speed Dial Utility
Follow the procedure below to register, change, or delete rejected numbers.
2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings.
Note
• To delete all fax/telephone numbers on the list, click Select All, then Delete.
730
Calling the Registered Information Up from Your Computer and
Registering the Information to the Machine
You can register the fax/telephone numbers, user's name, user's fax/telephone number, and rejected
numbers saved on the computer to the machine.
2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings.
731
Uninstalling Speed Dial Utility
Follow the procedure below to uninstall Speed Dial Utility.
Important
• Log into a user account with administrator privilege.
1. Select Control Panel from the Settings charm on Desktop > Programs > Programs and
Features.
2. Select Canon Speed Dial Utility from the program list, then click Uninstall.
If the User Account Control screen appears, click Continue.
• In Windows XP:
2. Select Canon Speed Dial Utility from the program list, then click Remove.
Note
• To reinstall Speed Dial Utility, uninstall Speed Dial Utility, then install it again from our website.
732
Receiving Faxes
Receiving Faxes
Changing the Paper Settings
Memory Reception
Receiving Faxes Using Useful Functions
733
Receiving Faxes
This section describes the preparation necessary for receiving a fax and how to receive a fax.
Note
• For details on how to change the receive mode:
4. Load paper.
Load the sheets of plain paper.
Receiving a Fax
Depending on the selected receive mode, the receive operation varies.
Note
• For details on the receive mode:
• If the machine was not able to print a received fax, the machine stores the unprinted fax temporarily
in its memory (memory receiving).
Memory Reception
734
When TEL priority mode is selected:
Pick up the handset. If you hear the fax tone, wait for at least 5 seconds after it stops, then hang up
the handset.
Note
• If the machine will not switch to fax reception, press the FAX button, then the Color or Black
button to receive the fax.
• To receive a fax without picking up the handset, set Manual/auto switch of the advanced
setting to ON. RX start time allows you to specify the number of seconds until the machine
switches to fax reception.
• If you have subscribed to Duplex Ringing service in Hong Kong, the telephone will ring a
specified number of times when there is an incoming call with a fax distinctive ring pattern.
Then, the machine will switch to fax reception automatically without the handset being picked
up.
The number of times to ring the telephone until switching to fax reception can be changed.
• Set the machine to enable you to initiate fax reception from a connected telephone (remote
reception).
Remote Reception
• When the answering machine is connected to the machine:
• If the answering machine is set to the answering mode, set User-friendly RX of the
advanced setting to ON. If the call is a fax, the machine will receive the fax automatically.
• If the answering mode is turned off on the answering machine, pick up the handset. If you
hear the fax tone, wait for at least 5 seconds after it stops, then hang up the handset.
• If Manual/auto switch of the advanced setting is set to ON, set RX start time to longer
than the time before the answering machine starts playing the answering message. After
making this setting, we recommend that you call the answering machine using a mobile
phone, etc. to confirm that messages are recorded successfully in the answering machine.
• Set your answering machine to answering mode and adjust it as follows:
735
- The entire message should be no longer than 15 seconds.
Note
• If the machine unexpectedly switches to fax reception during telephone calls, set User-friendly
RX of the advanced setting to OFF.
• If Manual/auto switch of the advanced setting is set to ON, you must answer an incoming call
by picking up the handset within the time specified in RX start time. Otherwise the machine
will switch to fax reception.
Note
• If a telephone is connected to the machine, the telephone will ring when a call incomes.
• You can change the number of times to ring the telephone with Incoming ring of the advanced
setting.
736
The machine will receive the fax automatically when the fax ring pattern is detected.
Note
• You can change the number of times to ring the telephone.
Note
• To use this feature, you need to subscribe to a compatible service provided by your telephone
company.
• For DRPD
The name of this service varies depending on the country or region of purchase. This setting
may not be also available depending on the country or region of purchase.
737
Changing the Paper Settings
This machine prints received faxes to paper loaded in the machine beforehand. You can use the operation
panel to change the paper settings for printing faxes. Make sure that the settings are appropriate for the
loaded paper.
Important
• If the size of loaded paper is different from that specified in the paper size setting, the received faxes
are stored in the machine's memory and Check page size and Press [OK] are displayed on the LCD.
In this case, load the same size of paper as that specified in the paper size setting, then press the OK
button.
You can also press the Stop button to close the message and print the stored documents in the
machine's memory later.
You can also press the Stop button to close the message and print the stored documents in the
machine's memory later.
Note
• If the sender sends a document that is larger than Letter-size or Legal-size, such as 11 x 17 inches, the
sender's machine may send the fax automatically reduced in size or divided, or send only a part of the
original.
4. Use the button to select FAX paper settings, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select a setting item, then press the OK button.
The LCD returns to the Fax standby screen when all the settings are complete or when pressing the
FAX button.
738
Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
• Page size
Note
• Some of page sizes are not available depending on the country or region of purchase.
• Media type
The paper type is set to Plain paper.
739
Memory Reception
If the machine was not able to print the received fax, the received fax is stored in the machine's memory.
The FAX Memory lamp is lit and Received in memory is displayed at the Fax standby screen.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted. The next time you
turn the machine on, press the OK button after a confirmation screen is displayed. The list of the faxes
deleted from the machine's memory (MEMORY CLEAR REPORT) will be printed.
If the machine receives a fax under one of the following conditions, the received fax will be automatically
stored in the machine's memory.
When Do not print is selected for Received documents in Auto print settings under Fax settings,
the received faxes are stored in the machine's memory.
You can print the faxes stored in the machine's memory from the Memory reference screen under FAX
menu.
Note
• To print the received faxes automatically, select Print for Received documents in Auto print
settings under Fax settings.
If you select Print for Received documents in Auto print settings under Fax settings, a received fax
will be printed automatically. However, if any of the following errors occurs, the received fax will not be
printed. It will instead be stored in the machine's memory.
When the error is resolved, the fax stored in the machine's memory is printed automatically.
◦ The amount of remaining ink is insufficient to print a fax:
Note
• You can set the machine to forcibly print a received fax even if the ink has run out.
Set Print when no ink in Auto print settings under Fax settings to Print.
However, part or all of the fax may not be printed since the ink has run out.
Also, the contents of the fax will not be stored in the machine's memory.
If the ink has already run out, we recommend that Do not print be selected for Received
documents in Auto print settings under Fax settings to store the received fax in the
machine's memory. After you replace the FINE cartridge and select Print for Received
documents in Auto print settings, the fax stored in the machine's memory will be printed
automatically.
740
◦ Paper has run out:
◦ A different size of paper from that specified by Page size in FAX paper settings is loaded:
Load the same size of paper as that specified by Page size, then press the OK button.
Note
• The machine can store up to max. 50 pages* (max. 20 documents) of faxes in the machine's memory.
* When using ITU-T No.1 chart (Standard mode)
• If the machine's memory becomes full during memory reception, only pages which already have been
received are stored in the memory. Print the received faxes stored in the machine's memory, delete
them from the machine's memory, and have the sender resend the faxes.
Document Stored in Machine's Memory
741
Receiving Faxes Using Useful Functions
Remote Reception
Rejecting Fax Reception
Using the Caller ID Service to Reject Calls
742
Remote Reception
If the machine is located away from the telephone, pick up the handset of the telephone connected to the
machine and dial 25 (the remote reception ID) to receive faxes (remote reception).
• If you use a rotary pulse line, temporarily switch your telephone to tone dialing. For details on how to
switch to tone dialing, refer to your telephone's instruction manual.
• If you have an answering machine connected to the machine that can carry out remote control
operations, the security code for this function may be the same as the remote reception ID. In this case,
change the remote reception ID in Remote RX ID in Remote RX in Adv. FAX settings under Fax
settings.
743
Rejecting Fax Reception
You can set the machine to reject faxes with no sender information or those from specific senders.
3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.
4. Use the button to select Security control, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select FAX RX reject, then press the OK button.
7. Use the button to select the fax rejection condition, then press the OK button.
No sender info.
Rejects faxes with no caller identification.
Not in directory
Rejects faxes from the senders not registered in the machine's directory.
Rejected numbers
Rejects faxes from the senders registered in the machine as rejected numbers.
For details on how to register the rejected number, see Registering the Rejected Number.
Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.
• When the machine rejects reception, Reception rejected is displayed on The Fax standby screen.
• Faxes with no caller identification are also rejected when the setting other than No sender info. is
selected.
1. When the confirmation screen to register the rejected number is displayed, use the
button to select Yes, then press the OK button.
744
2. Use the button to select a registration number, then press the OK button.
3. Use the button to select a registration method, then press the OK button.
Register the rejected number depending on the registration method.
• From call log (OUT)
When you select this registration method, the screen to select the fax/telephone number from
the outgoing call logs is displayed.
1. Use the button to select a fax/telephone number, then press the OK button.
1. Use the button to select a fax/telephone number or a name, then press the OK button.
Note
• This registration method may not be available depending on the country or region of
purchase.
• Direct entry
When you select this registration method, the screen to register the fax/telephone number is
displayed.
Use the Numeric buttons to enter the fax/telephone number you want to register, then press the
OK button.
Note
• To register another rejected number, use the button to select another registration number, then
register the rejected number.
• You can print the list of rejected numbers (REJECTED NUMBER LIST).
• To change the registered rejected number, display the screen to register the fax/telephone number in
the same operation, change rejected number, then press the OK button.
• To delete the registered rejected number, display the screen to register the fax/telephone number in
the same operation, press the Back button repeatedly to delete the rejected number, then press the
OK button.
745
• You can register the rejected number in Rejected numbers in TEL no. registration under Fax
settings.
746
Using the Caller ID Service to Reject Calls
If you subscribe to the Caller ID service, the machine detects the sender's Caller ID. If the sender's ID
matches the condition specified in this setting, the machine rejects the phone call or fax reception from the
sender.
Note
• This setting may not be supported depending on the country or region of purchase.
Contact your telephone company to confirm whether it provides this service.
3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.
4. Use the button to select Security control, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select Caller rejection, then press the OK button.
7. Use the button to select whether to reject a phone call or fax reception from an
anonymous number, then press the OK button.
8. Use the button to select whether to reject a phone call or fax reception out of the
subscribed service area, then press the OK button.
9. Use the button to select whether to reject a phone call or fax reception from the
specified numbers, then press the OK button.
If you select Reject, you can register the fax/telephone number to reject.
When Register rejected no.? is displayed on the LCD, use the button to select Yes, then register
the fax/telephone number to reject.
For details on how to register the rejected number, see Registering the Rejected Number.
Note
• Even if you select Reject, the machine rings once.
(The machine may not ring depending on the country or region of purchase.)
747
Other Useful Fax Functions
Using the Information Services
Transmission/Reception of Faxes Using ECM
Document Stored in Machine's Memory
Summary of Reports and Lists
748
Using the Information Services
You can use various information services such as provided by banks, and make airline reservations or hotel
reservations. Since these services require tone dialing to use their services, you need to temporarily switch
to tone dialing if your machine is connected to a rotary pulse line.
Important
• You may need to contract with the service providers for some information services. For details, contact
the service providers.
Note
• You can use the on hook dial function only when Hook setting in Security control under Fax
settings is set to Enable.
Security control
4. Use the Numeric buttons to dial the number of the information service.
5. When the recorded message for the information service answers, use the Numeric buttons to
press the numbers in accordance with the message.
5. When the recorded message for the information service answers, use the telephone to press the
numbers in accordance with the message.
749
Using the Rotary Pulse Line
• Dialing by Using the On Hook Dial Function
Note
• You can use the on hook dial function only when Hook setting in Security control under Fax
settings is set to Enable.
Security control
4. Use the Numeric buttons to dial the number of the information service.
5. When the recorded message for the information service answers, press the Tone button to
switch to tone dialing.
6. Use the Numeric buttons to press the numbers in accordance with the message.
5. When the recorded message for the information service answers, use the telephone to switch to
tone dialing.
When you dial the number of the information service using the telephone connected to the
machine, you cannot use the machine to switch to tone dialing. For instructions on how to switch
to tone dialing, refer to your telephone's instruction manual.
6. Use the telephone to press the numbers in accordance with the message.
750
Transmission/Reception of Faxes Using ECM
This machine is set to send/receive faxes in Error Correction Mode (ECM). If the recipient's fax machine is
compatible with ECM, ECM automatically corrects errors and resends the fax.
Note
• If the sender's or recipient's fax machine is not compatible with ECM, the fax will be sent/received
without automatic error correction.
• To receive color faxes, make sure that ECM RX in Adv. communication in Adv. FAX settings under
Fax settings is set to ON.
To disable ECM transmission/reception, set ECM TX and ECM RX in Adv. communication to OFF.
751
Document Stored in Machine's Memory
If the sending faxes is not complete or the machine was not able to print the received faxes, these faxes are
stored in the machine's memory.
If an error occurred during a fax transmission, the document is not stored in the machine's memory.
In the following cases, the machine is not able to print the received fax and will automatically store the fax in
its memory.
• A different size of paper from that specified by Page size in FAX paper settings is loaded.
• Do not print is selected for Received documents in Auto print settings under Fax settings.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord of the machine, all faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
For details on how to unplug the power cord, refer to Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord.
You can print or delete the faxes stored in the machine's memory.
• To print a document in the machine's memory:
Note
• When confirming, printing, or deleting a document stored in the machine's memory, you specify it by its
transaction number. If you do not know the transaction number for your target document, print the list of
documents (MEMORY LIST) first.
For details on how to print MEMORY LIST, see Printing a Document in Machine's Memory.
752
Printing a Document in Machine's Memory
You can print a specified document in the machine's memory or print all the received documents in its
memory at a time.
When printing a specified document, you specify it by its transaction number. If you do not know the
transaction number for your target document, print the list of documents (MEMORY LIST) first.
2. Load paper.
5. Use the button to select Memory reference, then press the OK button.
Note
• If no document is stored in the machine's memory, No documents in memory is displayed on the
LCD.
6. Use the button to select a print menu, then press the OK button.
You can select the following print menus.
• Print memory list
You can print a list of the documents in the machine's memory (MEMORY LIST).
MEMORY LIST shows the transaction number of the unsent or unprinted fax (TX/RX NO.),
transaction mode, recipient's number, and the date and time of the transaction.
A transaction number from "0001" to "4999" on MEMORY LIST indicates a document being sent. A
transaction number from "5001" to "9999" on MEMORY LIST indicates a document being received.
• Print specified doc.
Note
• A transaction number from "0001" to "4999" indicates a document being sent. A transaction
number from "5001" to "9999" indicates a document being received.
• Each mark before the transaction number indicates the following:
753
: Indicates the document during transmission.
• By pressing the button or the Tone button, the transaction number displayed on the LCD
is switched to transaction time or fax/telephone number.
1. Use the button to select the transaction number (TX/RX no.) of the document you want
to print, then press the OK button.
2. Use the button to select whether to print only the first page of the document, then press
the OK button.
The screen to confirm whether to delete the printed document in the machine's memory is
displayed.
If you select Yes using the button and press the OK button, the printed document in
the machine's memory is deleted.
Note
• If there is not the specified document in the machine's memory, No document is
displayed, and the machine returns to the previous screen.
You can print all the received documents in the machine's memory.
If you select Yes using the button and press the OK button, all the documents in the
machine's memory will be printed.
Each time a document is printed, the screen to confirm whether to delete the printed document in
the machine's memory is displayed.
If you select Yes using the button and press the OK button, the printed document in the
machine's memory is deleted.
754
Deleting a Document in Machine's Memory
You can delete a specified document in the machine's memory or delete all the documents in its memory at
a time.
Note
• When deleting a specified document, you specify it by its transaction number. If you do not know the
transaction number for your target document, print the list of documents (MEMORY LIST) first.
Printing a Document in Machine's Memory
4. Use the button to select Memory reference, then press the OK button.
Note
• If no document is stored in the machine's memory, No documents in memory is displayed on the
LCD.
5. Use the button to select a delete menu, then press the OK button.
You can select the following delete menus.
Note
• A transaction number from "0001" to "4999" indicates a document being sent. A transaction
number from "5001" to "9999" indicates a document being received.
• Each mark before the transaction number indicates the following:
• By pressing the button or the Tone button, the transaction number displayed on the LCD
is switched to transaction time or fax/telephone number.
755
Specify the document and delete it following the procedure below.
1. Use the button to select the transaction number (TX/RX no.) of the document you want
to delete, then press the OK button.
Note
• If there is not the specified document in the machine's memory, No document is
displayed, and the machine returns to the previous screen.
If you select Yes using the button and press the OK button, all the documents in the
machine's memory will be deleted.
756
Summary of Reports and Lists
The machine prints the report of sending or receiving a fax automatically. You can print the list of the fax/
telephone number or the current settings.
• If you select Print for Activity report in Auto print settings under Fax settings, the
machine prints ACTIVITY REPORT for the 20 histories of sent and received faxes
automatically.
• RECIPIENT You can print the lists of the recipient and group dial.
TELEPHONE For details on the procedure to print, see Printing Report or List.
NUMBER LIST
• GROUP DIAL
TELEPHONE NO.
LIST
USER'S DATA LIST Lists the current settings of the machine and the registered sender information.
MEMORY LIST Lists the documents currently stored in the machine's memory.
Note
• You can print MEMORY LIST by selecting Print memory list in Memory reference
under FAX menu.
This list may not be supported depending on the country or region of purchase.
757
You can set the machine to print TX REPORT each time it sends a document, or
disable printing of the report by selecting TX report in Auto print settings under Fax
settings.
You can also specify the print setting so that the first page of the fax is printed along
with the report.
Note
• The first page of the fax is not printed in color transmission.
• If an error occurs when you send a fax, the error number is printed on ERROR TX
REPORT (there are some errors for which the cause is also printed).
For details on the error number, see Errors When You Send a Fax.
• At the time of purchase, the machine is set so that RX REPORT is not printed at all.
You can set the machine to print RX REPORT each time it receives a document, or
only when an error occurs by selecting RX report in Auto print settings under Fax
settings.
Auto print settings
• If an error occurs when you receive a fax, the error number is printed on RX REPORT
(there are some errors for which the cause is also printed).
For details on the error number, see Errors When You Receive a Fax.
MEMORY CLEAR Lists the deleted faxes in the machine's memory if the faxes stored in the machine's
REPORT memory are deleted by a power failure or unplugging the power cord.
When the machine is turned on, Data error and Press [OK] are displayed on the LCD.
MEMORY CLEAR REPORT is printed by pressing the OK button.
• ACTIVITY REPORT
• Directory list (RECIPIENT TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST/GROUP DIAL TELEPHONE NO. LIST)
• MEMORY LIST
• CALLER HISTORY
758
Note
• CALLER HISTORY may not be supported depending on the country or region of purchase.
2. Load paper.
5. Use the button to select Print reports/lists, then press the OK button.
6. Use the button to select the report or list you want to print, then press the OK button.
• When you select Directory list:
Use the button to select Recipient or Group dial, then press the OK button.
If you select Recipient, select whether to print RECIPIENT TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST in
alphabetical order, then press the OK button. If you select Yes, the machine prints RECIPIENT
TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST in alphabetical order. If you select No, the machine prints
RECIPIENT TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST in numerical order.
If you select Group dial, the machine prints GROUP DIAL TELEPHONE NO. LIST.
#003 Document is too long. You attempted to send a document longer than 15.75 inches / 400 mm.
You cannot send a document longer than 15.75 inches / 400 mm from the ADF.
"#003" is also printed if it takes time to send a page. Divide the document or set
the image quality (Fax resolution) to a lower setting, then resend it.
759
Contact the recipient and have the recipient check that the telephone line is
connected correctly.
#017 No tone is detected. The machine could not detect the dial tone.
Dial tone detect in Adv. FAX settings under Fax settings is set to ON. Set to
OFF.
#018 Line was busy. The fax/telephone number you dialed is busy.
#022 Number is deleted. The fax/telephone number registered in the machine's directory is incorrect.
#037 Memory is full. The machine could not send a fax because its memory is full.
#059 Transmission has been Transmission has been canceled because the machine could not detect the
canceled due to a fax recipient's fax machine information or the information did not match the dialed
information mismatch. number. This message is displayed when Check RX FAX info in Security
control under Fax settings is set to ON.
For details, see Sending Faxes after Checking Information (Checking the
Recipient's Information).
#085 Try again in black & white The recipient's fax machine is not color-compatible.
transmission. Resend the document in black & white.
#099 The Stop button was The Stop button was pressed to cancel transmission of the document. Resend it
pressed during if necessary.
transmission.
#412 The fax could not be sent The fax could not be sent from the computer (Windows only). Ensure that the
from the computer. machine is connected with the computer correctly and redo operation.
#995 The unsent fax was While automatic redialing, the unsent fax is stored in the machine's memory
deleted while automatic temporarily until the sending fax is complete. If a power failure occurs or you
redialing. unplug the power cord before automatic redialing is complete, all faxes stored in
the machine's memory are deleted and not sent.
760
No. Cause Action
#003 It takes too long to receive Contact the sender and have the sender divide the fax or set the image quality
a page. (Fax resolution) to a lower setting and resend it.
#005 No answer. When receiving a fax manually, the machine could not detect the signals from the
sender's fax machine.
Contact the sender and have the sender resend it, or set the machine to receive
the fax automatically.
#037 Memory is full. The machine could not receive a fax because its memory is full.
Delete contents in memory, then ask the sender to resend the fax. See
Document Stored in Machine's Memory.
#046 Reception has been Reception has been rejected because the fax matches the fax rejection condition
rejected due to the specified by FAX RX reject in Security control under Fax settings.
specified fax rejection For details, see Rejecting Fax Reception.
condition.
#099 The Stop button was The Stop button was pressed to cancel reception of the fax. Contact the sender
pressed during reception. and have the sender resend it if necessary.
#995 The received fax was The received fax was deleted before being printed. Contact the sender and have
deleted. the sender resend it if necessary.
761
Sending Faxes from a Computer
Sending a FAX (Fax Driver) Basic
Creating an Address Book (Fax Driver)
Edit or Remove a Recipient from an Address Book (Fax Driver)
Search for a Recipient in an Address Book (Fax Driver)
Troubleshooting Problems Sending Faxes (Fax Driver)
How to Open the Setting Screen of the Fax Driver
General Notes (Fax Driver)
762
Sending a FAX (Fax Driver)
You can send faxes using the fax driver from applications that support document printing.
Note
• Only black and white transmission is supported.
2. Open the document you want to fax with an application (such as Notepad), and then click
the Print command. (The command is Print... on the File menu.)
3. In Select Printer or Name in the Print dialog box, select Canon XXX series FAX (where
"XXX" is the model name).
Note
• Click Preferences or Properties in the Print dialog box to open the print settings dialog box of
the fax driver in which you can set the paper size and print orientation. For details on how to open
the print settings dialog box of the fax driver, see "How to Open the Setting Screen of the Fax
Driver."
5. Click Display Address Book... in Set Recipient in the Send FAX dialog box.
763
6. Select a recipient from Recipient Name in the Select Recipient from Address Book
dialog box, then click Set as Recipient.
The selected recipient is reflected in Recipient in the Send FAX dialog box.
Important
• You cannot specify a recipient if there is no recipient registered in the address book. Register the
recipient in the address book and reopen the address book.
For details on how to register recipients in the address book, see "Creating an Address Book (Fax
Driver)."
• If the recipient's fax/telephone number is entered incorrectly or the registered fax/telephone
number is incorrect, the fax may be sent to an unexpected recipient. When sending an important
fax, it is recommended that you send it after confirming the entered information and recipient's
status.
Note
• You can also specify Recipient by entering the Recipient Name and Fax Number in Direct
Entry in the Send FAX dialog box and then clicking Set as Recipient.
• For details on valid characters, see "General Notes (Fax Driver)."
• You can send faxes even if only the Fax Number is entered.
764
• You can register the recipient you entered to the address book by clicking Add to Address
Book.... For details on how to register recipients in the address book, see "Creating an
Address Book (Fax Driver)."
• Add the outside line access number before the fax number as needed.
(Example: When the outside line access number is "0" and the fax number is "XXX-XXXX", enter
"0XXX-XXXX".)
Important
• If you cannot send a fax due to line failure, etc., see "Troubleshooting Problems Sending Faxes
(Fax Driver)."
Canceling Transmission
If you click Send Now in the Send FAX dialog box, the printer icon is displayed in the taskbar. Double-
click this icon to display the list of fax jobs awaiting transmission or being sent.
765
Creating an Address Book (Fax Driver)
By using the address book, you can send a fax by simply specifying a recipient from it. You can register the
recipient's name, fax number and other information in the address book.
Note
• In Windows XP, when you open the address book for the first time, the Setup Windows
Address Book dialog box will be displayed. Refer to "Setup when Opening the Address Book
for the First Time (Windows XP)" for details.
• In Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/Windows Vista, you can register an individual recipient
(Contact) in the address book folder (Windows Contacts) as an address book file (.contact file)
which can be used in multiple applications. However, you cannot change the address book you
use, as only one address book can be created per user.
• Windows 8.1/Windows 8:
Select XXXX (user name) from the Start menu, then double-click Contacts.
766
4. Select Contact in the New Entry dialog box, then click OK.
Note
• For faxing, you can only specify the Contact (one recipient). You cannot specify a Distribution
List.
5. Enter the First, Middle, and Last of the contact in the Name and E-mail tab (Name tab
when using Windows XP) on the Properties dialog box.
The recipient's name will be printed at the top of the fax received by the recipient.
767
6. Enter the fax number on the Home or Work tab, then click OK.
An individual recipient (Contact) is registered in the address book.
Note
• You can also register a recipient by clicking the Add to Address Book... button on the Send
FAX dialog box after entering the recipient.
• Add the outside line access number before the fax number as needed.
(Example: When the outside line access number is "0" and the fax number is "XXX-XXXX",
enter "0XXX-XXXX".)
• If you upgrade from Windows XP to Windows Vista, the address book you created in Windows
XP may not be reflected in Windows Vista. In this case, open the address book in the following
procedure and reflect the information to a new address book.
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Appearance and Personalization > Folder
Options.
2. Click the View tab of the Folder Options dialog box, select Show hidden files and
folders in Advanced settings, then click OK.
768
3. From the Start menu, select XXXX (user name), then double-click AppData > Roaming >
Canon > MP5 to open the folder.
4. Double-click the ".wab" file.
Related Topic
Edit or Remove a Recipient from an Address Book (Fax Driver)
Search for a Recipient in an Address Book (Fax Driver)
769
Setup when Opening the Address Book for the First Time
(Windows XP)
In Windows XP, when you open the address book for the first time, the Setup Windows Address Book
dialog box will be displayed and you can set the Windows Address Book you want to use.
To Create a New Windows Address Book (WAB File) Exclusively for Faxing:
Select Create a new Windows Address Book file for faxing., then click OK.
Click Select existing Windows Address Book file., select an address book file from the list, then click OK.
Using an existing Windows Address Book enables you to share it with other applications that use Windows
Address Books.
This option cannot be selected if there is no Windows Address Book file created.
Note
• You can also change the setting by clicking Address Book Profile... in the print settings dialog box of
the fax driver so as to use another Windows Address Book.
• You can import the entries from one Windows Address Book file into another, combining both sets of
Windows Address Book entries. To import fax recipient contacts in an Address Book file to an existing
Address Book file, follow the steps below.
770
How to Open the Setting Screen of the Fax Driver
The following explains how to display the print settings dialog box or the Properties dialog box of the fax
driver from your application or from the fax/printer icon.
Opening the Print Settings Dialog Box of the Fax Driver from an Application
Opening the Print Settings Dialog Box of the Fax Driver from the Fax/Printer
Icon
• Windows 8.1/Windows 8:
1. Click the Settings charm > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and
Printers.
2. Right-click the Canon XXX series Printer icon or Canon XXX series FAX icon and
select Printing Preferences, then Canon XXX series FAX. (Where "XXX" is the
model name.)
• Windows 7:
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and
Printers.
2. Right-click the Canon XXX series Printer icon or Canon XXX series FAX icon and
select Printing Preferences, then Canon XXX series FAX. (Where "XXX" is the
model name.)
• Windows Vista:
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
2. Right-click the Canon XXX series FAX icon (where "XXX" is the model name) and
select Printing Preferences....
• Windows XP:
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware >
Printers and Faxes.
771
2. Right-click the Canon XXX series FAX icon (where "XXX" is the model name) and
select Printing Preferences....
Opening the Properties Dialog Box of the Fax Driver from the Fax/Printer
Icon
• Windows 8.1/Windows 8:
1. Click the Settings charm > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and
Printers.
2. Right-click the Canon XXX series Printer icon or Canon XXX series FAX icon and
select Printer Properties, then Canon XXX series FAX. (Where "XXX" is the model
name.)
• Windows 7:
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and
Printers.
2. Right-click the Canon XXX series Printer icon or Canon XXX series FAX icon and
select Printer Properties, then Canon XXX series FAX. (Where "XXX" is the model
name.)
• Windows Vista:
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
2. Right-click the Canon XXX series FAX icon (where "XXX" is the model name) and
select Properties.
• Windows XP:
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware >
Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the Canon XXX series FAX icon (where "XXX" is the model name) and
select Properties.
772
Edit or Remove a Recipient from an Address Book (Fax Driver)
You can change the recipients' names, fax numbers and other information, or delete recipients registered in
the address book.
3. Select the recipient you want to edit from the Address Book dialog box, then click
Properties....
4. Change information as needed on the Properties dialog box, then click OK.
773
Removing Recipients from an address book
3. Select the recipient you want to delete from the Address Book dialog box, then click
Delete.
774
4. When a confirmation message is displayed, click Yes.
775
Search for a Recipient in an Address Book (Fax Driver)
You can search for recipients registered in the address book by name.
1. Open the document you want to fax with an application (such as Notepad), and then click
the Print command. (The command is Print... on the File menu.)
2. In Select Printer or Name in the Print dialog box, select Canon XXX series FAX (where
"XXX" is the model name).
4. Click Display Address Book... in Set Recipient in the Send FAX dialog box.
5. Enter the name of the recipient you want to search for in Search by Recipient in the
Select Recipient from Address Book dialog box.
776
If the entered name is found, the recipient will be displayed in the contact list with its name selected.
While the name is selected, click Set as Recipient to enter it as the recipient.
Important
• You cannot search by criteria other than name.
777
Troubleshooting Problems Sending Faxes (Fax Driver)
Check 1 Is the power turned on?
You cannot send faxes if the power is turned off. Press the ON button to turn the power on.
If you disconnected the power cord without turning off the power (one of the buttons on the operation panel is lit),
reconnecting it turns on the power.
If you disconnected the power cord after pressing the ON button to turn off the power (no buttons on the
operation panel are lit), reconnect it, then press the ON button to turn on the power.
If the power was turned off due to power failure, etc., the power is automatically turned on when the power failure
is resolved.
Important
• Confirm that all lamps on the operation panel are off before unplugging the power cord, then unplug the
power cord.
If a power failure occurs or you unplug the power cord, all faxes stored in the machine's memory are
deleted.
Note
• If the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted by a power failure or unplugging the power cord,
the list of the faxes deleted from the machine's memory will be printed after turning the machine on.
Check 2 Is a document being sent from memory or a fax being received into memory?
When the message for the transmission/reception is displayed on the machine's LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
monitor, a fax is being sent from/received into machine's memory. Wait until the transmission/reception is
complete.
Note
• For details on how to change the recipients registered in the address book, see "Edit or Remove a
Recipient from an Address Book (Fax Driver)."
778
Check 7 Does a printer error occur?
Check if a message is displayed on the LCD monitor.
If a support code is displayed, see "Support Code List" for your model from Home of the Online Manual.
If no support code is displayed, see "A Message Is Displayed" for your model from Home of the Online Manual.
If you are in a hurry, press the Stop button to close the message, then send the fax.
779
General Notes (Fax Driver)
This fax driver is subject to the following restrictions. Keep the following points in mind when using the fax
driver.
• The fax driver may not work correctly when sending a Microsoft Excel 2002 document as a fax with the
Allow A4/Letter Paper Resizing option checked in Microsoft Excel 2002. Follow the instructions below
to solve the problem:
• When using a network compatible printer, you cannot send faxes from multiple computers at the same
time. If you try to send a fax from a computer while a fax is being sent from another computer, a
message appears and your fax cannot be sent.
Make sure that a fax is not being sent from another computer.
• If you assign the fax driver to the Bluetooth port, you cannot send a fax from the computer.
• You can use the following characters for Fax Number:
Character Explanation
+ - ( ), space To make the number easier to read. You cannot insert a space at the front of a number.
• You can enter the following number of characters in Recipient Name and Fax Number.
Recipient Name: Up to 16 characters
• The fax driver does not work correctly if you uncheck the Enable printer pooling option on the Ports
tab of the Canon XXX series FAX Properties dialog box (where "XXX" is the model name). Check that
the option is checked.
For details on how to open the Canon XXX series FAX Properties dialog box, see "Opening the Properties
Dialog Box of the Fax Driver from the Fax/Printer Icon."
780
Troubleshooting
The Machine Cannot Be Powered On
Printing Does Not Start
Paper Does Not Feed Properly/"No Paper" Error Occurs
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Ink Is Not Ejected
Paper Jams
If an Error Occurs
Cannot Send a Fax
Cannot Receive a Fax, Cannot Print a Fax
List of Support Code for Error
781
Problems with Network Communication
Cannot Detect a Machine on a Network
Problems with the Machine while Using with Network
Other Problems with Network
782
Cannot Detect a Machine on a Network
Cannot Detect the Machine when Setting Up Network Communication
The Machine Cannot Be Detected in the Wireless LAN
783
Cannot Detect the Machine when Setting Up Network
Communication
If the machine could not be detected on the network when setting up the network communication, confirm
the network settings before redetecting the machine.
Important
• If the machine cannot be detected while you are setting up the network communication using a USB
cable, the machine may be in the access point mode. In this case, finish the access point mode and
enable the wireless LAN, then try to redetect the machine.
784
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 1
Are the machine and network device (router, etc.) turned on?
Make sure that the machine is turned on.
Make sure that the network device (router, etc.) is turned on.
After turning on the machine or the network device, it may take some time until ready for use. After a while
just turning on the machine or the network device, click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen.
When the machine is detected, follow the instructions on the screen to continue to set up the network
communication.
785
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 2
After enabling the wireless LAN setting, click Back to Top on the Check Printer Settings screen to try to
set up the network communication from the beginning.
786
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 3
When the machine is detected, follow the instructions on the screen to continue to set up the network
communication.
If the machine cannot be detected, the machine is not connected to the wireless router. Connect the
machine to the wireless router.
Click Back to Top on the Check Printer Settings screen to try to set up the network communication from
the beginning.
787
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 4
Does the firewall function of your security software or operating system for
computer interfere with setting up the network communication?
The firewall function of your security software or operating system for computer may limit communications
between the machine and your computer. Confirm the setting of firewall function of your security software
or operating system or the message appearing on your computer.
If the message warning that Canon software is attempting to access the network appears on the
computer, set the security software to allow access.
Cancel to set up, then set the security software to allow Canon software* to access the network.
* On the Setup CD-ROM, select win > Driver > DrvSetup, then set the security software to allow the
file Setup.exe or Setup64.exe to access the network.
After setting the security software, try to set up the network communication from the beginning.
Note
• For the operating system firewall settings or the security software firewall settings, refer to the
instruction manual of the computer or software, or contact its manufacturer.
788
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 5
Make sure that the radio channel of the wireless router and that assigned to the machine are the same.
For details on how to check the settings of the wireless router, refer to the instruction manual supplied
with the wireless router or contact its manufacturer.
789
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 6
Make sure that the machine is not placed far away from the wireless router.
The wireless router is located indoors within the effective range for wireless communication. Locate the
machine within 164 ft. / 50 m from the wireless router.
In addition, check where the machine and the wireless router are located and take the appropriate action.
• Make sure that there is no obstruction between the machine and the wireless router.
Wireless communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor. Adjust the location of the
machine and the wireless router.
• Make sure that there is no source of radio wave interference near the machine or the wireless router.
If a device (e.g. microwave oven) using the same frequency bandwidth as the wireless station is
placed nearby, the device may cause interference. Place the machine or the wireless router as far
away from the interference source as possible.
After checking above and taking the appropriate action, perform setup again.
Note
• You can set up the network communication via USB. To set up via USB, select the Set up the
network connection via USB check box on the Check Printer Settings screen and click Next.
790
The Machine Cannot Be Detected in the Wireless LAN
Check2 Is Change LAN in LAN settings under Device settings set to LAN inactive?
Check3 When the machine is connected to the computer temporarily using a USB
cable, make sure that the USB cable is connected properly.
When you set up the wireless LAN connection or change the wireless LAN settings using IJ Network Tool
through USB connection, make sure that the machine is connected to the computer with a USB cable securely.
Check5 When using IJ Network Tool, click Update to search for the machine again.
Canon IJ Network Tool Screen
Check6 When searching for a machine over a network, make sure that the machine is
associated with the port.
When No Driver is displayed under Name in IJ Network Tool, there is no association. Select Associate Port on
the Settings menu, then associate the port with the machine.
When the Printer Driver Is Not Associated with a Port
Check7 Make sure that the network settings in the machine are identical with those of
the wireless router.
Refer to the instruction manual provided with the wireless router or contact its manufacturer to check the wireless
router settings, and then modify the machine settings.
Check9 Make sure that the machine is not placed far away from the wireless router.
The wireless router is located indoors within the effective range for wireless communication. Locate the machine
within 164 ft. / 50 m from the wireless router.
Check10 Make sure that there is no source of radio wave interference in your vicinity.
791
If a device (e.g. microwave oven) using the same frequency bandwidth as the wireless station is placed nearby,
the device may cause interference. Place the wireless station as far away from the interference source as
possible.
Check11 Make sure that the network settings of the computer are correct.
Make sure that the computer can communicate with the wireless router over the wireless LAN.
Check12 Make sure that Enable bidirectional support is selected in the Ports sheet of
the properties dialog box of the printer driver.
Check13 Make sure that the firewall of the security software is disabled.
If the firewall function of your security software is turned on, a message may appear warning that Canon
software is attempting to access the network. If the warning message appears, set the security software to
always allow access.
If using any programs that switch the network environment, check their settings. Some programs will enable a
firewall by default.
Check14 When using a router, connect the machine and computer to the LAN side
(same network segment).
If the problem is not resolved, perform setup again with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the
instructions on our website.
792
Problems with the Machine while Using with Network
The Machine Stopped Working Suddenly
Forgot a Wireless Router Name, SSID, or a Network Key
The Administrator Password Set to the Machine Was Forgotten
Cannot Use the Machine on Replacing a Wireless Router or Changing Its
Settings
Printing Speed Is Slow
Ink Remaining Level Is Not Displayed on Printer Status Monitor of the Machine
793
The Machine Stopped Working Suddenly
Cannot Communicate with the Machine after the Network Settings Are Changed
Cannot Communicate with the Machine while It Is in the Access Point Mode
Cannot Communicate with the Machine after the Network Settings Are
Changed
It may take a while for the computer to obtain the IP address, or you may need to restart your computer.
Search for the machine again after confirming a valid IP address is assigned to the computer.
Check2 Are the network settings of the machine identical with those of the wireless
router?
Make sure that the network settings of the machine (e.g. wireless router name, SSID, network key, etc.) are
identical with those of the wireless router.
To check the settings of the wireless router, refer to the instruction manual provided with it or contact its
manufacturer.
To check the current network settings of the machine, print out the network setting information.
Printing Out Network Setting Information
If the network settings of the machine are not identical with those of the wireless router, change the network
settings of the machine to match with those of the wireless router using IJ Network Tool.
Check3 Make sure that the machine is not placed far away from the wireless router.
The wireless router is located indoors within the effective range for wireless communication. Locate the
machine within 164 ft. / 50 m from the wireless router.
Check5 Make sure that there is no source of radio wave interference in your vicinity.
If a device (e.g. microwave oven) using the same frequency bandwidth as the wireless station is placed
nearby, the device may cause interference. Place the wireless station as far away from the interference source
as possible.
794
Check6 Make sure that the network settings of the computer are correct.
For the procedures to connect a network device to the computer and set them up, refer to the instruction
manual of your network device or contact its manufacturer.
Check7 Make sure that the radio status is good and adjust the installation positions
while monitoring the radio status with IJ Network Tool.
Monitoring Wireless Network Status
Check9 Make sure that the channel confirmed in Check 8 can communicate with the
computer.
If not, change the channel set to the wireless router.
Check10 Make sure that the firewall of the security software is disabled.
If the firewall function of your security software is turned on, a message may appear warning that Canon
software is attempting to access the network. If the warning message appears, set the security software to
always allow access.
If using any programs that switch the network environment, check their settings. Some programs will enable a
firewall by default.
Check11 When using a router, connect the machine and computer to the LAN side
(same network segment).
If the problem is not resolved, perform setup again with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the
instructions on our website.
• For placement:
Make sure that there is no barrier or obstacle between the wireless router and the machine.
Note
• When you connect the machine to a Windows XP computer by cableless setup:
Follow the procedure below to perform settings of the machine and the computer.
2. Right-click the Wireless Network Connections icon on the notification area on the desktop,
then click View Available Wireless Networks.
3. Select the network name on the screen displayed, then click Connect.
Select "XXXXXX-MXXXXseries" ("XX" represents alphanumeric characters.) as the network
name.
4. Enter the network key on the screen displayed, then click Connect.
As a default, the serial number of the machine is used as a network key. Confirm the serial
number on the rear of the machine.
795
5. Perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website.
Check2 Is Change LAN in LAN settings under Device settings set to LAN inactive
or Wireless LAN?
Select Access point mode.
Check4 Have you entered the proper password specified for the access point mode?
If the security setting of the access point mode is enabled, you need to enter the password to connect your
external communication device to the machine. Confirm the specified password, then enter the proper one.
Check5 Make sure that external communication devices are not placed far away from
the machine.
Locate your external communication device close enough to communicate with the machine.
Check7 Make sure that there is no source of radio wave interference in your vicinity.
If a device (e.g. microwave oven) using the same frequency bandwidth as the wireless station is placed
nearby, the device may cause interference. Place the wireless station as far away from the interference source
as possible.
Check1 Make sure that the network settings of the computer are correct.
796
For the procedures to set up the computer, refer to the instruction manual of your computer or contact its
manufacturer.
Check3 Make sure that access control is not set to the wireless router.
For the procedures to connect a wireless router and set it up, refer to the instruction manual of your wireless
router or contact its manufacturer.
Note
• To check the MAC address or the IP address of the computer, see Checking the IP Address or the MAC
Address of the Computer.
797
Forgot a Wireless Router Name, SSID, or a Network Key
Cannot Connect with a Wireless Router to Which a WEP or WPA/WPA2 Key Is Set (You Forgot the WEP
or WPA/WPA2 Key)
For information on how to set up the wireless router, refer to the instruction manual provided with the
wireless router or contact its manufacturer. Make sure that the computer and the wireless router can
communicate with each other.
After that, set up the machine to match the settings of the wireless router using IJ Network Tool.
For information on how to set up the wireless router, refer to the instruction manual provided with the
wireless router or contact its manufacturer. Make sure that the computer and the wireless router can
communicate with each other.
After that, set up the machine to match the settings of the wireless router using IJ Network Tool.
The key length, key format, the key to use (one of 1 to 4), and the authentication method must match
among the wireless router, the machine, and the computer.
In order to communicate with a wireless router that uses automatically generated WEP keys, you
must configure the machine to use the key generated by the wireless router by entering it in
hexadecimal format.
Normally, select Auto for the authentication method. Otherwise, select Open System or Shared Key
according to the setting of the wireless router.
When the WEP Details screen appears after clicking Set on the Search screen, follow the on-screen
instructions and set the key length, the key format, the key number, and the authentication method to
enter a WEP key.
The authentication method, passphrase, and dynamic encryption type must match on the wireless
router, the machine, and the computer.
Enter the passphrase configured on the wireless router (a sequence of between 8 and 63
alphanumeric characters, or a 64-character hexadecimal number).
798
Either TKIP (basic encryption) or AES (secure encryption) is selected automatically for the dynamic
encryption method.
Note
• This machine supports WPA/WPA2-PSK (WPA/WPA2-Personal) and WPA2-PSK (WPA2-
Personal).
799
The Administrator Password Set to the Machine Was Forgotten
Select All data, then the administrator password returns to the default.
Reset setting
After initializing the machine settings, perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the
instructions on our website.
800
Cannot Use the Machine on Replacing a Wireless Router or
Changing Its Settings
When you replace a wireless router, perform network setup of the machine again.
Perform network setup again with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it again according to the instructions on
our website.
When Encryption Is Enabled, Cannot Communicate with the Machine after the Encryption Type Was
Switched on the Wireless Router
Check2 If you are performing MAC address filtering or IP address filtering at the
wireless router, confirm that the MAC address or IP address for both the computer or the
network device and the machine are registered.
Check3 If you are using a WEP or WPA/WPA2 key, make sure that the encryption
key for the computer or the network device and the machine matches that set to the
wireless router.
Besides the WEP key itself, the key length, key format, the key ID to use, and the authentication method must
match among the machine, the wireless router, and the computer.
Normally, select Auto for the authentication method. If you want to specify the method manually, select Open
System or Shared Key according to the setting of the wireless router.
801
When Encryption Is Enabled, Cannot Communicate with the Machine
after the Encryption Type Was Switched on the Wireless Router
If the machine cannot communicate with the computer after the encryption type of the machine was
switched, make sure that encryption types for the computer and the wireless router matches that set to
the machine.
Cannot Communicate with the Machine after Applying MAC/IP Address Filtering or Entering an
Encryption Key to the Wireless Router
802
Printing Speed Is Slow
Check1 The machine may be printing out a large job issued from another computer.
Check2 Make sure that the radio status is good and adjust the installation positions
while monitoring the radio status with IJ Network Tool.
Monitoring Wireless Network Status
Make sure that there is no barrier or obstacle between the wireless router and the machine. Wireless
communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor. The metal, concrete, or timber including the
metallic material, mud wall, or insulator may interrupt a wireless communication. If the machine cannot
communicate with the computer over a wireless LAN for the wall material, place the machine and the computer
in the same room or floor.
803
Ink Remaining Level Is Not Displayed on Printer Status Monitor of
the Machine
Select Enable bidirectional support in the Ports sheet of the properties dialog box of the printer driver.
804
Other Problems with Network
The Message Is Displayed on the Computer Screen during Setup
Packets Are Sent Steadily
Checking Information about the Network
How to Restore the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default
805
The Message Is Displayed on the Computer Screen during Setup
The Enter Password Screen Is Displayed during Setup
The Screen for Setting the Encryption Is Displayed After Selecting the Wireless Router in the Search
Screen
"You are connecting the machine to the non encrypted wireless network" Is Displayed
The following screen is displayed if an administrator password is set to the machine which has already
been set up to use via a network.
Note
• An administrator password is already specified for the machine at the time of purchase.
For details:
The Screen for Setting the Encryption Is Displayed After Selecting the
Wireless Router in the Search Screen
This screen is displayed automatically if the selected wireless router is encrypted. In this case, configure
the details to use the same encryption settings set to the wireless router.
For information on the encryption settings, see Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet.
806
Security is not configured on the wireless router. The machine can still be used, so continue the setup
procedure to complete it.
Important
• If you connect to a network that is not protected with security measures, there is a risk of disclosing
data such as your personal information to a third party.
807
Packets Are Sent Steadily
While IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is enabled, it periodically transmits packets to check whether it can
communicate with the machine over the network. When using the computer in a network environment other
than the one used to set up the machine, disable IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.
To disable IJ Network Scanner Selector EX, right-click the icon on the notification area on the
desktop, then select Disable Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.
808
Checking Information about the Network
Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Machine
Checking If the Computer and the Machine, or Computer and the Wireless Router Can Communicate
To check the IP address or the MAC address of the machine, print out the network setting information
using the operation panel of the machine.
To check the IP address or MAC address assigned to the computer, follow the procedure below.
809
1. Select Command Prompt as shown below.
• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Command Prompt from the Start screen. If Command
Prompt is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for
"Command Prompt".
• In Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP, click Start > All Programs > Accessories >
Command Prompt.
2. Type the ping command and the IP address of the target machine or the target wireless
router, and then press the Enter key.
ping XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
"XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" is the IP address of the target device.
If the communication is available, a message such as the following is displayed.
Reply from XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: bytes=32 time=10ms TTL=255
When Request timed out is displayed, the communication is not available.
To check the network setting information of the machine, print out the network setting information using
the operation panel of the machine.
810
How to Restore the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default
Important
• Note that initialization erases all network settings on the machine, and printing, scanning, or faxing
operation from a computer over network becomes impossible. To use the machine over network,
perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website.
Select LAN settings on the operation panel of the machine to initialize the network setting.
Reset setting
811
Problems while Printing/Scanning from Smartphone/Tablet
Cannot Print/Scan from Smartphone/Tablet
812
Cannot Print/Scan from Smartphone/Tablet
If you cannot print from your smartphone/tablet, it is possible that your smartphone/tablet cannot
communicate with the machine.
Cannot Communicate with the Machine while It Is in the Access Point Mode
Note
• For problems on printing with other connection methods or details on how to perform settings of each
connection method:
Check2 Is Change LAN in LAN settings under Device settings set to LAN inactive
or Access point mode?
Select Wireless LAN.
Check3 Are the network settings of the machine identical with those of the wireless
router?
Make sure that the network settings of the machine (e.g. wireless router name, SSID, network key, etc.) are
identical with those of the wireless router.
To check the settings of the wireless router, refer to the instruction manual provided with it or contact its
manufacturer.
To check the current network settings of the machine, print out the network setting information.
If the network settings of the machine are not identical with those of the wireless router, change the network
settings of the machine to match with those of the wireless router using IJ Network Tool.
Check4 Are the network settings of your smartphone/tablet identical with those of the
wireless router?
Make sure that the network settings of your smartphone/tablet (e.g. wireless router name, SSID, network key,
etc.) are identical with those of the wireless router.
813
To check the settings of your smartphone/tablet, refer to the instruction manual provided with it.
If the network settings of your smartphone/tablet are not identical with those of the wireless router, change the
network settings of it to match with those of the wireless router.
Check5 Make sure that the machine is not placed far away from the wireless router.
The wireless router is located indoors within the effective range for wireless communication. Locate the
machine within 164 ft. / 50 m from the wireless router.
Check7 Make sure that there is no source of radio wave interference in your vicinity.
If a device (e.g. microwave oven) using the same frequency bandwidth as the wireless station is placed
nearby, the device may cause interference. Place the wireless station as far away from the interference source
as possible.
Cannot Communicate with the Machine while It Is in the Access Point Mode
If your smartphone/tablet cannot communicate with the machine in the access point mode, check the
following.
Check2 Is Change LAN in LAN settings under Device settings set to LAN inactive
or Wireless LAN?
Select Access point mode.
Check4 Have you selected the machine as the destination of your smartphone/tablet?
Select the access point name (SSID) of the machine with your smartphone/tablet.
Check5 Have you entered the proper password specified for the access point mode?
If the security setting of the access point mode is enabled, you need to enter the password to connect your
smartphone/tablet to the machine. Confirm the specified password, then enter the proper one.
Check6 Make sure that the machine is not placed far away from the wireless router.
Locate your smartphone/tablet close enough to communicate with the machine.
Check8 Make sure that there is no source of radio wave interference in your vicinity.
814
If a device (e.g. microwave oven) using the same frequency bandwidth as the wireless station is placed
nearby, the device may cause interference. Place the wireless station as far away from the interference source
as possible.
815
Problems with Printing
Printing Does Not Start
Paper Jams
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Ink Is Not Ejected
Paper Does Not Feed Properly/"No Paper" Error Occurs
Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed
816
Printing Does Not Start
Check1 Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged in, then press the ON button
to turn the machine on.
While the POWER lamp is flashing, the machine is initializing. Wait until the POWER lamp stops flashing and
remains lit.
Note
• When printing large data such as a photo or graphics, it may take longer to start printing. While the
POWER lamp is flashing, the computer is processing data and sending it to the machine. Wait until printing
starts.
Check2 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer properly.
When the machine is connected to your computer with a USB cable, make sure that the USB cable is securely
plugged in to the machine and the computer, then check the followings:
• If you are using a relay device such as a USB hub, disconnect it, connect the machine directly to the
computer, and try printing again. If printing starts normally, there is a problem with the relay device. Consult
the reseller of the relay device for details.
• There could also be a problem with the USB cable. Replace the USB cable and try printing again.
When you use the machine over LAN, make sure that the machine is set up to be used over network correctly.
Check5 Are the paper settings identical with those registered to the cassette?
When the paper settings are not identical with those registered to the cassette, an error message is displayed.
Resolve the error according to the instructions on the LCD.
Note
• You can disable the message which prevents misprinting.
Cassette settings
817
Check6 If you are printing from the computer and there are any unnecessary print jobs,
delete them.
Deleting the Undesired Print Job
Check7 Make sure that your machine's name is selected in the Print dialog box.
The machine will not print properly if you are using a printer driver for a different printer.
Make sure that "Canon XXX series Printer" (where "XXX" is your machine's name) is selected in the Print dialog
box.
Note
• To make the machine the one selected by default, select Set as Default Printer.
• In Windows Vista or Windows XP, right-click the "Canon XXX series Printer" icon (where "XXX" is your
machine's name), then select Properties.
Note
• When the machine is used over LAN, the port name of the machine is displayed as
"CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx". "xxxxxxxxxx" is the character string generated from the MAC address or a
character string specified by the user when setting up the machine.
• Printing does not start even though the machine is connected to the computer using a USB cable and
the port named "USBnnn" is selected:
In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select My Printer on the Start screen to start My Printer. If My Printer
is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for "My Printer".
Set the correct printer port on Diagnose and Repair Printer. Follow the on-screen instructions to set
the correct printer port, then select your machine's name.
818
In Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP, click Start and select All programs, Canon Utilities,
Canon My Printer, Canon My Printer, then select Diagnose and Repair Printer. Follow the on-
screen instructions to set the correct printer port, then select your machine's name.
If the problem is not resolved, reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our
website.
• Printing does not start even though the port named "CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx" is selected when the
machine is used over LAN:
Launch IJ Network Tool, and select "CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx" as you confirmed in step 4, then associate
the port with the printer using Associate Port in the Settings menu.
If the problem is not resolved, reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our
website.
Check10 Restart your computer if you are printing from the computer.
819
Paper Jams
When paper is jammed, a troubleshooting message is displayed automatically. Take the appropriate action
described in the message.
• When a Support Code and a message are displayed on the computer screen:
For details on how to remove the jammed paper, refer to List of Support Code for Error (When Paper Is
Jammed).
Note
• You can confirm the actions against errors with Support Codes on your computer or on the LCD by
searching a Support Code.
820
Print Results Not Satisfactory
If the print result is not satisfactory due to white streaks, misaligned lines, or uneven colors, confirm the
paper and print quality settings first.
Check1 Do the page size and media type settings match the size and type of the loaded
paper?
When these settings are incorrect, you cannot obtain a proper print result.
If you are printing a photograph or an illustration, incorrect paper type settings may reduce the quality of the
printout color.
Also, if you print with an incorrect paper type setting, the printed surface may be scratched.
In borderless printing, uneven coloring may occur depending on the combination of the paper type setting and
the loaded paper.
To copy by operating the machine Confirm by using the operation panel on the machine.
Check2 Make sure that the appropriate print quality is selected referring to the table in
Check 1.
Select a print quality option suitable for the paper and image for printing. If you notice blurs or uneven colors,
increase the print quality and try printing again.
821
If the Printed Paper Has Been Discolored
Colors may fade with time if the printed paper is left for a long period of time.
After printing, dry the paper sufficiently, avoid high temperatures, high humidity, and direct sunlight, and
store or display indoors at room temperature and normal humidity.
To avoid direct exposure to air, we recommend that you store the paper in an album, plastic folder, photo
frame, etc.
822
Cannot Print to End of Job
Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet on the printer driver. Select the Do not allow application
software to compress print data check box, then click OK.
823
No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White
Streaks
No Printing Results
Printing Is Blurred
824
White Streaks
Check1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Check2 Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary maintenance
operations such as Print Head Cleaning.
Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles.
Refer to When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing, Print Head
Cleaning, and Print Head Deep Cleaning.
• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice:
Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning.
If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning, turn off the machine and
perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours. When you turn the machine off, do not unplug it
from the power supply.
• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice:
Ink may have run out. Replace the FINE cartridge.
Check3 When a FINE cartridge runs out of ink, replace it with a new one.
Check4 When using paper with one printable surface, make sure that the paper is
loaded with the printable side facing down.
Printing on the wrong side of such paper may cause unclear prints or prints with reduced quality.
Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the paper for detailed information on the printable side.
Open the paper output cover, then remove the FINE cartridges.
825
Then install the FINE cartridges again. Push up the FINE cartridge until it clicks into place.
When the FINE cartridge is installed properly, you hear an electric sound once.
After confirming that the FINE cartridge is installed properly, close the paper output cover.
Note
• If the glass of ADF is dirty, black streaks appear on the paper as shown below.
Check7 Check that the original is loaded correctly on the platen glass or in the ADF.
Loading Originals
Check8 Is the original document is loaded with the proper side facing up/down?
When loading the original on the platen glass, the side to be copied should be face down. When loading the
original in the ADF, the side to be copied should be face up.
Print from the machine directly, or reprint from the computer if you can reprint from it.
826
Colors Are Unclear
Refer to When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing, Print Head
Cleaning, and Print Head Deep Cleaning.
• If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly:
After performing the Print Head Cleaning, print the Nozzle Check Pattern and examine the pattern.
• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice:
• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice:
Ink may have run out. Replace the FINE cartridge.
Check2 When a FINE cartridge runs out of ink, replace it with a new one.
When the FINE cartridge is installed properly, you hear an electric sound once.
After confirming that the FINE cartridge is installed properly, close the paper output cover.
Note
• Printed colors may not match screen colors due to basic differences in the methods used to produce
colors. Color control settings and environmental differences can also affect how colors appear on the
screen. Therefore, colors of printing results may be different from those on the screen.
827
Lines Are Misaligned
Check1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Note
• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment, perform Print Head Alignment
manually referring to Aligning the Print Head Position from Your Computer.
828
Line Does Not Print or Prints Partially
Check1 Is the Page Layout Printing performed or the Binding margin function used?
When the Page Layout Printing or Binding margin function is being used, thin lines may not be printed. Try
thickening the lines in the document.
829
Image Does Not Print or Prints Partially
Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet on the printer driver. Select the Do not allow application
software to compress print data check box, then click OK.
830
Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots
Printed Paper Has Ink Blots
Check1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Check2 If the intensity is set high, reduce the intensity setting and try printing again.
If you are using plain paper to print images with high intensity, the paper may absorb too much ink and become
wavy, causing paper abrasion.
• When copying
Setting Items for Copying
831
Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched
Paper Is Smudged
Check1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory
• When performing Borderless Printing, make sure that the paper you are using is suitable for Borderless
Printing.
If the paper you are using is not suitable for Borderless Printing, the print quality may be reduced at the top
and bottom edges of the paper.
Printing Area
We recommend putting unused paper back into the package and keeping it on a level surface.
Turn the paper over and reload it to print on the other side.
832
• For Other Paper
If the curl on the four corners of the paper is more than 0.1 inch / 3 mm (A) in height, the paper may be
smudged or may not be fed properly. In such cases, follow the procedure described below to correct the
paper curl.
1. Roll up the paper in the opposite direction to the paper curl as shown below.
Note
• Depending on the media type, the paper may be smudged or may not be fed properly even if it is not
curled inward. In such cases, follow the procedure described below to curl the paper outward within 0.1
inch / 3 mm (B) in height before printing. This may improve the print result.
Print speed may be reduced if you apply the setting to prevent paper abrasion setting.
* Readjust the setting not to prevent paper abrasion once printing is complete. If not, this setting remains
enabled for all subsequent print jobs.
Press the Setup button, then select Device settings and Output settings in this order, then set Prevent
abrasion to ON.
833
• To set by using your computer
Open the printer driver setup window, and in Custom Settings in the Maintenance sheet, select the
Prevent paper abrasion check box, and then click OK.
To open the printer driver setup window, see How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window.
Check5 If the intensity is set high, reduce the intensity setting and try printing again.
If you are using plain paper to print images with high intensity, the paper may absorb too much ink and become
wavy, causing paper abrasion.
• When printing from your computer
Reduce the intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again.
1. Open the printer driver setup window.
2. On the Main sheet, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and then click Set....
3. Drag the Intensity slide bar on the Color Adjustment sheet to adjust the intensity.
• When copying
Setting Items for Copying
Note
• If the glass of ADF is dirty, black streaks appear on the paper as shown below.
Note
• Cleaning the paper feed roller will wear the roller, so perform this procedure only when necessary.
834
When performing duplex printing, the inside of the machine may become stained with ink, causing the printout to
become smudged.
Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the machine.
Note
• To prevent the inside of the machine from stains, set the paper size correctly.
4. Drag the Ink Drying Wait Time slide bar to set the wait time, and then click OK.
835
Back of the Paper Is Smudged
Check1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Check2 Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the machine.
Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning)
Note
• When performing borderless printing, duplex printing, or too much printing, the inside may become stained
with ink.
836
Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout
Note
• The direction of the vertical line pattern may vary depending on the image data or the print setting.
• This machine performs automatic cleaning when necessary to keep printouts clean. A small amount of ink
is ejected for cleaning.
Although ink is usually ejected on the ink absorber, it may be ejected on the paper if you load paper larger
than that you have specified.
837
Colors Are Uneven or Streaked
Colors Are Uneven
Check1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Check2 Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary maintenance
operations such as Print Head Cleaning.
Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles.
Refer to When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing, Print Head
Cleaning, and Print Head Deep Cleaning.
• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice:
838
If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning, turn off the machine and
perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours. When you turn the machine off, do not unplug it
from the power supply.
• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice:
Note
• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment, perform Print Head Alignment
manually referring to Aligning the Print Head Position from Your Computer.
839
Ink Is Not Ejected
Check1 When a FINE cartridge runs out of ink, replace it with a new one.
Open the paper output cover, then remove the FINE cartridges.
Then install the FINE cartridges again. Push up the FINE cartridge until it clicks into place.
When the FINE cartridge is installed properly, you hear an electric sound once.
After confirming that the FINE cartridge is installed properly, close the paper output cover.
After performing the Print Head Cleaning, print the Nozzle Check Pattern and examine the pattern.
• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice:
If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning, turn off the machine and
perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours. When you turn the machine off, do not unplug it
from the power supply.
• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice:
840
Paper Does Not Feed Properly/"No Paper" Error Occurs
• When loading two or more sheets of paper, align the edges of the sheets before loading.
• When loading two or more sheets of paper, make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the paper load
limit.
However, proper feeding of paper may not be possible at this maximum capacity depending on the type of
paper or environmental conditions (either very high or low temperature and humidity). In such cases, reduce
the sheets of paper you load at a time to less than half of the paper load limit.
• Always load the paper in portrait orientation, regardless of the printing orientation.
• When you load the paper, load the paper with the print side facing DOWN and slide the paper guides to
align with the both sides of the paper.
Loading Paper
• When you load the paper, insert the paper stack until the leading edge touches the far end of the front tray.
Check3 Check to see if the paper you are printing on is not too thick or curled.
Media Types You Cannot Use
Once you have prepared the envelopes, load them in portrait orientation. If the envelopes are placed in
landscape orientation, they will not feed properly.
Push the cassette so that the mark on the cassette aligns with the front panel as illustrated below.
841
When the cassette is set properly, you hear an electric sound once.
Check6 Confirm that the media type and the paper size settings correspond with the
loaded paper.
Check7 If multiple sheets of plain paper is fed from the machine, select the setting for
preventing double-feed of plain paper.
If multiple sheets of plain paper is fed from the machine, select the setting for preventing double-feed of plain
paper using the operation panel or your computer.
* After printing is finished, disable the setting for preventing double-feed of plain paper; otherwise, the setting is
applied from the next time.
To open the printer driver setup window, see How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window.
Note
• Printing speed will be reduced if Prevent paper double-feed function is enabled.
Note
• Cleaning the paper feed roller will wear the roller, so perform this procedure only when necessary.
842
Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed
Note
• If you are printing a document with a large printing area or printing multiple copies of a document, printing
may pause to allow the ink to dry.
Check3 Has the machine been printing continuously for a long period?
If the machine has been printing continuously for a long time, the print head or other parts around it may
overheat. The machine may stop printing at a line break for a period of time and then resume printing.
In this case, wait for a while without operation. If the printing still does not resume, interrupt your print session at
a convenient time and turn the machine off for at least 15 minutes.
Caution
• The print head and the surrounding area can become extremely hot inside the machine. Never touch the
print head or nearby components.
843
Problems with Scanning
Problems with Scanning
Scan Results Not Satisfactory
Software Problems
844
Problems with Scanning
Scanner Does Not Work
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start
Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not
Appear
Cannot Scan Multiple Items at One Time
Cannot Scan Properly with Auto Scan
Slow Scanning Speed
"There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed
Computer Stops Operating during Scanning
Scanner Does Not Work after Upgrading Windows
Scanned Image Does Not Open
845
Scanner Does Not Work
Check 2 Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer.
Check 3 If the USB cable is connected to a USB hub, remove it from the USB hub and
connect it to a USB port on the computer.
846
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start
Note
• The operation may differ depending on the application.
• Use the WIA driver when scanning from a WIA-compliant application.
Scanning with WIA Driver
Check 4 Scan and save images with IJ Scan Utility and open the files in your
application.
847
Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen
Does Not Appear
Check 2 Turn off your scanner or printer, then reconnect the USB cable and replug the
power cord.
Check 3 Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer.
Check 4 If the USB cable is connected to a USB hub, remove it from the USB hub and
connect it to a USB port on the computer.
848
Cannot Scan Multiple Items at One Time
849
Cannot Scan Properly with Auto Scan
850
Slow Scanning Speed
Check 1 To view the image on a monitor, set the output resolution to around 150 dpi. To
print, set it to around 300 dpi.
Resolution
Check 3 In IJ Scan Utility, deselect the Correct slanted text document / Detect the
orientation of text document and rotate image checkbox and scan again.
Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box
851
"There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed
852
Computer Stops Operating during Scanning
Check 1 Restart the computer, reduce the output resolution in ScanGear (scanner
driver) and scan again.
Refer to "Output Settings" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.
Check 2 Delete unnecessary files to obtain sufficient free hard disk space, then scan
again.
Error message may appear if there is not enough hard disk space to scan and save, when the image size is too
large (such as when scanning a large item at high resolution).
853
Scanner Does Not Work after Upgrading Windows
Check Disconnect the USB cable, then uninstall (delete) and reinstall MP Drivers and IJ
Scan Utility.
Refer to "Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for how to
delete MP Drivers.
• Windows 8.1/Windows 8:
1. Click the Settings charm > Control Panel > Programs > Programs and Features.
2. Double-click Canon IJ Scan Utility.
3. When a confirmation appears, click Yes.
4. When uninstallation is complete, click OK.
IJ Scan Utility is deleted.
Note
• In Windows 8.1 and Windows 8, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when installing,
uninstalling, or starting up software.
This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.
If you are logged on to an administrator account, follow the on-screen instructions.
Note
• In Windows 7 and Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when installing,
uninstalling, or starting up software.
This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.
If you are logged on to an administrator account, follow the on-screen instructions.
• Windows XP:
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
2. Select Canon IJ Scan Utility, then click Change/Remove.
3. When a confirmation appears, click Yes.
4. When uninstallation is complete, click OK.
854
Step 3: Reinstall MP Drivers and IJ Scan Utility.
Reinstall MP Drivers and IJ Scan Utility from the Setup CD-ROM or the web page.
855
Scanned Image Does Not Open
Check If the data format is not supported by the application, scan the image again and
select a popular data format such as JPEG when saving it.
Refer to the application's manual for details. If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer of the
application.
856
Scan Results Not Satisfactory
Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor
Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas
Cannot Scan at the Correct Size
Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning
from the Operation Panel
Item Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted
Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor
857
Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor
Check 1 If the image is jagged, increase the scanning resolution, or select TIFF or PNG
in Data Format of the Settings dialog box.
Resolution
Settings Dialog Box
Check 3 If moire (stripe pattern) appears, take the following measures and scan again.
• Set one of the following settings in the Settings (Document Scan) dialog box, Settings (Custom Scan)
dialog box, or Settings (Scan and Stitch) dialog box of IJ Scan Utility, then scan from the IJ Scan Utility
main screen.
• On the Basic Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver), select Magazine (Color) in Select Source.
Refer to "Basic Mode Tab" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.
• On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear, set Descreen in Image Settings to ON.
Refer to "Image Settings" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.
Note
• If moire appears when you scan a digital print photo, take the above measures and scan again.
Check 6 If the document is in poor condition (dirty, faded, etc.), then set Reduce Dust
and Scratches, Fading Correction, Grain Correction, etc. in Image Settings on the
Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear.
Refer to "Image Settings" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.
Check 7 If the color tone of images is different from the original document, take the
following measures and scan again.
858
• On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear, set Image Adjustment in Image Settings to None.
Refer to "Image Settings" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.
• On the Color Settings tab in the Preferences dialog box of ScanGear, set Color Matching.
Refer to "Color Settings Tab" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.
859
Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas
Click (Auto Crop) in whole image view of ScanGear (scanner driver) to automatically display the cropping
frame (scan area) according to the item size.
You can also manually specify the scan area in thumbnail view or when there are white margins along the item
(for example, in photos), or when you want to create custom cropping frames.
Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window
Note
• Refer to "Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for how
to adjust cropping frames with ScanGear (scanner driver).
860
Cannot Scan at the Correct Size
861
Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When
Scanning from the Operation Panel
862
Item Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted
Check When Document or Magazine is selected for Select Source, deselect the
Correct slanted text document checkbox and scan the item again.
Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box
863
Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor
Note
• You cannot reduce the image size in Paint. To reduce the display size, open the images in an application.
Check 2 Change the resolution setting in ScanGear (scanner driver) and scan again.
The higher the resolution, the larger the resulting image will be.
Resolution
864
Software Problems
The E-mail Client You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting
an E-mail Client
865
The E-mail Client You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen
for Selecting an E-mail Client
If the problem is not solved even when MAPI is enabled, select None (Attach Manually) in the screen for
selecting an e-mail client, then manually attach the image to the outgoing e-mail.
866
Problems with Faxing
Problems Sending Faxes
Problems Receiving Faxes
Cannot Send a Fax Clearly
Telephone Problems
867
Problems Sending Faxes
Cannot Send a Fax
Cannot Perform Sequential Broadcasting by Redialing, or Cannot Dial by
Entering the Numbers
Errors Often Occur When You Send a Fax
868
Cannot Send a Fax
Important
• Confirm that the POWER lamp is off before unplugging the power cord, then unplug the power cord.
If a power failure occurs or you unplug the power cord, all faxes stored in the machine's memory are
deleted.
For details on how to unplug the power cord, refer to Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord.
Note
• If the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted by a power failure or unplugging the power cord,
the list of the faxes deleted from the machine's memory (MEMORY CLEAR REPORT) will be printed after
turning the machine on.
For details, see Summary of Reports and Lists.
Check2 Is the document being sent from memory or the fax being received into
memory?
When the message for the transmission/reception is displayed on the LCD, a fax is being sent from/received into
machine's memory. Wait until the transmission/reception is complete.
869
Security control
Note
• You can check the registered information in the machine's directory by printing RECIPIENT TELEPHONE
NUMBER LIST.
Summary of Reports and Lists
When the error message with the support code is displayed, refer to List of Support Code for Error.
When the error message without the support code is displayed, refer to A Message Is Displayed.
If you are in a hurry, press the Stop button to close the message, then send the fax.
Basic Connection
If the telephone line is connected correctly, there is a problem with your telephone line. Contact your telephone
company and the manufacturer of your terminal adapter or telephone adapter.
870
Cannot Perform Sequential Broadcasting by Redialing, or Cannot
Dial by Entering the Numbers
Check Have you already selected the recipient from the redial history, or already dialed
a number by entering the fax/telephone numbers?
You can dial one recipient by selecting from the redial history or by entering the fax/telephone numbers as the
recipient of sequential broadcasting.
If you already have dialed by selecting from the redial history or by entering the fax/telephone numbers, select
the recipient from the machine's directory.
871
Errors Often Occur When You Send a Fax
Reduce the transmission start speed on TX start speed in Adv. communication in Adv. FAX settings under
Fax settings.
Adv. FAX settings
872
Problems Receiving Faxes
Cannot Receive a Fax, Cannot Print a Fax
Machine Does Not Switch Automatically between Voice and Fax Calls
Quality of Received Fax is Poor
Cannot Receive a Color Fax
Errors Often Occur When You Receive a Fax
873
Cannot Receive a Fax, Cannot Print a Fax
Important
• Confirm that the POWER lamp is off before unplugging the power cord, then unplug the power cord.
If a power failure occurs or you unplug the power cord, all faxes stored in the machine's memory are
deleted.
For details on how to unplug the power cord, refer to Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord.
Note
• If the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted by a power failure or unplugging the power cord,
the list of the faxes deleted from the machine's memory (MEMORY CLEAR REPORT) will be printed after
turning the machine on.
For details, see Summary of Reports and Lists.
Check4 Is the telephone line cable connected to the external device jack?
Reconnect it to the telephone line jack.
Basic Connection
874
Check5 Is a different size of paper from that specified by Page size in FAX paper
settings loaded?
If a different size of paper from that specified by Page size is loaded for printing faxes, the received faxes will not
be printed and will be stored in the machine's memory (Memory Reception). Load the same size of paper as that
specified by Page size, then press the OK button on the machine.
Note
• If the machine was receiving faxes in the fax mode, printing will start automatically after the FINE cartridge
is replaced.
Replacing a FINE Cartridge
• You can set the machine to forcibly print a received fax even if the ink has run out.
Set Print when no ink in Auto print settings under Fax settings to Print.
However, part or all of the fax may not be printed since the ink has run out.
Also, the contents of the fax will not be stored in the machine's memory.
If the ink has already run out, we recommend that Do not print be selected for Received documents in
Auto print settings under Fax settings to store the received fax in the machine's memory. After you
replace the FINE cartridge and select Print for Received documents in Auto print settings, the fax
stored in the machine's memory will be printed automatically.
For details on how to set, see Using the Caller ID Service to Reject Calls.
875
Machine Does Not Switch Automatically between Voice and Fax
Calls
Set the receive mode to TEL priority mode, DRPD*1, or Network switch*2.
If the receive mode is TEL priority mode and an answering machine is connected to the machine, check
whether a proper message is played back when the answering machine answers.
876
Quality of Received Fax is Poor
Check3 Is the sender's original document or scanning area of the sender's fax machine
dirty?
The image quality of the fax is mainly determined by the sender's fax machine. Contact the sender and ask the
sender to check whether the scanning area of the fax machine is dirty.
• Contact the sender and ask the sender to check whether the machine is set to enable ECM transmission.
If the sender's or recipient's fax machine is not compatible with ECM, the fax will be sent/received without
automatic error correction.
• Reduce the reception start speed on RX start speed in Adv. communication in Adv. FAX settings under
Fax settings.
Check5 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory
877
Cannot Receive a Color Fax
878
Errors Often Occur When You Receive a Fax
Reduce the reception start speed on RX start speed in Adv. communication in Adv. FAX settings under Fax
settings.
Adv. FAX settings
879
Cannot Send a Fax Clearly
Loading Originals
Check2 Is the platen glass and/or the inner side of the document cover and/or the glass
of ADF dirty?
Clean the platen glass and/or the inner side of the document cover and/or the glass of ADF, then reload the
document.
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover
Note
• If the glass of ADF is dirty, black streaks appear on the paper as shown below.
Check3 Is the image quality setting or the scan contrast setting suitable for the
document?
On the LCD, select an image quality setting and a scan contrast setting that are suitable for the document.
Setting Items for Sending Faxes
Check4Is the original document loaded with the wrong side facing upwards or
downwards?
When loading a document on the platen glass, the side to be scanned should be face down.
When loading a document in the ADF, the side to be scanned should be face up.
When loading a document on the platen glass, press on the document cover with your hand when scanning.
880
Telephone Problems
Cannot Dial
Telephone Disconnects During a Call
881
Cannot Dial
Basic Connection
Check2 Is the telephone line type of the machine or the external device set correctly?
Check the telephone line type setting and change it as necessary.
Setting the Telephone Line Type
882
Telephone Disconnects During a Call
Check Is the telephone line cable or the telephone (or a peripheral device such as an
external telephone, an answering machine, or a computer modem) connected correctly?
Check that the telephone line cable and the telephone (or a peripheral device such as an external telephone, an
answering machine, or a computer modem) are connected correctly.
883
Problems with the Machine
The Machine Cannot Be Powered On
The Machine Turns Off Unintentionally
Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly
Cannot Communicate with the Machine with USB Connection
LCD Cannot Be Seen At All
An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the LCD
FINE Cartridge Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing
Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed
884
The Machine Cannot Be Powered On
Check2 Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged into the power cord
connector of the machine, then turn it back on.
Check3 Unplug the machine from the power supply, then plug the machine back in and
turn the machine back on after leaving it for at least 3 minutes.
If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.
885
The Machine Turns Off Unintentionally
If you do not want the machine to turn off automatically, open the printer driver setup window and in Auto Power
under the Maintenance sheet, select Disable for Auto Power Off.
Note
• You can also enable the machine to turn off automatically from the operation panel of the machine or
ScanGear (scanner driver).
• From the operation panel of the machine:
Auto power off
886
Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly
If your system environment is not fully compatible with Hi-Speed USB, the machine will operate at a lower
speed provided under USB 1.1. In this case, the machine operates properly but printing or scanning
speed may slow down due to communication speed.
Check Check the following to make sure that your system environment supports Hi-
Speed USB connection.
• Does the USB port on your computer support Hi-Speed USB connection?
• Does the USB cable or the USB hub support Hi-Speed USB connection?
Be sure to use a certified Hi-Speed USB cable. We recommend that the cable is no longer than around
10 feet / 3 meters.
• Does the operating system of your computer support Hi-Speed USB connection?
Obtain and install the latest update for your computer.
Important
• For details on Hi-Speed USB of your system environment, contact the manufacturer of your computer,
USB cable, or USB hub.
887
Cannot Communicate with the Machine with USB Connection
Check5 Make sure that Enable bidirectional support is selected in the Ports sheet of
the properties dialog box of the printer driver.
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
888
LCD Cannot Be Seen At All
The machine is not powered on. Connect the power cord and press the ON button.
889
An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the LCD
Select the language you want to be displayed according to the following procedure.
6. Use the button to select the language for the LCD, then press the OK button.
The desired language is displayed on the LCD.
890
FINE Cartridge Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing
The FINE cartridge holder will not move unless the power is on. If the POWER lamp is off, close the paper output
cover and turn the machine on.
Check3 Has the paper output cover been left open for 10 minutes or longer?
If the paper output cover is left open for more than 10 minutes, the FINE cartridge holder moves to the position to
protect it to prevent the print head from drying out. Close and reopen the paper output cover to return the FINE
cartridge holder to the position for replacing.
Check4 Has the machine been printing continuously for a long period?
If the machine has been printing continuously for a long time, the FINE cartridge holder may not move to the
position for replacing since the print head may overheat.
Note
• Do not open the paper output cover while printing is in progress; otherwise, an error occurs
891
Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed
892
Problems with Installation/Downloading
Cannot Install the MP Drivers
Easy-WebPrint EX Does Not Start Up or Easy-WebPrint EX Menu Does Not
Appear
How to Update MP Drivers in Network Environment
Uninstalling IJ Network Tool
893
Cannot Install the MP Drivers
• If the installation does not start even after the Setup CD-ROM is inserted into your computer's
disc drive:
◦ In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select the Explorer icon in Taskbar on Desktop, then select
Computer from the list on the left.
If you cannot install the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM, install them from our website.
Note
• If the CD-ROM icon is not displayed, try the following:
If the icon is not yet displayed, try different discs and see if they are displayed. If other discs are
displayed, there is a problem with the Setup CD-ROM. In this case, contact the service center.
894
• If you are unable to proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen:
Note
• The printer is not detected. Check the connection. may be displayed depending on the
computer you use.
Check1 Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the machine and the
computer.
Check2 Follow the procedure below to connect the machine and the computer
again.
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Unplug the USB cable from the machine and the computer, then connect it again.
3. Turn the machine on.
Check3 If you cannot resolve the problem, follow the procedure below to reinstall the
MP Drivers.
1. Click Cancel.
3. Click Exit on the "PIXMA XXX" screen (where "XXX" is your machine's name), then remove the CD-
ROM.
895
• In other cases:
If the MP Drivers were not installed correctly, uninstall the MP Drivers, restart your computer, and then
reinstall the MP Drivers.
If you reinstall the MP Drivers, install the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our
website.
Note
• If the installer was forced to be terminated due to a Windows error, the system may be in an
unstable condition and you may not be able to install the drivers. Restart your computer before
reinstalling.
896
Easy-WebPrint EX Does Not Start Up or Easy-WebPrint EX Menu
Does Not Appear
If Easy-WebPrint EX does not start up or its menu does not appear on Internet Explorer, confirm the
following.
Note
• If Easy-WebPrint EX is not installed on your computer, a message asking you to install it may be displayed
on the notification area on the desktop. Click the message, then follow the instructions on the computer
screen to install Easy-WebPrint EX.
• While the installation or download Easy-WebPrint EX is in progress, it is necessary to access the Internet.
Check3 Check the following to make sure that your system environment supports Easy-
WebPrint EX.
• Is it installed on the computer with proper system requirements?
• Did you start it using a compatible version of Internet Explorer?
Visit our website to confirm the details on the system requirements of Easy-WebPrint EX.
897
How to Update MP Drivers in Network Environment
To obtain the latest MP Drivers, access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP
Drivers for your model.
After uninstalling the MP Drivers, install the latest MP Drivers according to the regular procedure. When the
connection method selection screen is displayed, select Use the printer with wireless LAN connection
according to the connection method you use. The machine will be detected automatically in the network.
After making sure that the machine is detected, install the MP Drivers following the on-screen instructions.
Note
• You can use the machine over a LAN without performing setup again.
898
Uninstalling IJ Network Tool
Follow the procedure below to uninstall IJ Network Tool from your computer.
Important
• Even if IJ Network Tool is uninstalled, you can print and fax over network or scan from the computer.
However, you cannot change the network settings over network.
1. Select Control Panel from the Settings charm on Desktop > Programs > Programs and
Features.
2. Select Canon IJ Network Tool from the program list, then click Uninstall.
1. Click Start > Control Panel > Programs > Programs and Features.
2. Select Canon IJ Network Tool from the program list, then click Uninstall.
2. Select Canon IJ Network Tool from the program list, then click Remove.
899
About Errors/Messages Displayed
If an Error Occurs
A Message for Faxing Is Displayed on the Fax Standby Screen
A Message Is Displayed
900
If an Error Occurs
When an error occurs in printing such as the machine is out of paper or paper is jammed, a troubleshooting
message is displayed automatically. Take the appropriate action described in the message.
When an error occurs, a Support Code (error number) is displayed on the computer screen or the LCD.
• When a Support Code and a message are displayed on the computer screen:
Note
• You can confirm the actions against errors with Support Codes on your computer by searching a
Support Code.
For details on how to resolve errors without Support Codes, see A Message Is Displayed.
901
A Message for Faxing Is Displayed on the Fax Standby Screen
If a message is displayed on the Fax standby screen, take the corresponding action described below.
Message Action
Auto redial The machine is waiting to redial the recipient's number because the line was busy or the recipient did
not answer when you tried to send a document. Wait for the machine to automatically redial the
number. If you want to cancel automatic redialing, wait until the machine starts dialing the number, then
press the Stop button. You can also delete the document from machine's memory to cancel automatic
redialing.
Alternatively, you select If incompat., B&W for Color transmission in Adv. FAX settings under Fax
settings. The machine converts color documents into black & white data if the recipient's fax machine
does not support color faxing.
Adv. FAX settings
No tone The telephone line cable with a modular plug may not be plugged in properly.
detected Make sure that the cable is plugged in properly, and resend the fax after a while. If you still cannot send
the fax, select OFF for Dial tone detect in Adv. FAX settings under Fax settings.
Received in If the machine receives a fax under one of the following conditions, the machine will not be able to print
memory the received fax and will store it in the machine's memory. When the problem is resolved as described,
the fax stored in the machine's memory is printed automatically.
Note
• You can set the machine to forcibly print a received fax even if the ink has run out.
Set Print when no ink in Auto print settings under Fax settings to Print.
However, part or all of the fax may not be printed since the ink has run out.
Also, the contents of the fax will not be stored in the machine's memory.
If the ink has already run out, we recommend that Do not print be selected for Received
documents in Auto print settings under Fax settings to store the received fax in the
machine's memory. After you replace the FINE cartridge and select Print for Received
documents in Auto print settings, the fax stored in the machine's memory will be printed
automatically.
902
Auto print settings
• A different size of paper from that specified by Page size in FAX paper settings is loaded:
Load the same size of paper as that specified by Page size, then press the OK button.
• Do not print is selected for Received documents in Auto print settings under Fax settings:
You can print the faxes stored in the machine's memory from the Memory reference screen under
FAX menu.
Note
• To print the received faxes automatically, select Print for Received documents in Auto print
settings under Fax settings.
Contact the recipient and have the recipient check the fax machine. For an overseas call, add
pauses to the registered number.
The machine cannot send or receive documents to/from a fax machine that is incompatible with the
G3 standard. Contact the recipient and ask the recipient to check whether the fax machine is G3
compatible.
Set the machine to match the telephone line you are using.
Memory is The machine's memory is full because it has sent/received too many documents, or a detailed
full document.
Print the faxes stored in the machine's memory and delete them from the machine's memory.
When sending a fax, resend it. If this message still appears, delete the faxes stored in the machine's
memory, divide the faxes for sending, and send them again.
903
FAX info Transmission has been canceled because the machine could not detect the recipient's fax machine
does not information or the information did not match the dialed number. This message is displayed when
match Check RX FAX info in Security control under Fax settings is set to ON.
For details, see Sending Faxes after Checking Information (Checking the Recipient's Information).
Reception Reception has been rejected because the fax matches the fax rejection condition specified by FAX RX
rejected reject in Security control under Fax settings.
Waiting for If the machine receives a fax under one of the following conditions, the machine will not be able to print
report the reports. When the problem is resolved as described, the reports are printed automatically.
• A different size of paper from that specified by Page size in FAX paper settings is loaded:
Load the same size of paper as that specified by Page size, then press the OK button.
904
A Message Is Displayed
This section describes some of the errors or messages.
Note
• A Support Code (error number) is displayed on the computer or on the LCD for some error or message.
For details on errors with Support Codes, refer to List of Support Code for Error.
The size of the loaded paper is different from that specified in the paper size setting.
Load the same size of paper as that specified in the paper size setting, then press the OK button.
A power failure has occurred or the power cord has been unplugged when the faxes are stored in the
machine's memory.
Important
• If a power failure occurs or you unplug the power cord, all faxes stored in the machine's memory
are deleted.
• For details on how to unplug the power cord, see Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord.
After pressing the OK button, the list of the faxes deleted from the machine's memory (MEMORY
CLEAR REPORT) will be printed.
Press the OK button to dismiss the error, then try again after a while.
905
Error Regarding the Power Cord Being Unplugged Is Displayed
The power cord may have been unplugged while the machine was still on.
Check the error message that appears on the computer, then click OK.
See Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord for unplugging the power cord.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
Check1 If the POWER lamp is off, make sure that the power plug is plugged in, then
turn the machine on.
While the POWER lamp is flashing, the machine is initializing. Wait until the POWER lamp stops flashing and
remains lit.
Check2 Make sure that the printer port is configured appropriately in the printer driver.
* In the following instructions, "XXX" signifies your machine's name.
• In Windows XP, select the Start menu > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Printers
and Faxes.
• In Windows 8.1, Windows 8, or Windows 7, right-click the "Canon XXX series Printer" icon (where
"XXX" is your machine's name), then select Printer properties.
• In Windows Vista or Windows XP, right-click the "Canon XXX series Printer" icon (where "XXX" is
your machine's name), then select Properties.
Make sure that a port named "USBnnn" (where "n" is a number) with "Canon XXX series Printer"
appearing in the Printer column is selected for Print to the following port(s).
906
Note
• When the machine is used over LAN, the port name of the machine is displayed as
"CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx". "xxxxxxxxxx" is the character string generated from the MAC address or a
character string specified by the user when setting up the machine.
Reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our website.
• Printing does not start even though the machine is connected to the computer using a USB cable
and the port named "USBnnn" is selected:
In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select My Printer on the Start screen to start My Printer. If My
Printer is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for "My Printer".
Set the correct printer port on Diagnose and Repair Printer. Follow the on-screen instructions to
set the correct printer port, then select your machine's name.
In Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP, click Start and select All programs, Canon
Utilities, Canon My Printer, Canon My Printer, then select Diagnose and Repair Printer. Follow
the on-screen instructions to set the correct printer port, then select your machine's name.
If the problem is not resolved, reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from
our website.
• Printing does not start even though the port named "CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx" is selected when the
machine is used over LAN:
Launch IJ Network Tool, and select "CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx" as you confirmed in step 4, then
associate the port with the printer using Associate Port in the Settings menu.
If the problem is not resolved, reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from
our website.
Check3 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer properly.
When the machine is connected to your computer with a USB cable, make sure that the USB cable is securely
plugged in to the machine and the computer, then check the followings:
• If you are using a relay device such as a USB hub, disconnect it, connect the machine directly to the
computer, and try printing again. If printing starts normally, there is a problem with the relay device.
Consult the reseller of the relay device for details.
• There could also be a problem with the USB cable. Replace the USB cable and try printing again.
When you use the machine over LAN, make sure that the machine is set up to be used over network correctly.
Check5 When the machine is connected to your computer with a USB cable, check
the status of the device on your computer.
Follow the procedure below to check the status of the device.
If the User Account Control screen is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.
• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Control Panel from the Settings charm on Desktop >
Hardware and Sound > Device Manager.
907
• In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, click Control Panel, Hardware and Sound, then Device Manager.
• In Windows XP, click Control Panel, Performance and Maintenance, System, then click Device
Manager on the Hardware sheet.
If the USB Printing Support Properties screen is not displayed, make sure that the machine is correctly
connected to the computer.
Check3 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer properly.
3. Click the General tab and make sure that there is no indication of a problem with the device.
Check If an error message is displayed outside the printer status monitor, check the
following:
• "Could not spool successfully due to insufficient disk space"
Delete any unnecessary files to increase the amount of free space on the disk.
If the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program is installed, a confirmation screen asking for
permission to send the printer and application software usage information will be displayed every month
for about ten years.
Read the instructions on the screen and follow the procedure below.
908
• If you agree to participate in the survey program:
Click Agree, then follow the on-screen instructions. The printer usage information will be sent via the
Internet. If you have followed the on-screen instructions, the information will be sent automatically
from the second time onward and the confirmation screen will not be displayed again.
Note
• When the information is being sent, a caution screen such as an Internet security screen may be
displayed. In this case, confirm that the program name is "IJPLMUI.exe", then allow it.
• If you deselect the Send automatically from the next time check box, the information will not
be sent automatically from the second time onward and a confirmation screen will be displayed at
the time of the next survey. To send the information automatically, see Changing the confirmation
screen setting:.
Click Do not agree. The confirmation screen will be closed, and the survey at that time is skipped.
The confirmation screen will be displayed again one month later.
To uninstall the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program, click Uninstall, then follow the
on-screen instructions.
◦ In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Control Panel from the Settings charm on Desktop >
Programs > Programs and Features.
◦ In Windows 7, or Windows Vista, select the Start menu > Control Panel > Programs >
Programs and Features.
◦ In Windows XP, select the Start menu > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
909
Note
• In Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning
dialog box may appear when installing, uninstalling or starting up software.
This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.
3. Select Change.
If you select Yes after you have followed the on-screen instructions, the confirmation screen will
be displayed at the time of the next survey.
Note
• If you select Uninstall (or Remove in Windows XP), the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax
Extended Survey Program is uninstalled. Follow the on-screen instructions.
910
If You Cannot Resolve the Problem
If you cannot resolve the problem with any of the workarounds in this chapter, please contact the seller of
the machine or the service center.
Canon support staff are trained to be able to provide technical support to satisfy customers.
Caution
• If the machine emits any unusual sound, smoke, or odor, turn it off immediately. Unplug the power cord
from the outlet and contact the seller or the service center. Never attempt to repair or disassemble the
machine yourself.
• Attempts by customers to repair or take apart the machine will invalidate any warranty regardless of
whether the warranty has expired.
* Your machine's name is located on the front cover of the setup manual.
• Serial number: please refer to the setup manual
911
List of Support Code for Error
The support code appears on the LCD and the computer screen when an error occurs.
"Support Code" means the error number and appears with an error message.
When an error occurs, check the support code displayed on the LCD or the computer screen and take the
appropriate action.
• 2000 to 2ZZZ
2900 2901
• 4000 to 4ZZZ
4100 4103
• 5000 to 5ZZZ
5B14 5B15
• 6000 to 6ZZZ
6946
• 9000 to 9ZZZ
9500
912
• A000 to ZZZZ
About the support code for paper jam, you can also refer to List of Support Code for Error (When Paper Is
Jammed).
913
List of Support Code for Error (When Paper Is Jammed)
If the paper is jammed, remove it following the procedure appropriate for each case.
• If you can see the jammed paper at the paper output slot:
1300
• If you cannot see the jammed paper at the paper output slot:
1303
• If the paper tears and you cannot remove it from the paper output slot or from the transport unit:
2801
In Other Cases
914
1300
Cause
Paper is jammed in the paper output slot.
Action
If you can see the jammed paper at the paper output slot, remove the paper following the procedure
below.
Important
• The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when the received
fax or the unsent fax are stored in the machine's memory.
Turn the machine off after making sure that it has completed sending or receiving all the faxes. Do
not unplug the power cord when turning the machine off.
If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
Note
• If you cannot pull the paper out, turn the machine off and turn it back on. The paper may be
ejected automatically.
• If you need to turn off the machine to remove jammed paper during printing, press the Stop
button to cancel print jobs before turning off the machine.
• If you cannot pull the paper out from the paper output slot, try to pull the paper out from the
transport unit.
1303
• If the paper tears and you cannot remove the jammed paper from the paper output slot, remove
the paper from inside the machine.
915
If you turned off the machine in step 1, all print jobs in the queue are canceled. Reprint if necessary.
Note
• When reloading the paper, make sure that you are using suitable paper for printing and are
loading it correctly.
• We recommend you use paper other than A5 sized one to print documents with photos or
graphics; otherwise, the printout may curl and cause paper exit jams.
If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the machine, or if the paper jam error continues
after removing the paper, contact the service center.
916
1303
Cause
Paper is jammed inside the machine at the transport unit.
Action
If you cannot see the paper at the paper output slot, remove the paper from the transport unit.
Important
• The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when the received
fax or the unsent fax are stored in the machine's memory.
Turn the machine off after making sure that it has completed sending or receiving all the faxes. Do
not unplug the power cord when turning the machine off.
If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
Note
• If you need to turn off the machine to remove jammed paper during printing, press the Stop button to
cancel print jobs before turning off the machine.
Important
• Stand the machine on a wide and flat surface such as a desk.
• When you stand the machine, hold it securely and be careful not to hit it on a hard object.
917
5. Pull out the jammed paper slowly.
When you pull the jammed paper, support the machine with your hand so that it does not fall down.
Note
• If the paper is rolled up and it is difficult to remove, grasp the edges of the paper, then remove
the jammed paper.
• If you cannot remove the jammed paper from the transport unit, close the transport unit, take
back the machine in original position, then remove the paper from inside the machine.
Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine
Note
• After you close the transport unit, take back the machine in original position at once.
7. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the machine, or if the paper jam error continues
after removing the paper, contact the service center.
918
2801
Cause
The document is jammed in the ADF.
Action
Remove the document following the procedure below.
Important
• Do not open the document cover if the document is jammed. The jammed document may be torn.
• The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when the received
fax or the unsent fax are stored in the machine's memory.
Turn the machine off after making sure that it has completed sending or receiving all the faxes. Do
not unplug the power cord when turning the machine off.
If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
• If the original remains in the ADF by pressing the Stop button while the machine is scanning
the document:
If you press the Stop button during scanning then the document remained in the ADF, the message
about the paper remained in the ADF appears on the LCD. Press the OK button so that the remaining
document is automatically fed out.
If a multi-page document is loaded, open the document feeder cover after removing any pages
other than the jammed page from the ADF.
919
5. Close the document feeder cover, then turn on the machine.
When rescanning the document after clearing the error, rescan it from the first page.
If you cannot remove the document or the document tears inside the machine, or if the document jam
error continues after removing the document, contact the service center.
Note
• The document may not feed properly depending on the media type, or your environment, such as
when the temperature and humidity are either too high or too low.
In this case, reduce the number of document pages to approximately half of the loading capacity.
• If the original is jammed in the ADF (from the paper feed side):
3. Close the document tray, then open the document feeder cover slowly.
920
5. Close the document feeder cover, then turn on the machine.
When rescanning the document after clearing the error, rescan it from the first page.
If you cannot remove the document or the document tears inside the machine, or if the document jam
error continues after removing the document, contact the service center.
Note
• The document may not feed properly depending on the media type, or your environment, such as
when the temperature and humidity are either too high or too low.
In this case, reduce the number of document pages to approximately half of the loading capacity.
921
Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine
If the jammed paper tears and you cannot remove the paper either from the paper output slot or from the
transport unit, or if the jammed paper remains inside the machine, remove the paper following the procedure
below.
Important
• The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when the received
fax or the unsent fax are stored in the machine's memory.
Turn the machine off after making sure that it has completed sending or receiving all the faxes. Do not
unplug the power cord when turning the machine off.
If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
Note
• If you need to turn off the machine to remove jammed paper during printing, press the Stop button to
cancel print jobs before turning off the machine.
1. Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Important
• Do not touch the clear film (A).
If the paper or your hands touch the clear film and blot or scratch it, the machine can be damaged.
3. Make sure that the jammed paper is not under the FINE cartridge holder.
922
If the jammed paper is under the FINE cartridge holder, move the FINE cartridge holder to the right edge
or the left edge whichever is easier to remove the paper.
When you move the FINE cartridge holder, hold the FINE cartridge holder and slide it slowly to the right
edge or the left edge.
5. Pull the paper slowly not to tear it, then pull the paper out.
923
If the paper is torn, a piece of paper may remain inside the machine. Check the following and remove the
piece of paper if it remains.
• Does the piece of paper remain under the FINE cartridge holder?
Note
• When reloading the paper, make sure that you are using suitable paper for printing and are
loading it correctly. If the message about paper jam is displayed on the LCD of the machine or on
the computer screen when you resume printing after removing all the jammed paper, a piece of
paper may remain inside the machine. In this case, confirm that no piece of paper remains inside
the machine.
If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the machine, or if the paper jam error continues
after removing the paper, contact the service center.
924
In Other Cases
Make sure of the following:
Check1 Are there any foreign objects around the paper output slot?
925
1003
Cause
The machine is out of paper, or paper does not feed.
Action
Close the paper output tray, pull the cassette out, then load the paper.
When you load the paper, insert the paper stack until the leading edge touches the far end of the
cassette.
After loading the paper, push the cassette so that the mark on the cassette aligns with the front panel
as illustrated below.
When the cassette is inserted properly, you hear an electric sound once.
Open the paper output tray, then press the machine's OK button.
Note
• If you want to cancel printing, press the machine's Stop button.
926
1200
Cause
The paper output cover is open.
Action
Close the paper output cover and wait for a while.
927
1203
Cause
The paper output cover is opened while printing is in progress.
Action
If paper is left inside the machine, remove the paper slowly with both hands and close the paper output
cover.
The machine ejects one blank sheet of paper and resumes printing from the next paper.
The machine will not reprint the page that was printed when the paper output cover is opened. Try printing
again.
Important
• Do not open or close the paper output cover while printing is in progress, as this can damage the
machine.
928
1250
Cause
The paper output tray is closed.
Action
Open the paper output tray to resume printing.
929
1401
Cause
The FINE cartridge is not installed.
Action
Install the FINE cartridge.
If the error is not resolved, the FINE cartridge may be damaged. Contact the service center.
930
1403
Cause
The FINE cartridge cannot be recognized.
Action
Replace the FINE cartridge.
If the error is not resolved, the FINE cartridge may be damaged. Contact the service center.
931
1485
Cause
Appropriate ink cartridge is not installed.
Action
Printing cannot be executed because the ink cartridge is not compatible with this machine.
932
1682
Cause
The FINE cartridge cannot be recognized.
Action
Replace the FINE cartridge.
If the error is not resolved, the FINE cartridge may be damaged. Contact the service center.
933
1684
Cause
The ink cartridge cannot be recognized.
Action
Printing cannot be executed because the ink cartridge may not be installed properly or may not be
compatible with this machine.
934
1686
Cause
The ink may have run out.
Action
The function for detecting the remaining ink level will be disabled since the ink level cannot be correctly
detected.
If you want to continue printing without this function, press the machine's Stop button for at least 5
seconds.
Canon recommends to use new genuine Canon cartridges in order to obtain optimum qualities.
Please be advised that Canon shall not be liable for any malfunction or trouble caused by continuation of
printing under the ink out condition.
Note
• If the function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled, is displayed on the LCD.
• Since the information contained in the fax may be lost if it is printed in this condition, the received fax
will not be printed and will be stored in the machine's memory until the ink cartridge is replaced. You
must manually print out faxes that were stored in the memory. You can change the setting so that the
received fax is forcibly printed out instead of being stored in the memory, but all or part of the fax
information may not be printed because of the ink out condition.
935
1688
Cause
The ink has run out.
Action
Replace the ink cartridge and close the paper output cover.
If printing is in progress and you want to continue printing, press the machine's Stop button for at least 5
seconds with the ink cartridge installed. Then printing can continue under the ink out condition.
The function for detecting the remaining ink level will be disabled.
Replace the empty ink cartridge immediately after the printing. The resulting print quality is not
satisfactory, if printing is continued under the ink out condition.
Note
• If the function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled, is displayed on the LCD.
• Since the information contained in the fax may be lost if it is printed in this condition, the received fax
will not be printed and will be stored in the machine's memory until the ink cartridge is replaced. You
must manually print out faxes that were stored in the memory. You can change the setting so that the
received fax is forcibly printed out instead of being stored in the memory, but all or part of the fax
information may not be printed because of the ink out condition.
936
168A
Cause
The FINE cartridge is not installed properly, or the FINE cartridge not compatible with this machine is
installed.
Action
Open the paper output cover, then remove the FINE cartridges.
Make sure that the FINE cartridge compatible with the machine is installed.
Then install the FINE cartridges again. Push up the FINE cartridge until it clicks into place.
When the FINE cartridge is installed properly, you hear an electric sound once.
937
1702
Cause
The ink absorber is almost full.
Action
Press the machine's OK button to continue printing. Contact the service center.
938
1703
Cause
The ink absorber is almost full.
Action
Press the machine's OK button to continue printing. Contact the service center.
939
1704
Cause
The ink absorber is almost full.
Action
Press the machine's OK button to continue printing. Contact the service center.
940
1705
Cause
The ink absorber is almost full.
Action
Press the machine's OK button to continue printing. Contact the service center.
941
1712
Cause
The ink absorber is almost full.
Action
Press the machine's OK button to continue printing. Contact the service center.
942
1713
Cause
The ink absorber is almost full.
Action
Press the machine's OK button to continue printing. Contact the service center.
943
1714
Cause
The ink absorber is almost full.
Action
Press the machine's OK button to continue printing. Contact the service center.
944
1715
Cause
The ink absorber is almost full.
Action
Press the machine's OK button to continue printing. Contact the service center.
945
1871
Cause
The cassette is not inserted.
Action
After loading the paper, push the cassette so that the mark on the cassette aligns with the front panel
as illustrated below.
When the cassette is inserted properly, you hear an electric sound once.
Open the paper output tray, then press the machine's OK button.
Note
• The cassette paper information registration screen is displayed after inserting the cassette. Register
the cassette paper information according to the paper you loaded in the cassette.
• If you want to cancel printing, press the machine's Stop button.
946
1890
Cause
The protective material for the FINE cartridge holder or the tape may remain attached to the holder.
Action
Open the paper output cover, then confirm that the protective material or the tape does not remain
attached to the FINE cartridge holder.
If you find the protective material or the tape remains attached, remove it, then close the paper output
cover.
947
2110
Cause
The paper settings for printing or copying are different from the cassette paper information registered to
the machine.
Note
• For details on the proper combination of paper settings you can specify by the printer driver or on the
LCD:
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type) (Windows)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type) (Mac)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size) (Windows)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size) (Mac)
• For copying, specify the paper settings for copying so that they match the cassette paper information.
If the paper settings for printing or copying are different from the cassette paper information registered to
the machine as the following, a message is displayed on the LCD.
Paper size: B5
Paper size: A4
Action
Pressing the machine's OK button, the following screen is displayed on the LCD.
Note
• Depending on the setting, the choices below may not be displayed.
948
For example, when the paper setting for printing or copying is B5 and the cassette paper information
registered to the machine is A4, the machine starts printing or copying with B5 on the paper loaded in
the cassette.
For example, when the paper setting for printing or copying is B5 and the cassette paper information
registered to the machine is A4, you load B5 sized paper in the cassette before you start printing or
copying.
The cassette paper information registration screen is displayed after replacing the paper and inserting
the cassette. Register the cassette paper information according to the paper you loaded in the
cassette.
Note
• If you do not know what paper information to register to the machine, press the Back button when the
screen to select the operation is displayed. When the previous screen is displayed, confirm the paper
size and the media type, then register them to the machine.
• For details on the proper combination of paper settings you can specify by the printer driver or on the
LCD:
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type) (Windows)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type) (Mac)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size) (Windows)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size) (Mac)
Cancel
Cancels printing.
Select when you change the paper settings specified for printing or copying. Change the paper
settings, then try printing again.
Important
• About the default setting for displaying the message which prevents misprinting:
The default setting is different between when you print or copy from the operation panel of the
machine and when you print using the printer driver.
• When you print or copy from the operation panel of the machine, the message which prevents
misprinting is enabled by default.
To change the setting for printing or copying using the operation panel of the machine:
• When you print using the printer driver, the message which prevents misprinting is disabled by
default.
949
The machine starts printing or copying even though the paper settings for printing or copying and the
cassette paper information registered to the machine are different.
950
2120
Cause
The paper settings of the cassette is not complete.
Action
If the following screen is displayed, the paper settings of the cassette is not complete.
Press the machine's OK button to terminate the paper settings of the cassette.
951
2700
Cause
Possible causes include the following.
• Some errors occurred while scanning and the document is remained in the ADF.
Action
Take the corresponding actions below.
• When you copy, press the OK button to dismiss the error, and try to copy again.
• When the document is remained in the ADF, press the OK button to feed out the document.
• When you scan, press the Stop button to cancel the scanning, and try to scan again.
952
2802
Cause
No document in the ADF.
Action
Press the OK button to resolve the error, then operate again after loading documents.
953
2803
Cause
The document is too long or is jammed in the ADF.
Action
Press the OK button to dismiss the error. Then make sure that the document you are loading meets the
machine's requirements before redoing the operation.
If the document is jammed, remove the jammed document following the procedure below.
Important
• Do not open the document cover if the document is jammed. The jammed document may be torn.
• The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when the received
fax or the unsent fax are stored in the machine's memory.
Turn the machine off after making sure that it has completed sending or receiving all the faxes. Do
not unplug the power cord when turning the machine off.
If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
If a multi-page document is loaded, open the document feeder cover after removing any pages
other than the jammed page from the ADF.
954
5. Close the document feeder cover, then turn on the machine.
When rescanning the document after clearing the error, rescan it from the first page.
If you cannot remove the document or the document tears inside the machine, or if the document jam
error continues after removing the document, contact the service center.
Note
• The document may not feed properly depending on the media type, or your environment, such as
when the temperature and humidity are either too high or too low.
In this case, reduce the number of document pages to approximately half of the loading capacity.
• If the original is jammed in the ADF (from the paper feed side):
3. Close the document tray, then open the document feeder cover slowly.
955
5. Close the document feeder cover, then turn on the machine.
When rescanning the document after clearing the error, rescan it from the first page.
If you cannot remove the document or the document tears inside the machine, or if the document jam
error continues after removing the document, contact the service center.
Note
• The document may not feed properly depending on the media type, or your environment, such as
when the temperature and humidity are either too high or too low.
In this case, reduce the number of document pages to approximately half of the loading capacity.
956
2900
Cause
Scanning the print head alignment sheet has failed.
Action
Press the OK button to dismiss the error, then take the actions described below.
• Make sure that the print head alignment sheet is set in the correct position and orientation on the
platen glass.
• Make sure the platen glass and the print head alignment sheet are not dirty.
• Make sure the type and size of loaded paper is suitable for Automatic Print Head Alignment.
For Automatic Print Head Alignment, always load one sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper.
Print the nozzle check pattern to check the status of the print head.
957
2901
Cause
Printing of the print head alignment pattern is complete and the machine is in waiting for scanning the
sheet.
Action
Proceed to scan the printed alignment pattern.
Load the print head alignment sheet with the printed side facing down and align the mark on the
upper left corner of the sheet with the alignment mark .
2. Close the document cover gently, then press the machine's OK button.
The machine starts scanning the print head alignment sheet, and the print head position will be
adjusted automatically.
958
4100
Cause
The specified data cannot be printed.
Action
When you print the contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM, confirm the message on the computer
screen, make sure that genuine Canon FINE cartridges are all installed properly, then start printing again.
959
4103
Cause
Cannot perform printing with the current print settings.
Action
Press the machine's Stop button to cancel printing.
960
5011
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
961
5012
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
962
5040
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
963
5100
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Cancel printing and turn off the machine. Then clear the jammed paper or protective material that is
preventing the FINE cartridge holder from moving, and turn on the machine again.
• Confirm that there are no materials (e.g. the protective material or jammed paper) that is preventing
the FINE cartridge holder from moving.
Important
• When you clear the jammed paper or protective material that is preventing the FINE cartridge holder
from moving, be careful not to touch the clear film (A).
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
964
5200
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
965
5400
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
966
5B02
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Contact the service center.
967
5B03
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Contact the service center.
968
5B04
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Contact the service center.
969
5B05
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Contact the service center.
970
5B12
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Contact the service center.
971
5B13
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Contact the service center.
972
5B14
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Contact the service center.
973
5B15
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Contact the service center.
974
6000
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
975
6500
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
976
6800
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
977
6801
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
978
6900
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
979
6901
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
980
6902
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
981
6910
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
982
6911
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
983
6930
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
984
6931
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
985
6932
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
986
6933
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
987
6936
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
988
6937
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
989
6938
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
990
6939
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
991
693A
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
992
6940
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
993
6941
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
994
6942
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
995
6943
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
996
6944
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
997
6945
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
998
6946
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
999
9500
Cause
Printer error has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
1000
B201
Cause
An error requiring you to contact the service center has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
1001
B202
Cause
An error requiring you to contact the service center has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
1002
B203
Cause
An error requiring you to contact the service center has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
1003
B204
Cause
An error requiring you to contact the service center has occurred.
Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.
1004